Page 1 of 3. w. ®. Vol. CHI. No. 39LSiC-.l IMIII \I)H PHIA. Thursday. April 2. 1987 © 1M7Tt»MH'l. Palmer,Trump, Regan
Preface
1
______________ 2 ______________ 3 Configuration options ______________ 4 Installation ______________ 5 Wiring and Assembling ______________ Commissioning and 6 Diagnostics ______________ General technical 7 specifications ______________ 8 Interface modules ______________ 9 Terminal modules ______________ 10 Power modules ______________ 11 Digital Electronic Modules ______________ 12 Analog electronic modules ______________ 13 4 IQ-SENSE ______________ 14 RESERVE modules ______________ A Order numbers ______________ B Dimension drawings ______________ Address space of the inputs C and outputs ______________ D Response Times ______________ Determining the Leakage Resistance of an ET 200S E ______________ Station Product overview
SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System ET200S
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S
SIMATIC Distributed I/O System ET 200S Operating Instructions
The following supplement is part of this documentation: No.
Designation
Drawing number
Edition
1 2
Product information Product information
A5E00352937-02 A5E00583609-01
01/2005 07/2005
Edition 07/2005
EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Special Measures for Interference-Free Operation
F ______________
Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. Danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Notice indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.
Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage Note the following: Warning This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG Automation and Drives Postfach 48 48 90437 NÜRNBERG GERMANY
Order No.: EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 Edition 09/2005
Copyright © Siemens AG 2005. Technical data subject to change
Preface Purpose of the manual The information in this manual enables you to operate the distributed I/O system ET 200S on the PROFIBUS DP as DP-Slave: • As a DP slave on PROFIBUS DP • As a PROFINET IO device on PROFINET
Required level of knowledge Knowledge of the field of automation engineering is required to understand the manual.
Scope of the manual This manual applies to the components of the ET 200S distributed I/O system specified in the appendix. The manual contains a description of the components that were valid at the time the manual was published. We reserve the right to enclose a Product Information bulletin containing up-to-date information regarding new components and new versions of components.
Changes since the previous version The following changes/additions have been made since the previous version of the manual: • Function enhancement for interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE • Function enhancement for interface module IM151-3 PN
Approvals See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."
CE certification See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."
Labeling for Australia (C-tick mark) See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
iii
Preface
Standards See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."
Position in the information landscape The following table shows an overview of the contents of the handbooks for the ET 200S: Manual
Contents
ET 200S Distributed I/O System
• • • •
Installing and wiring of ET 200S Commissioning and diagnostics of ET 200S Technical specifications of IM151-1, digital, and analog electronic modules Order numbers for ET 200S
ET 200S Motor Starters
• • • • • •
Installing and wiring of motor starters Commissioning and diagnostics of motor starters Technical specifications of motor starters Fail-safe motor starters Safety-integrated SIGUARD system Order numbers for motor starters
PROFINET System Description
• • • •
Basic principles of PROFINET Network components and structures Data exchange and communication PROFINET engineering
From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO
• • • •
Differences Blocks System status lists Diagnostics
Fail-Safe Motor Starters Safety-Integrated SIGUARD System
ET 200S IM151-7 CPU Interface Module and Instruction List • • • •
Addressing of IM151-7 CPU ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU in the PROFIBUS network Commissioning and diagnostics of IM151-7 CPU Technical specifications of the IM151-7 CPU
ET 200S FC Frequency Converter operating instructions
• • • • •
Installation Commissioning Open- and closed-loop control techniques Protection and monitoring functions Technical specifications
ET 200S FC Frequency Converter list manual
• • •
Parameter list Function diagrams Alarm and fault messages
Positioning ET 200S
• • • • •
1STEP 5V/204kHz 1POS INC/Digital 1POS SSI/Digital 1POS INC/Analog 1POS SSI/Analog
Technological functions ET 200S
• • • •
1COUNT 24V/100kHz 1COUNT 5V/500kHz 1SSI 2PULSE
iv
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Preface Manual
Contents
Serial Interface Module ET 200S
• •
1SI 3964/ASCII 1SI MODBUS/USS
Fail-safe modules
• •
4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe 4 F-DO DC24/2A PROFIsafe
SIWAREX CS
•
Measurement of weight and power values
The manuals are available on the Internet in the languages German, English, French, Spanish and Italian (see Service & Support on the Internet).
Guide You can quickly access specific information in the manual by using the following aids: • At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of the figures and tables that appear in the manual. • An overview of the contents of each section is indicated on the left of each page throughout the manual. • Following the appendices, you will find a glossary in which important technical terms used in the manual are defined. • At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index enabling rapid access to the information you are looking for.
Special note In addition to this manual, you will also need the manual for the DP master or PROFINET IO controller you are using (see appendix).
Note This manual contains a detailed listing of the contents of the ET 200S manuals (reference in "See also"). We recommend that you begin by orienting yourself to the manuals (and portions thereof) that are most relevant to solving your task.
Recycling and disposal Due to the fact that it is low in contaminants, the ET 200S is recyclable. Contact a certified electronic-waste disposal company to recycle and dispose of your old equipment in an environment-friendly manner.
SIMATIC Technical Support, Contact Persons and Training You will find information on this in the product information on the intranet at http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/19293011
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
v
Preface
See also Module order numbers (Page A-1) Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module (Page A-9) Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts (Page A-8) Order numbers for ET 200S network components (Page A-7) Order numbers for ET 200S accessories (Page A-6) Standards, certifications, and approvals (Page 7-1) Order numbers for manuals (Page A-9)
vi
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Table of contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... iii 1
2
3
Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1
What are distributed I/O systems?............................................................................................. 1-1
1.2
What is PROFINET IO? ............................................................................................................. 1-3
1.3
What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system? ............................................................................ 1-4
1.4
Guide to the ET 200S manuals................................................................................................ 1-10
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S ........................................................................................ 2-1 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.1.7
Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP............................................................................................ 2-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 2-1 Example: Installing ET 200S...................................................................................................... 2-3 Example: Wiring and assembling ET 200S ............................................................................... 2-4 Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager............................................................... 2-5 Example: Creating a user program............................................................................................ 2-6 Example: Switching on ET 200S................................................................................................ 2-6 Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages ............................................................................... 2-7
2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7
Commissioning on PROFINET IO ........................................................................................... 2-10 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 2-10 Example: Installing and wiring ET 200S .................................................................................. 2-12 Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager............................................................. 2-13 Example: Assigning device names for the IO device............................................................... 2-14 Example: Creating a user program.......................................................................................... 2-14 Example: Switching on ET 200S.............................................................................................. 2-15 Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages ............................................................................. 2-16
Configuration options.............................................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1
Precisely Modular System ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2
ET 200S Power Supply.............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3
Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential.......................................... 3-4
3.4
Configuration options for the interface modules ........................................................................ 3-6
3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5
Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules ......................... 3-9 Electronic modules and applications ......................................................................................... 3-9 Identifying the proper terminal module for a power module .................................................... 3-14 Configuration example: Terminal modules for power modules ............................................... 3-16 Identifying the proper terminal module for an electronic module............................................. 3-19 Configuration example: Terminal modules for electronic modules.......................................... 3-20
3.6
Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................ 3-23
3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3
Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP............................................................................... 3-25 Cycle Synchronization on the PROFIBUS DP - Basics ........................................................... 3-25 Parameterizing Cycle Synchronization .................................................................................... 3-26 Fault correction during isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP .......................................... 3-29
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
vii
Table of contents
4
5
6
viii
3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.8.5 3.8.6 3.8.7
Option handling on PROFIBUS DP ......................................................................................... 3-30 Basic principles of option handling on PROFIBUS DP ............................................................ 3-30 Principle of operation of option handling.................................................................................. 3-30 Requirements for option handling ............................................................................................ 3-32 Example: Use of RESERVE modules...................................................................................... 3-33 Assigning parameters for option handling................................................................................ 3-34 Controlling and monitoring options .......................................................................................... 3-35 Fault correction during option handling.................................................................................... 3-37
3.9
Identification data ..................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.10
Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system ............................................................................. 3-41
3.11
Limitations on the number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration.......... 3-43
Installation .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1 4.1
Basic principles of installation .................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2
Mounting the interface module................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3
Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules ....................................................................... 4-6
4.4
Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module................................................................... 4-9
4.5
Mounting the terminating module............................................................................................. 4-11
4.6
Mounting the shield connection ............................................................................................... 4-13
4.7
Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates .............................................................. 4-15
4.8
Setting the PROFIBUS address............................................................................................... 4-17
Wiring and Assembling ........................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1
General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S ......................................................... 5-1
5.2
Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply ........................................................... 5-3
5.3
Electrical configuration of the ET 200S...................................................................................... 5-6
5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 5.4.9 5.4.10
Wiring the ET 200S .................................................................................................................... 5-7 Wiring rules for ET 200S ............................................................................................................ 5-7 Wiring a terminal module with screw terminals.......................................................................... 5-7 Wiring a terminal module with spring terminals ......................................................................... 5-8 Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect............................................................................... 5-9 Wiring terminal modules........................................................................................................... 5-12 Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted power module .................................... 5-15 Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted electronic module .............................. 5-16 Wiring the IM151-1 BASIC, IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface modules..................................................................................................................... 5-17 Wiring IM151-3 PN interface module ....................................................................................... 5-19 Wiring the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module ............................................................ 5-20
5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2
Inserting and identifying electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-25 Inserting and identifying electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-25 Removing and inserting electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-28
5.6
Assigning a device name for the IO device.............................................................................. 5-30
Commissioning and Diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 6-1 6.1
Safety tests prior to commissioning ........................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2
Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP.................................................................. 6-1 Basic principles of project design for the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP...................................... 6-1 Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................... 6-3
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Table of contents 6.2.2.1 6.2.2.2 6.2.2.3 6.2.2.4 6.2.2.5 6.2.2.6 6.2.3 6.2.3.1 6.2.3.2 6.2.4 6.2.4.1 6.2.4.2 6.2.4.3 6.2.4.4 6.2.4.5 6.2.4.6 6.2.4.7 6.2.4.8 6.2.4.9 6.2.4.10
Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software ............................................................. 6-3 Grouping modules for configuration........................................................................................... 6-4 Grouping of digital input modules .............................................................................................. 6-6 Grouping of digital output modules ............................................................................................ 6-7 Grouping of motor starters ......................................................................................................... 6-8 Example of a project design....................................................................................................... 6-8 Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP.................................................... 6-10 Commissioning ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP........................................................................... 6-10 Startup of the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP.............................................................................. 6-11 Diagnostics using LED display................................................................................................. 6-13 LED displays on the interface module ..................................................................................... 6-13 LED displays on the power module ......................................................................................... 6-15 LED displays on digital electronic modules ............................................................................. 6-16 LED displays on analog electronic modules ............................................................................ 6-17 LED displays on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module ............................................... 6-18 LED displays on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic module ................................................. 6-19 LED displays on the 1SSI electronic module........................................................................... 6-20 LED displays on the STEP 5V/204kHz electronic module ...................................................... 6-21 LED displays on the 2PULSE electronic module..................................................................... 6-22 LED displays on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, and 1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules ..................................................................................... 6-23 6.2.4.11 LED displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial interface module.............. 6-25 6.2.4.12 LED displays on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module .............................................................. 6-26 6.2.5 Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules...................................................................... 6-27 6.2.6 Evaluating interrupts by ET 200S ............................................................................................ 6-27 6.2.7 Diagnostics with STEP 5 and STEP 7 ..................................................................................... 6-29 6.2.7.1 Reading out the diagnostics..................................................................................................... 6-29 6.2.7.2 Structure of the slave diagnostics ............................................................................................ 6-32 6.2.7.3 Station statuses 1 to 3 ............................................................................................................. 6-34 6.2.7.4 Master PROFIBUS address..................................................................................................... 6-35 6.2.7.5 Manufacturer ID ....................................................................................................................... 6-36 6.2.7.6 Identifier-related diagnostics .................................................................................................... 6-36 6.2.7.7 Module status........................................................................................................................... 6-37 6.2.7.8 Channel-specific diagnostics ................................................................................................... 6-40 6.2.7.9 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................. 6-49 6.2.7.10 Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP ................................................. 6-57
6.3 6.3.1 6.3.1.1 6.3.1.2 6.3.1.3 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.7.1 6.3.7.2 6.3.7.3 6.3.7.4 6.3.7.5 6.3.7.6
Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO ................................................................. 6-59 Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS IO .................................................................................. 6-59 Basic principles of configuration for the ET 200S on PROFINET IO....................................... 6-59 Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software ........................................................... 6-59 Combine modules for the configuration ................................................................................... 6-60 Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFINET IO ..................................................... 6-61 Diagnostics using LED display................................................................................................. 6-63 Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules...................................................................... 6-65 Evaluating interrupts of ET 200S ............................................................................................. 6-66 Differences in the replacement value behavior........................................................................ 6-67 Diagnostics with STEP 7.......................................................................................................... 6-68 Reading out the diagnostics..................................................................................................... 6-68 Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................. 6-68 Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFINET IO .................................................. 6-72 Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus ............................................................................. 6-72 Failure of the load voltage of the power module...................................................................... 6-75 STOP of IO controller and recovery of IO device .................................................................... 6-75
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
ix
Table of contents 7
8
General technical specifications ............................................................................................................. 7-1 7.1
Standards, certifications, and approvals .................................................................................... 7-1
7.2
Electromagnetic compatibility .................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3
Transport and storage conditions .............................................................................................. 7-8
7.4
Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions.................................................................... 7-8
7.5
Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated voltage of the ET 200S............................................................................................................. 7-11
7.6
Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter ......... 7-12
Interface modules ................................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2
9
x
8.1.3
Parameters for interface modules.............................................................................................. 8-1 Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module ............................................................... 8-1 Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE .......................................................................................................... 8-2 Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module ..................................................................... 8-3
8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.2.7 8.2.8 8.2.9 8.2.10 8.2.11 8.2.12 8.2.13 8.2.14 8.2.15
Parameter description for the interface modules ....................................................................... 8-4 DP interrupt mode ...................................................................................................................... 8-4 Bus length .................................................................................................................................. 8-4 Operation at Preset Actual Configuration ............................................................................. 8-4 Option handling, general ............................................................................................................ 8-5 Option handling: slots 2 to 63..................................................................................................... 8-5 Diagnostic interrupt .................................................................................................................... 8-5 Hardware interrupt ..................................................................................................................... 8-6 Insert/remove-module interrupt.................................................................................................. 8-6 Analog-value format ................................................................................................................... 8-6 Interference frequency suppression........................................................................................... 8-6 Reference junction input ............................................................................................................ 8-7 Reference junction input ............................................................................................................ 8-7 Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle ......................................................................................... 8-7 Time Ti (read in process values)................................................................................................ 8-7 Time To (output process values) ............................................................................................... 8-8
8.3
IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)...................................................... 8-9
8.4
IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0) ........................................... 8-12
8.5
IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0) ..................................... 8-16
8.6
Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0).................................... 8-20
8.7 8.7.1 8.7.2 8.7.3 8.7.4
Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0).......................................................... 8-24 Features of the IM151-3 PN interface module ......................................................................... 8-24 SNMP ....................................................................................................................................... 8-28 SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for IM151-3 PN ........................................................................ 8-28 Updating the firmware of the IM151-3 PN................................................................................ 8-30
Terminal modules ................................................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1
Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules ............................ 9-1
9.2
TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)............................................................................................................ 9-4
9.3
TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)............................................................................................................ 9-6
9.4
TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0) ............................................................................................................ 9-8
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Table of contents
10
11
9.5
TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0) .................. 9-10
9.6
TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00) ......................... 9-13
9.7
TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-15
9.8
TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-18
9.9
TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-20
9.10
TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-22
9.11
TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0) .................. 9-24
9.12
TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0) .................. 9-27
9.13
TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0) .................. 9-29
Power modules..................................................................................................................................... 10-1 10.1
Parameters for power modules................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2
PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0) .......................................................... 10-2
10.3
PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)..................................................... 10-5
10.4
PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0) ............................... 10-8
Digital Electronic Modules .................................................................................................................... 11-1 11.1 11.1.1 11.1.2 11.1.3
Parameters for digital electronic modules................................................................................ 11-1 Parameters for digital input modules ....................................................................................... 11-1 Parameters for 4DI NAMUR .................................................................................................... 11-3 Parameters for digital output modules ..................................................................................... 11-4
11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5
Parameter description for the digital electronic modules......................................................... 11-5 Hardware interrupt ................................................................................................................... 11-5 Input delay................................................................................................................................ 11-5 Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge .............................................................................. 11-5 Pulse stretching........................................................................................................................ 11-5 Chatter monitoring ................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.3
2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0). ....................................... 11-9
11.4
4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)...................................... 11-13
11.5
4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0) ............................. 11-17
11.6
2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)...................... 11-21
11.7
4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) ..................... 11-25
11.8
4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) ................ 11-29
11.9
4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)........................................... 11-33
11.10
2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0) .......................... 11-41
11.11
2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0) .......................... 11-45
11.12
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)................. 11-49
11.13
4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) ................ 11-54
11.14
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0) .......... 11-59
11.15
2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0).................... 11-64
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
xi
Table of contents
12
11.16
4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0).................... 11-69
11.17
2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0).............. 11-74
11.18
Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)............................... 11-79
11.19
2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)........................................................................................................ 11-84
11.20
2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)........................................................................................................ 11-90
Analog electronic modules.................................................................................................................... 12-1 12.1
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.2 12.2.1 12.2.2 12.2.3
Analog value representation .................................................................................................... 12-1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 12-1 Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7 .................................... 12-2 Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage, current, and resistance-type sensors....................................................................................... 12-4 Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for resistance thermometer............................................................................................................................. 12-6 Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for thermocouples..... 12-9 Output ranges of the analog output modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage and current ............................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.2.4 12.2.5 12.2.6 12.3 12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3
Fundamentals of analog value processing ............................................................................ 12-13 Connecting measuring sensors ............................................................................................. 12-13 Connecting thermocouples .................................................................................................... 12-18 Connecting unused channels of analog input modules ......................................................... 12-23
12.4 12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3 12.4.4
Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems................... 12-24 Influence of supply voltage and operating state on analog input and output values ............. 12-24 Effect of the value range for the analog input ........................................................................ 12-25 Effect of the value range for the analog output ...................................................................... 12-25 Use of the shield connection .................................................................................................. 12-26
12.5 12.5.1
12.5.7
Parameters for analog electronic modules ............................................................................ 12-26 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U ST, 2AI I 2WIRE ST, 4AI I 2WIRE ST, and 2AI I 4WIRE ST ................................................................................... 12-26 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U HF and 2AI I 2/4WIRE HF........................ 12-27 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, and 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed................................................................................................. 12-28 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI RTD ST, 2AI TC ST, and 2AI TC HF ....................................................................................................................... 12-29 Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module ......................................... 12-31 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AO U ST, 2AO U HF and 2AO I ST, 2AO I HF ................................................................................................................................ 12-34 Parameter description for the analog electronic modules...................................................... 12-35
12.6
2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) ..................................... 12-37
12.7
2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0) ............................... 12-41
12.8
2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)................................. 12-46
12.9
2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0).......................... 12-50
12.10
Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0) ................................... 12-54
12.11
2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0) ..................... 12-57
12.12
2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0).......................... 12-61
12.13
2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0) ................ 12-65
12.5.2 12.5.3 12.5.4 12.5.5 12.5.6
xii
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Table of contents
13
14
12.14
2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0) ..................... 12-69
12.15
2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)................................. 12-73
12.16
2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) ......................... 12-77
12.17
2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0) ................................... 12-85
12.18
2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) ............................ 12-91
12.19
2AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0) ................................... 12-95
12.20
2AO U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0) ............................. 12-99
12.21
2AO I Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0) .................................. 12-102
12.22
2AO I High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)............................ 12-106
4 IQ-SENSE ......................................................................................................................................... 13-1 13.1
Features of 4 IQ-SENSE.......................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 13.2.1 13.2.2 13.2.3 13.2.4 13.2.5 13.2.6 13.2.7
Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE .............................................................................................. 13-3 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 13-3 Group diagnostics parameter................................................................................................... 13-4 Synchronization group parameter............................................................................................ 13-4 Sensor type parameter ............................................................................................................ 13-6 Switching hysteresis parameter ............................................................................................... 13-7 Time functions and time value parameters.............................................................................. 13-8 Teach-in disable parameter ..................................................................................................... 13-8
13.3 13.3.1 13.3.2 13.3.3
Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)................................................................................. 13-9 Fundamentals of the control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)................................................ 13-9 Standard................................................................................................................................. 13-10 Enhanced ............................................................................................................................... 13-11
13.4
Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 13-15
RESERVE modules .............................................................................................................................. 14-1 14.1
A
B
RESERVE modules ................................................................................................................. 14-1
Order numbers .......................................................................................................................................A-1 A.1
Module order numbers............................................................................................................... A-1
A.2
Order numbers for ET 200S accessories .................................................................................. A-6
A.3
Order numbers for ET 200S network components .................................................................... A-7
A.4
Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts ................................................................................... A-8
A.5
Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module................................ A-9
A.6
Order numbers for manuals ....................................................................................................... A-9
Dimension drawings ...............................................................................................................................B-1 B.1
Minimum clearances for mounting, wiring, and heat dissipation ............................................... B-1
B.2
Interface modules ...................................................................................................................... B-2
B.3
Terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronic module inserted ............... B-3
B.4
Terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted...................................... B-7
B.5
Terminating module ................................................................................................................. B-10
B.6
Shield connection..................................................................................................................... B-10
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
xiii
Table of contents C
Address space of the inputs and outputs ................................................................................................C-1 C.1
D
Address space of the inputs and outputs...................................................................................C-1
Response Times.....................................................................................................................................D-1 D.1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................D-1
D.2
Response times at the DP master .............................................................................................D-1
D.3
Response times for the ET 200S ...............................................................................................D-2
D.4
Response times for the digital input modules ............................................................................D-6
D.5
Response times for the digital output modules ..........................................................................D-7
D.6
Response times for analog input modules.................................................................................D-7
D.7
Response times for analog output modules...............................................................................D-8
D.8
Response times for a 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module ............................................................D-10
D.9
Response times for technological modules .............................................................................D-10
D.10
Response times of PROFINET IO ...........................................................................................D-10
E
Determining the Leakage Resistance of an ET 200S Station .................................................................E-1
F
Special Measures for Interference-Free Operation ................................................................................. F-1 Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... Glossary-1 Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1
Tables Table 1-1
ET 200S components................................................................................................................. 1-6
Table 1-2
Features and benefits of ET 200S ............................................................................................. 1-9
Table 2-1
Configuration table in HW Config for PROFIBUS DP................................................................ 2-5
Table 2-2
Configuration table in HW config for PROFINET IO ................................................................ 2-13
Table 3-1
Configuration examples for ET 200S ......................................................................................... 3-1
Table 3-2
Power supply of the ET 200S..................................................................................................... 3-3
Table 3-3
Interface modules and the applications for which they are suited ............................................. 3-6
Table 3-4
Electronic modules and the applications for which they are suitable ........................................ 3-9
Table 3-5
TM-P terminal modules and the power modules for which they are suitable .......................... 3-11
Table 3-6
TM-E terminal modules and the electronic modules for which they are suitable..................... 3-12
Table 3-7
Terminal modules for power modules...................................................................................... 3-16
Table 3-8
Terminal modules for electronic modules ................................................................................ 3-20
Table 3-9
Control interface....................................................................................................................... 3-36
Table 3-10
Feedback interface................................................................................................................... 3-36
Table 3-11
Fault correction during option handling.................................................................................... 3-37
Table 3-12
Structure of DS 248 for ET 200S ............................................................................................. 3-38
Table 3-13
Basic structure of data records with identification data............................................................ 3-39
Table 3-14
Identification data ..................................................................................................................... 3-39
xiv
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Table of contents Table 3-15
Parameter length in bytes ........................................................................................................ 3-44
Table 3-16
Maximum configuration per voltage group............................................................................... 3-45
Table 4-1
Mounting dimensions ................................................................................................................. 4-2
Table 5-1
Removing and inserting electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-28
Table 6-1
Configuration table and address space ..................................................................................... 6-9
Table 6-2
Software requirements for commissioning on PROFIBUS DP ................................................ 6-10
Table 6-3
Status and error displays of the IM151-1 BASIC/ IM151-1 STANDARD/ IM151-1 FO STANDARD/ IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE .................................................................................. 6-14
Table 6-4
Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5 on PROFIBUS DP ............................ 6-30
Table 6-5
Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0) ....................................................................................... 6-34
Table 6-6
Structure of station status 2 (Byte 1) ....................................................................................... 6-35
Table 6-7
Structure of station status 3 (Byte 2) ....................................................................................... 6-35
Table 6-8
Structure of the manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5) .......................................................................... 6-36
Table 6-9
Power module error types........................................................................................................ 6-42
Table 6-10
Digital electronic module error types ....................................................................................... 6-42
Table 6-11
Analog input module error types .............................................................................................. 6-44
Table 6-12
Analog output module error types............................................................................................ 6-45
Table 6-13
1SSI error types ....................................................................................................................... 6-45
Table 6-14
1COUNT 24V/100kHz error types ........................................................................................... 6-46
Table 6-15
1COUNT 5V/500kHz error types ............................................................................................. 6-46
Table 6-16
1STEP 5V/204kHz error types................................................................................................. 6-46
Table 6-17
2PULSE error types ................................................................................................................. 6-47
Table 6-18
1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog error types ....... 6-47
Table 6-19
1SI 3964/ASCII, 1SI Modbus/USS error types ........................................................................ 6-48
Table 6-20
4 IQ-SENSE error types........................................................................................................... 6-48
Table 6-21
Software requirements for commissioning on PROFINET IO ................................................. 6-61
Table 6-22
Status and error displays of IM151-3 PN................................................................................. 6-64
Table 6-23
Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7................................................................................ 6-68
Table 7-1
Use in industrial environment..................................................................................................... 7-5
Table 7-2
Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter ......... 7-12
Table 8-1
Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module ............................................................... 8-1
Table 8-2
Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE .......................................................................................................... 8-2
Table 8-3
Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module ..................................................................... 8-3
Table 8-4
Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module.................................................. 8-9
Table 8-5
Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module....................................... 8-13
Table 8-6
Terminal assignment of the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD................................. 8-17
Table 8-7
Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module................................ 8-21
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
xv
Table of contents Table 8-8
Terminal assignment of the IM151-3 PN interface module...................................................... 8-26
Table 8-9
Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards ................................................................................ 8-29
Table 9-1
Assignment of TM-P terminal modules and power modules ..................................................... 9-1
Table 9-2
Assignment of TM-E terminal modules and electronic modules................................................ 9-2
Table 9-3
Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules........................................................................................................................ 9-4
Table 9-4
Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules........................................................................................................................ 9-6
Table 9-5
Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules........................................................................................................................ 9-8
Table 9-6
Terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module................ 9-11
Table 9-7
Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module ............................................... 9-13
Table 9-8
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules.............................................. 9-16
Table 9-9
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules...................................................................................................................... 9-18
Table 9-10
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules...................................................................................................................... 9-20
Table 9-11
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules...................................................................................................................... 9-22
Table 9-12
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal module ............... 9-25
Table 9-13
Terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module................. 9-27
Table 9-14
Terminal assignment of the terminal module ........................................................................... 9-30
Table 10-1
Parameters for power modules................................................................................................ 10-1
Table 10-2
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module ...................................................... 10-2
Table 10-3
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module ................................................. 10-6
Table 10-4
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module ........................... 10-9
Table 11-1
Parameters for digital input modules ....................................................................................... 11-2
Table 11-2
Parameters for 4DI NAMUR..................................................................................................... 11-3
Table 11-3
Parameters for digital output modules ..................................................................................... 11-4
Table 11-4
Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard.................................................................. 11-9
Table 11-5
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard................................................................ 11-13
Table 11-6
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard ....................................................... 11-17
Table 11-7
Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature ......................................................... 11-21
Table 11-8
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature ......................................................... 11-25
Table 11-9
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature .................................................... 11-29
Table 11-10
Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6 ............................ 11-33
Table 11-11
Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contact or sensor to IEC 60947-5-6 .............. 11-34
Table 11-12
Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical normally open contact) ...................................................................................... 11-34
xvi
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Table of contents Table 11-13
Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical changeover contact).......................................................................................... 11-35
Table 11-14
Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with single contact).................................................................................................... 11-35
Table 11-15
Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact) .................................................................................................................................. 11-36
Table 11-16
Diagnosis for changeover contacts........................................................................................ 11-40
Table 11-17
Terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard.............................................................. 11-41
Table 11-18
Terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard.............................................................. 11-45
Table 11-19
Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard .................................................... 11-49
Table 11-20
Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard .................................................... 11-54
Table 11-21
Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature .............................................. 11-59
Table 11-22
Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard ....................................................... 11-64
Table 11-23
Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard ....................................................... 11-69
Table 11-24
Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature ................................................. 11-74
Table 11-25
Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24-230 VAC ...................................................................... 11-79
Table 11-26
Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A (as of Version 2)............................................................................................................................... 11-85
Table 11-27
Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts ............................................................ 11-89
Table 11-28
Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A......................... 11-90
Table 11-29
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts ..................................................................... 11-94
Table 12-1
Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled .......... 12-2
Table 12-2
Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format) ................................................................. 12-2
Table 12-3
Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format) .................................. 12-3
Table 12-4
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges ±80 mV, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, and ±10 V ............................ 12-4
Table 12-5
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA .............................. 12-4
Table 12-6
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range ± 20 mA ...................................................................... 12-5
Table 12-7
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 150 Ω, 300 Ω, 600 Ω, 3000 Ω .................................. 12-5
Table 12-8
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in °C and °F......... 12-6
Table 12-9
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in °C and °F........... 12-6
Table 12-10
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in °C and °F......... 12-7
Table 12-11
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in °C and °F........... 12-7
Table 12-12
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Standard in °C und °F.................................... 12-8
Table 12-13
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Climatic in °C und °F...................................... 12-8
Table 12-14
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type B in °C and °F.................................................... 12-9
Table 12-15
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type C in °C and °F ................................................... 12-9
Table 12-16
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type E in °C and °F.................................................. 12-10
Table 12-17
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type J in °C and °F .................................................. 12-10
Table 12-18
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type K in °C and °F.................................................. 12-10
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
xvii
Table of contents Table 12-19
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type L in °C and °F .................................................. 12-11
Table 12-20
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type N in °C and °F.................................................. 12-11
Table 12-21
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type R, S in °C and °F ............................................. 12-11
Table 12-22
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type T in °C and °F .................................................. 12-12
Table 12-23
SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges ± 5 V; ± 10 V; ± 20 mA ................................................. 12-12
Table 12-24
SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 1 to 5V; 4 to 20mA ........................................................ 12-13
Table 12-25
Compensation of the reference junction temperature............................................................ 12-18
Table 12-26
Reference junction parameters.............................................................................................. 12-21
Table 12-27
How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) and the supply voltage L +.............................................................. 12-24
Table 12-28
Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog input value in the value range................................................................................................................... 12-25
Table 12-29
Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog output value in the value range ......................................................................................................... 12-25
Table 12-30
Parameters for analog input modules U, I Standard.............................................................. 12-26
Table 12-31
Parameters for analog electronic modules U, I High Feature................................................ 12-27
Table 12-32
Parameters for analog input modules U, I High Speed ......................................................... 12-28
Table 12-33
Parameters for analog input modules RTD, TC..................................................................... 12-29
Table 12-34
Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module ......................................... 12-31
Table 12-35
Parameters for analog output modules U, I ........................................................................... 12-34
Table 12-36
Terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard .......................................................................... 12-38
Table 12-37
Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature.................................................................... 12-42
Table 12-38
Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed...................................................................... 12-46
Table 12-39
Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard ............................................................... 12-50
Table 12-40
Terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST ......................................................................... 12-54
Table 12-41
Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed........................................................... 12-57
Table 12-42
Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard ............................................................... 12-62
Table 12-43
Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature...................................................... 12-65
Table 12-44
Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed........................................................... 12-70
Table 12-45
Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard ..................................................................... 12-74
Table 12-46
Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature............................................................... 12-78
Table 12-47
Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard........................................................................ 12-86
Table 12-48
Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature.................................................................. 12-91
Table 12-49
Terminal assignment of the 2AO U Standard ........................................................................ 12-96
Table 12-50
Terminal assignment of the 2AO U High Feature .................................................................. 12-99
Table 12-51
Terminal assignment of the 2AO I Standard........................................................................ 12-103
Table 12-52
Terminal assignment of the 2AO I High Feature ................................................................. 12-107
Table 13-1
Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE .............................................................................................. 13-3
Table 13-2
Diffuse sensor .......................................................................................................................... 13-6
xviii
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Table of contents Table 13-3
Reflex sensor ........................................................................................................................... 13-6
Table 13-4
Standard feedback interface .................................................................................................. 13-10
Table 13-5
Enhanced feedback interface ................................................................................................ 13-11
Table 13-6
Enhanced control interface .................................................................................................... 13-12
Table 13-7
Terminal assignment of the 4 IQ-SENSE .............................................................................. 13-15
Table A-1
Interface module order numbers................................................................................................ A-1
Table A-2
Terminal module order numbers................................................................................................ A-2
Table A-3
Power module order numbers.................................................................................................... A-3
Table A-4
Digital electronic module order numbers ................................................................................... A-3
Table A-5
Analog electronic module order numbers .................................................................................. A-4
Table A-6
Process-related module order numbers .................................................................................... A-5
Table A-7
Reserve module order numbers ................................................................................................ A-5
Table A-8
ET 200S accessories order numbers ........................................................................................ A-6
Table A-9
Network components (PROFIBUS DP) for ET 200S order numbers ........................................ A-7
Table A-10
Network components (PROFINET IO) for ET 200S order numbers.......................................... A-8
Table A-11
Fuse for digital input module and power module ....................................................................... A-8
Table A-12
Connecting cable for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module ............................................................... A-9
Table A-13
ET 200S documentation packages or manuals ......................................................................... A-9
Table A-14
STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals .......................................................................................... A-10
Table A-15
STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals .......................................................................................... A-11
Table A-16
Technical Guide to PROFIBUS DP and SIMATIC S7 ............................................................. A-11
Table C-1
Address spaces of the inputs and outputs of the ET 200S........................................................ C-1
Table C-2
PII feedback interface and PIQ control interface .......................................................................C-2
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
xix
Table of contents
xx
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Product overview 1.1
1.1
1
What are distributed I/O systems?
Distributed I/O System – Range of Application When a system is set up, it is common for the inputs to and outputs from the process to be incorporated centrally in the automation system. If the inputs/outputs are located at greater distances from the automation system, the wiring can become very extensive and complex, and electromagnetic interferences can impair reliability. Distributed I/O systems are suited for these types of installations: • The controller CPU is located centrally. • The I/O systems (inputs and outputs) operate decentrally on-site. • The powerful PROFIBUS DP with its high data transmission rates ensures smooth communication between the controller CPU and the I/O systems.
What is PROFIBUS DP? PROFIBUS DP is an open bus system based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 with the "DP" transmission protocol (DP stands for distributed peripherals). Physically, PROFIBUS DP is either an electrical network based on a shielded two-wire line or an optical network based on a fiber-optic cable. The "DP" transmission protocol enables a rapid, cyclic exchange of data between the controller CPU and the distributed I/O systems.
What is a DP master and what are DP slaves? The DP master links the controller CPU with the distributed I/O systems. The DP master exchanges data with the distributed I/O systems via PROFIBUS DP and monitors the PROFIBUS DP. The distributed I/O systems (= DP slaves) prepare the sensor and actuator data on-site so that they can be transmitted to the controller CPU via PROFIBUS DP.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
1-1
Product overview 1.1 What are distributed I/O systems?
Which devices can be connected to PROFIBUS DP? An extremely wide range of devices can be connected on the PROFIBUS DP as a DP master or as DP slaves, provided their behavior complies with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. The devices that can be used include the following: • SIMATIC S5 • SIMATIC S7/M7/C7 • SIMATIC programming device or PC • SIMATIC HMI (operator panel (OP), operator station (OS), and text display (TD) operator control and monitoring devices) • Devices from other manufacturers
Structure of a PROFIBUS DP network The figure below illustrates a typical PROFIBUS DP network structure. The DP masters are integrated in the relevant device. For example, the S7-400 has a PROFIBUS DP interface and the IM 308-C master interface module is inserted in an S5-115U. The DP slaves are the distributed I/O systems, which are connected to the DP masters by means of PROFIBUS DP.
6
68 ZLWK,0&
3URJUDPPLQJGHYLFH3&
'3PDVWHU
352),%86'3 '3VODYHV
(7;
(76
Figure 1-1
1-2
(7/
'ULYH
(70
6
(7%
'3$6,/,1.
68'3
2326
2WKHUILHOGGHYLFHV
Typical PROFIBUS DP network structure
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Product overview 1.2 What is PROFINET IO?
1.2
1.2
What is PROFINET IO?
Definition PROFINET IO is the open transmission system with realtime functionality defined in accordance with the PROFINET standard. The standard defines a vendor-neutral communication, automation, and engineering model. An industrial-grade connection system is available for cabling of PROFINET components. • PROFINET departs from the hierarchical master-slave principle of PROFIBUS. A provider-consumer principle is used instead. During configuration, the user specifies which modules of an IO device are subscribed to by an IO controller. • The quantity frameworks are extended in accordance with the options available on PROFINET IO. Parameter limits are not exceeded during configuration. • The transmission rate is 100 Mbits/s. • The user view during configuration is largely the same as that on the PROFIBUS DP (STEP 7 → HW Config is used for configuration).
Structure of a PROFINET IO network The figure below illustrates a typical PROFINET IO network structure. PROFIBUS slaves, if present, can be integrated by means of an IE/PB link.
,2FRQWUROOHU 6
6ZLWFK
,2GHYLFH (76
6ZLWFK
,2GHYLFH (76
6ZLWFK
23
6ZLWFK
3URJUDPPLQJ GHYLFH
6ZLWFK
,(3% OLQN 352),%86'3
Figure 1-2
PD[P
352),1(7,2 ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
Typical structure of a PROFINET IO network
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
1-3
Product overview 1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?
1.3
1.3
What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?
Definition The ET 200S distributed I/O system is a discretely modular, highly flexible DP slave with IP 20 degree of protection.
Area of application You can insert practically any number of I/O modules in practically any combination directly next to the interface module that transfers the data to the DP master. This means you can adjust the configuration to suit your on-site requirements. Independent from the interface module, an ET 200S can consist of up to 63 modules such as power modules, peripheral modules and motor starters. The ability to integrate motor starters (switching and protecting of any three-phase load up to 7.5 kW) ensures that the ET 200S can be adapted quickly to suit almost any process-related use of your machine. The fail-safe modules of the ET 200S enable you to read in and output data in a fail-safe manner up to Safety Category 4 (EN 954-1).
Terminal modules and electronic modules The ET 200S distributed I/O system is connected as follows: • To PROFIBUS DP by means of a cable connector for PROFIBUS DP at the IM151-1 interface module • To PROFINET IO by means of a cable connector for PROFINET IO at the IM151-3 PN interface module Every ET 200S peripheral system is a • A DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP • An IO device on the PROFINET IO
1-4
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Product overview 1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?
View The figure below shows an example configuration of an ET 200S. 1
2
10
3
4
5
6
7
9
8
①
ET 200S IM151-1 interface module
②
PM-E power module for electronic modules
③
Electronic modules
④
Power module for PM-D motor starters
⑤
Direct starter
⑥
Reversing starter
⑦
Terminating module
⑧
Power bus
⑨
TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules
⑩
TM-P terminal modules for power modules
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
1-5
Product overview 1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?
ET 200S components The following table provides an overview of the most important components of the ET 200S: Table 1-1
ET 200S components
Component
...is the mounting rail for the ET 200S. You install the ET 200S on the mounting rail.
Interface module • IM151-1 BASIC • IM151-1 STANDARD • IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
...connects the ET 200S to the DP master and prepares the data for the assembled electronic modules and motor starters.
•
IM151-1 FO STANDARD
Interface module • IM151-3 PN
1-6
Function
Mounting rail
Image
With RS 485 interface:
With fiber-optic cable interface:
... ...connects the ET 200S to the PROFINET IO controllers and prepares the data for the assembled electronic modules and motor starters.
with PROFINET interface:
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Product overview 1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system? Component Terminal module
Function
Image
...carries the wiring and accommodates the power and electronic modules. Terminal modules are available in the following variants: • For power modules • For electronic modules • With screw terminal • With spring terminal • With Fast Connect (quick connection method, no stripping required)
Power module
...monitors the voltage for all electronic modules in the voltage group. The following power modules are available: • For a 24 VDC infeed with diagnostics • For a 24 VDC to 48 VDC infeed with diagnostics • For a 24 VDC to 48 VDC, 24 VAC to 230 VAC infeed with diagnostics and fuse
Electronic module
...is inserted onto the terminal module and determines the function: • Digital input modules with 24 VDC, 120/230 VAC, and NAMUR • Digital output modules with 24 VDC and 120/230 VAC • Relay modules • Analog input modules with voltage, current, and resistance measurement; thermoresistor; and thermocouples • Analog output modules for voltage and current • Technology modules • Fail-safe modules • RESERVE
Terminating module
...terminates the ET 200S and can be used as a mount for 6 reserve fuses (5 mm x 20 mm).
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
1-7
Product overview 1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system? Function
Image
Slot number labels
...are used for identifying the slots on the terminal module.
Color coding labels
...enable customer- and country-specific coding of the terminals on the terminal module
PROFIBUS cable with bus connector
... connects nodes of a PROFIBUS DP configuration to each other.
63
...for machine labeling or printing • 80 strips per labeling sheet
62
Labeling sheet (DIN A4, perforated, film)
2
...is used for connecting cable shields.
1
Component Shield connection
Fiber optic duplex cable ... connects nodes of a with simplex plug (in the PROFIBUS DP configuration to each plug adaptor for other. IM151-1 FO STANDARD) PROFINET connector according to the specifications in the
... connects nodes of a PROFINET IO configuration to each other.
PROFINET Installation Guide and the Industrial
Ethernet FC installation instructions
1-8
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Product overview 1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?
Features and benefits of ET 200S The table below presents the features and benefits of ET 200S. Table 1-2
Features and benefits of ET 200S Features
Benefits Structure Function-oriented, cost-optimized station design Significant reduction in effort for configuration and documentation Space savings due to the ability to string modules together in any order
Discretely modular design • 1/2/4-channel electronic modules • Power modules • Integrated motor starters
•
Extensive range of electronic modules
Broad area of application
Communication capable, system-integrated motor starter: Direct and oscillating starter up to 7.5 kW
PLC inputs and outputs, terminal blocks, circuit breakers, and contactors in a plug-in module save space and the effort involved in wiring
Permanent wiring due to the separation of mechanical and electronic components
• •
Prewiring possible Module replacement during operation of the ET 200S ("hot swapping")
Individual connection of power modules to common potential
•
Individual formation of voltage groups (identifiable by color coding of the TM-P terminal modules for power modules) Simple load interruption
• •
• Robust design for harsh industrial conditions (5 g vibration resistance)
High operational reliability when mounted directly on the machine, high availability
Connection system Integrated voltage buses
Reduced effort required for wiring
Power bus up to 50 A for motor starters
Minimization of wiring in 400 V range
Screw terminals, spring terminals, and Fast Connect
A change in terminal connection method is not necessary
• •
2- and 3-conductor connection or 2-, 3- and 4-conductor connection
Optimal selection on grounds of space and cost Connection method with no stripping required Time savings during wiring
Fast Connect
• •
Replaceable terminal box in the terminal module
No need to remove the terminal module in the event of terminal damage
Automatic coding of the I/O modules
Quick and reliable module replacement
Large label
Adequate space for clear identification
High data transfer rate of up to 12 Mbits/s on the PROFIBUS DP and 100 Mbit/s on the PROFINET IO
Short reaction times
Integrated safety functions
Savings on time-consuming safety engineering
For motor starters up to safety category 4 according to EN 954-1 Fail-safe modules
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
For detecting and outputting fail-safe signals via PROFIBUS (PROFIsafe) up to Safety Category 4 (EN 954-1)
1-9
Product overview 1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals
1.4
1.4
Guide to the ET 200S manuals
Required manuals for various configurations The components of ET 200S are described in various manuals. These manuals are part of various documentation packages. The table below shows possible configuration variants of the ET 200S and the manuals in the documentation packages that are required for each variant. You will need the information contained in the following manuals:
$2
$,
'2
Distributed I/O System ET 200S 30(
,0
ET 200S consists of the following components:
38/6(
+
3RV,QF$QDORJ
66,
'2
30(
,0
ET 200S Distributed I/O System
+
Technological Functions ET 200S
3RV,QF'LJLWDO
'2
30(
,0
ET 200S Distributed I/O System Positioning ET 200S
0RGEXV866
$,
'2
30(
+
ET 200S Serial Interface Module
$2
$,
'2
ET 200S Distributed I/O System 30(
,0 &38
,0
ET 200S Distributed I/O System
+
IM151-7 CPU Interface Module
1-10
$2
$,
'2
30(
,0 31
ET 200S Distributed I/O System +
PROFINET System documentation
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Product overview 1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals
PM-D
2AO
2DO
PM-E
IM151-1
ET 200S consists of the following components:
DS
DS
You will need the information contained in the following manuals:
ET 200S Distributed I/O System +
ET 200S Motor Starters Fail-Safe Motor Starters Safety-Integrated SIGUARD System
ET 200S Distributed I/O System
)'2
)',
30(
'2
'2
30(
,0
+
ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe Modules
30')352),VDIH
)'2
)',
30(
,0
ET 200S Distributed I/O System )'6H[
)'6H[
+
ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe Modules +
ET 200S Motor Starters Fail-Safe Motor Starters Safety-Integrated SIGUARD System
ET 200S FC Frequency Converter operating instructions +
ET 200S FC Frequency Converter list manual ET 200S Distributed I/O System +
ET 200S FC Frequency Converter operating instructions +
ET 200S FC Frequency Converter list manual 1
ICU24F for fail-safe frequency converter
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
1-11
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.1
2.1.1
2.1
2
Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
Introduction
Introduction Using the following simple examples, you will learn how to place the ET 200S into operation on the PROFIBUS DP step by step: • ET 200S assembling and wiring up • Configuring ET 200S in the SIMATIC manager • Creating a user program • Switching on ET 200S • Evaluating diagnostic messages: – Removing and inserting of modules – Switching off the load voltage on the power module – Wire break in the actuator wiring on the digital output module
Requirements • You have assembled an S7 station consisting of a power supply component and a DP master (e. g. CPU 315-2 DP). A CPU 315-2 DP was used as a DP master for this example. Every other DP master (Norm IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1) is naturally also usable. • STEP 7 (starting V5.0 with ServicePack 3) is completely installed on you PG. You have STEP 7 knowledge. • The programming device must be connected at the DP master.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2-1
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
Required components The following graphic shows you which ET 200S components you require for the example on the PROFIBUS DP:
30
',
',
',
',
6ORW
30 '2 '2 '2 '2
,0 5DLO 7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH
[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG '29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH HOHFWURQLFPRGXOH 7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG 30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH [70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG',9'& +LJK)HDWXUHHOHFWURQLFPRGXOH 7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH ,067$1'$5'LQWHUIDFHPRGXOH 352),%86EXVFRQQHFWRU
Figure 2-1
Components for the example on PROFIBUS DP
Order numbers for example configuration on the PROFIBUS DP Quantity
2-2
Ordering data
Order number
1×
Standard profile rails 35 mm (e. g. length 483 mm)
6ES5 710-8MA11
1×
IM151-1 STANDARD interface module and terminating module, 1 unit
6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0
2×
Fast Connect Terminal Module TM-P15N23-A1, 1 piece
6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0
2×
Fast Connect Terminal Module TM-E15N24-A1, 5 pieces
6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0
2×
PM-E 24 VDC, 1 unit
6ES7138-4CA01-0AB0
1×
2DI DC24V HF, 5 pieces
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0
1×
2DO DC24V/0,5A HF, 5 pieces
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0
1×
Bus connector
6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
2.1.2
Example: Installing ET 200S
Procedure 1. Mount the rail (35 mm x 7.5 mm or 15 mm) with a length of at least 210 mm on a stationary base. 2. Install the various modules on the rail beginning on the left (hook on, swing in, move to the left). Adhere to the following sequence: – IM151-1 STANDARD interface module – TM-P15S23-A1 terminal module – 4 x TM-E15S24-A1 terminal module – TM-P15S23-A1 terminal module – 4 x TM-E15S24-A1 terminal module – Terminating module 3. Set PROFIBUS address 3 on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module. Set PROFIBUS Address 3: 2)) 21
*)
Intended for future enhancements. Switch must be in OFF position.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2-3
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
2.1.3
Example: Wiring and assembling ET 200S
Procedure 1. Wire the ET 200S as shown below:
$8;
$
$
1
①
$8;
/ 0
2
3
24 VDC electronic power supply
②
24 VDC sensor supply voltage group 1
③
24 VDC load supply voltage group 2
1. Use the PROFIBUS bus connector to connect the DP master with the ET 200S. The PROFIBUS DP interface is located on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module. 2. Insert the power and electronic modules into the terminal modules. 3. Switch on the power supply for the DP master. 4. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master. CPU 315-2 DP: – DC 5 V → lights up – SF DP → off – BUSF → flashes
2-4
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
2.1.4
Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager
Procedure 1. Start SIMATIC Manager, and create a new project with a DP master (e.g., CPU315-2 DP). Create OB1 and OB82 for the project. 2. Create the PROFIBUS subnet. 3. Connect the PROFIBUS subnet with the DP master in HW Config. 4. Take the ET 200S from the hardware catalog and put it on the PROFIBUS. 5. Set PROFIBUS address 3 for ET 200S. 6. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog to the configuration table. 7. Select the electronic modules in the configuration table, and click the "Pack addresses" button. Table 2-1
Configuration table in HW Config for PROFIBUS DP
Module/ DP identifier
Order number
I address
Q address
Comment
1
6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V
Power module
2
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
3
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
Byte 0.2 and 0.3
4
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
Byte 0.4 and 0.5
5
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
Bits 0.6 and 0.7
6
6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V
Power module
7
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
8
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
Byte 0.2 and 0.3
9
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
Byte 0.4 and 0.5
10
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
Bits 0.6 and 0.7
0
Byte 0.0 and 0.1
0
Byte 0.0 and 0.1
1. Set the following parameters: – In the DP slave properties dialog box for ET 200S: Enable startup for set- actual configuration: enable – In the DP slave properties dialog box for the PM-E 24 VDC, Module/DP ID 1 (in the configuration table) Diagnostics: Missing load induced stress – In the DP slave properties dialog box for 2 DO 24 VDC, Module/DP ID 7 (in the configuration table) Diagnostics: Wire failure A0 2. Save the configuration.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2-5
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
2.1.5
Example: Creating a user program
Procedure 1. Create the user program in the LAD/STL/FBD editor in OB1. Example 1: Reading in an input and controlling an output: STL A I 0.0
If input byte 0.0 and
A M 2.0
memory bit 2.0 are set, then
S Q 0.0
set output byte 0.0
Example 2: Transferring an input byte to an output byte: STL L PIB 0
Load I/O input byte 0 in the accumulator (bytes 0.0 to 0.7)
T PQB 0
Transfer the accumulator content to I/O output byte 0 (byte 0.0 to 0.7)
1. Save the project in SIMATIC Manager. 2. Download the configuration to the DP master.
2.1.6
Example: Switching on ET 200S
Procedure 1. Switch on all of the power supplies on the ET 200S. 2. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master and ET 200S. – CPU 315-2 DP: DC 5 V: lights up SF DP: off BUSF: off – ET 200S: SF: off BF: off ON: lights up
2-6
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
2.1.7
Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages
Introduction In this example, you generate diagnostic messages by provoking errors in the ET 200S. In the event of an error, OB82 is started. You evaluate the start information in OB82. Tip: Call SFC13 in OB82, and evaluate the diagnostic frame.
Removing and inserting the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module 1. Remove the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature electronic module from the terminal module during operation. 2. Observe the status LEDs on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module: – SF: lights up → a diagnostic message is pending. – BF: off – ON: lights up Result: The ET 200S continues to run error-free. 3. Evaluate the diagnostic message: Result: – Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set → external diagnostic – Identifier-related diagnostic data: Byte 7.1 is set → Slot 2 – Module status: Byte 19.2/19.3: 11B → no module 4. Reinsert the removed electronic module into the terminal module. Result: – Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module: SF: off BF: off ON: lights up – The diagnostic message is deleted.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2-7
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
Switching off load voltage on the power module 1. Switch off the load voltage on the PM-E 24 VDC (slot 1). 2. Observe the status LEDs. IM 151 STANDARD interface module: – SF: lights up Power module: – PWR: off → No load voltage available on the power module – SF: lights up → a diagnostic message is pending. I/O modules in the voltage group: – LEDs: light up 3. Evaluate the diagnostics. Result: – Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set → external diagnostics – Identifier-related diagnostic data: Byte 7.0 is set → Slot 1 – Channel-specific diagnostics: Byte 35.0 to 35.5: 000000B → Slot 1 Byte 37.0 to 37.4: 10001B → sensor or load voltage missing 4. Switch on the load voltage on the power module again, and reevaluate the diagnostics. Result: – Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module: SF: off – Status LEDs on the power module: PWR: on SF: off – Status LEDs on the I/O modules: LEDs: off – The diagnostic message is deleted.
2-8
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
Simulating a wire break in the actuator wiring 1. Remove the cable from terminal 1 on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A; High Feature electronic module (slot 7) 2. Observe the status LEDs: IM151-1 STANDARD interface module: – SF: lights up 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module: – SF: lights up → a diagnostic message is pending – 1: off → output is not activated 3. Evaluate the diagnostic message: Result: – Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set → external diagnostics – Identifier-related diagnostic data: Byte 7.6 is set → Slot 7 – Channel-specific diagnostics: Byte 35.0 to 35.5: 000110B → Slot 7 Byte 36.0 to 35.5: 000000B → Channel 0 Byte 37.0 to 37.4: 00110B → Wire break 4. Reattach the cable to the actuator to terminal 1, and reevaluate the diagnostics: – Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module: SF: off – Status LEDs on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module: SF: off 1: off/on – The diagnostic message is deleted.
See also Reading out the diagnostics (Page 6-29)
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2-9
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO
2.2
2.2.1
2.2
Commissioning on PROFINET IO
Introduction
Introduction The following simple example teaches you step-by-step how to commission the ET 200S on PROFINET IO: • Installing and wiring of ET 200S • Configuring with STEP 7 using the GSD file • Transferring device names to the IO device • Integrating into the user program • Switching on the ET 200S • Evaluating the interrupts and diagnostics: – Removing and inserting of modules – Switching off the load voltage on the power module – Wire break in the actuator wiring on the digital output module
Requirements • You have set up an S7 station consisting of a power supply module and an IO controller (e.g., CPU 317-2 PN/DP). A CPU 317-2 PN/DP was used as the IO controller in this example. • STEP 7 (V5.3 Service Pack 1 or higher) is fully installed on your programming device (PG). You are familiar with STEP 7. • The PG is connected to the PROFINET IO.
2-10
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO
Required components The figure below illustrates the ET 200S components needed for the example on PROFINET IO:
,0 31
30
',
',
',
', 30 '2 '2 '2 '2
6ORW
5DLO 7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH
[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG '29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH HOHFWURQLFPRGXOH 7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG 30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH [70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG',9'& +LJK)HDWXUHHOHFWURQLFPRGXOH 7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH ,031LQWHUIDFHPRGXOH ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW)&LQVWDOODWLRQFDEOHZLWK352),1(7FRQQHFWRU
Figure 2-2
Components for the example on PROFINET IO
Order numbers for the example configuration on PROFINET IO Quantity
Ordering data
Order number
1×
Standard mounting rail, 35 mm (e.g., length of 483 mm)
6ES5 710-8MA11
1×
IM151-3 PN interface module and terminating module, 1 unit
6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0
1×
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (e. g. 64k)
6ES7953-8LF11-0AA0
2×
TM-P15N23-A1 Fast Connect terminal module, 1 unit
6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0
2×
TM-E15N24-A1 Fast Connect terminal module, 5 units
6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0
2×
PM-E 24 VDC, 1 unit
6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0
1×
2DI DC24V HF, 5 pieces
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0
1×
2DO DC24V/0.5A HF, 5 pieces
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0
PROFINET connector (according to the specifications in the PROFINET Installation Guide) Appropriate installation cables: • FC Standard Cable • FC Trailing Cable • FC Marine Cable
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
6XV1 840-2AH10 6XV1 840-3AH10 6XV1 840-4AH10
2-11
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO
2.2.2
Example: Installing and wiring ET 200S
Installing the mounting rail 1. Mount the rail (35 mm x 7.5 mm or 15 mm) with a length of at least 210 mm on a stationary base. 2. Start from the left with the installation of the individual modules on the profile rail (hook in - swivel in - slide to left). Adhere to the following sequence: – IM151-3 PN interface module – TM-P15N23-A1 terminal module – 4 x TM-E15N24-A1 terminal module – TM-P15N23-A1 terminal module – 4 x TM-E15N24-A1 terminal module – Terminating module
Wiring and assembling ET 200S 1. Wire the ET 200S as shown below:
$8;
1
2-12
$8;
$
$
/ 0
2
3
①
24 VDC electronic power supply
②
24 VDC sensor supply voltage group 1
③
24 VDC voltage group 2
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO 1. Use the PROFINET connector to connect the ET 200S (IO device) to the IO controller via a switch. The PROFINET interface is located on the IM 151-3 PN interface module. 2. Insert the power and electronic modules into the terminal modules. 3. Switch on the power supply for the IO controller. 4. Observe the status LEDs on the IO controller. CPU 317-2 PN/DP: – DC 5 V → lights up – SF → off – BF2 → flashes
2.2.3
Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager
Procedure 1. Start SIMATIC Manager, and create a new project with an IO controller (e.g., CPU 317-2 PN/DP). Create OB1, OB82, and OB83 for the project. 2. Open the "Properties - Ethernet Interfaces" window in the HW config and apply a subnet e. g. Ethernet(1). 3. Take the IM151-3 PN from the ET 200S catalog of the hardware catalog and insert it on Ethernet(1):PROFINET IO System (100). 4. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog to the configuration table. Table 2-2 Module
Configuration table in HW config for PROFINET IO Order number
I address
Q address
Comment
0
6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 IM151-3 PN
1
6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V
2
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
0
Byte 0.0 and 0.1
3
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
1
Byte 1.0 and 1.1
4
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
2
Byte 2.0 and 2.1
5
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
3
6
6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V
7
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
0
Byte 0.0 and 0.1
8
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
1
Byte 1.0 and 1.1
9
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
2
Byte 2.0 and 2.1
10
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
3
Byte 3.0 and 3.1
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Power module
Byte 3.0 and 3.1 Power module
2-13
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO 1. Set the following parameters: – In the IO device properties dialog for the PM-E 24 VDC, Module 1 (in the configuration table) Diagnostics: Missing load induced stress – In the IO device properties dialog for the 2 DO 24 VDC, Module 7 (in the configuration table) Diagnostics: Wire failure A0 2. Compile and save the configuration.
2.2.4
Example: Assigning device names for the IO device
Procedure 1. Insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 PN. 2. Switch on the power supply for the IM151-3 PN interface module. 3. Open the "Properties - IM151-3 PN" window in the HW config and enter the device name for the IO device there. 4. An online PROFINET connection from the PG to the IO device via a switch is required for transferring the name to the IM151-3 PN interface module. The device name is transferred to the IM151-3 PN using "PLC > Ethernet > Assign Device Name." To do so, activate the "Assign name" button in the "Assign device name" window. The device name is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the interface module IM151-3 PN. Once the name is assigned, it appears in the window.
2.2.5
Example: Creating a user program
Procedure 1. Create the user program in the LAD/STL/FBD editor in OB1. Example 1: Reading in an input and controlling an output: STL
2-14
A I 0.0
If input byte 0.0 and
A M 2.0
memory bit 2.0 are set, then
S Q 0.0
set output byte 0.0
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO Example 2: Transferring an input byte to an output byte: STL L PIB 0
Load I/O input byte 0 in the accumulator (bytes 0.0 to 0.7)
T PQB 0
Transfer the accumulator content to I/O output byte 0 (byte 0.0 to 0.7)
1. Save the project in SIMATIC Manager. 2. Download the configuration to the IO controller.
2.2.6
Example: Switching on ET 200S
Procedure 1. Switch on all of the power supplies on the ET 200S. 2. Observe the status LEDs on the IO controller, ET 200S, and switch. – CPU 317-2 PN/DP: DC 5 V: lights up SF: off BF2: off LINK: lights up – ET 200S: SF: off BF: off ON: lights up LINK: lights up – Switch: LINK: lights up 100MB: lights up
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2-15
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO
2.2.7
Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages
Introduction In this example, you generate diagnostic messages by provoking errors in the ET 200S. In the event of an error, OB83 is started. You evaluate the start information in OB83. Hint: Call up the SFB 52 within the OB 83 and evaluate the diagnostic telegram.
Procedure 1. Remove the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature electronic module from the terminal module (e.g., from slot 2) during operation. 2. Observe the status LEDs on the IM 151-3 PN interface module: – SF: lights up → diagnostic message present. – BF: off – ON: lights up Result: The ET 200S continues to run without fault. 3. In the event of a remove interrupt, OB83 is started. Start SFB 52 in OB83. Evaluate the E002H diagnostic data record. Byte
Contents
Meaning
Header information 0 and 1
8104H
Data record with discrepancies between the preset and actual configurations
2 and 3
0014H
20 bytes follow
4 and 5
0100H
Version 1.0
6 and 7
0001H
0001H if the preset configuration deviates from the actual configuration
IO device header information 8 and 9
0000H
steady
10 and 11
0000H
steady
12 and 13
0001H
Number of slots in which there is a discrepancy between the preset configuration and the actual configuration
Configuration data of slots
2-16
14 and 15
0002H
Slot number of the slot with a discrepancy between the preset and actual configurations
16 to 19
XXXXXXXXH
20 and 21
0000H
Identification of the inserted module No module inserted
22 and 23
0000H
Number of submodule slots with a discrepancy between the preset and actual configurations. Because the content is 0000H, no additional submodule data follow.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO 1. Reinsert the removed electronic module into the terminal module. Result: – Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module: SF: off BF: off ON: lights up – Once the module is inserted, diagnostic data record E002H no longer indicates a discrepancy between the preset and actual configurations for any slot.
Switching off load voltage on the power module 1. Switch off the load voltage on the PM-E 24 VDC (slot 1). 2. Observe the status LEDs. IM 151-3 PN interface module: – SF: lights up Power module: – PWR: off → Load voltage on power module not present – SF: lights up → diagnostic message present. I/O modules in the voltage group: – LEDs: light up 3. Evaluate diagnostic data record C00AH. Hint: Call up the SFB 52 within the OB 81 or OB82 and evaluate the diagnostic telegram. Byte
Contents
Meaning
Header information 0 and 1
0010H
Data record with channel diagnostics
2 and 3
0012H
18 bytes follow
4 and 5
0100H
Version 1.0
Channel diagnostic data 6 and 7
0001H
Slot 1
8 and 9
0001H
Submodule slot 1
10 and 11
8000H
12
08H
Incoming fault
13
00H
Reserved
14 and 15
8000H
Error on submodule
Submodule diagnostic is pending
Channel diagnostic data record 0 with detailed information on the fault 16 and 17
0000H
18
08H
Arriving fault
Channel 0
19
01H
Data type: 1 Bit
20 and 21
0011H
Sensor or load voltage missing
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2-17
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO 1. Switch on the load voltage on the power module again, and reevaluate the diagnostics. Result: – Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module: SF: off – Status LEDs on the power module: PWR: on SF: off – Status LEDs on the I/O modules: LEDs: off – The diagnostic is deleted.
Simulating a wire break in the actuator wiring 1. Remove the cable from terminal 1 on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A; High Feature electronic module (slot 7) 2. Observe the status LEDs: IM151-3 PN interface module: – SF: lights up 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module: – SF: lights up → diagnostic message present. – 1: 1: off → output is not activated 3. Evaluate diagnostic data record C00AH: Byte
Contents
Meaning
Header information 0 and 1
0010H
Data record with channel diagnostics
2 and 3
0012H
18 bytes follow
4 and 5
0100H
Version 1.0
Channel diagnostic data 6 and 7
0007H
Slot 7
8 and 9
0001H
Submodule slot 1
10 and 11
8000H
12
08H
Incoming fault
13
00H
Reserved
14 and 15
8000H
Error on submodule
Submodule diagnostic is pending
Channel diagnostic data record 0 with detailed information on the fault
2-18
16 and 17
0000H
18
48H
Incoming fault at an output
Channel 0
19
01H
Data type: 1 Bit
20 and 21
0006H
Wire break
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO 1. Reattach the cable to the actuator to terminal 1, and reevaluate the diagnostics: – Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module: SF: off – Status LEDs on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module: SF: off 1: off/on – The diagnostic is deleted.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2-19
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO
2-20
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
3
Configuration options 3.1
3.1
Precisely Modular System
Principle In describing the ET 200S as a discretely modular system, we mean you can adapt the ET 200S configuration to meet the exact requirements of your application. The table below shows you a number of examples of ET 200S distributed I/O system configurations: Configuration examples for ET 200S
','&967
','&967
$2867
$,57'67
&28179N+]
6ORW
&RPSOHWLRQ
30(SRZHUPRGXOH
Structure
,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH
Example ET 200S with • Digital electronic modules • Analog electronic modules • Technology modules
66,
Table 3-1
66,
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
3-1
Configuration options 3.1 Precisely Modular System
'6
'6
0 a
0 a
6ORW &RPSOHWLRQ
30'SRZHUPRGXOH
Structure
,QWHUIDFH PRGXOH
Example ET 200S with motor starters
'6
6ORW &RPSOHWLRQ
'6
','&967
','&967
30(SRZHUPRGXOH
30'SRZHUPRGXOH
30(SRZHUPRGXOH
,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH
','&967
ET 200S with • Electronic modules • Motor starters
','&967
a
a
0 a
3-2
0 a
0DQGDWRU\
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Configuration options 3.2 ET 200S Power Supply
3.2
3.2
ET 200S Power Supply
Overview Power is supplied to the ET 200S: • With 24 VDC at the interface module (see table below). Power supply of the ET 200S
6ORW
&RPSOHWLRQ
66,
&RXQW9N+]
$,57'
$28
,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH
24 VDC at the interface module
','&9
Configuration (example)
30(SRZHUPRGXOH
Power supply
','&9
Table 3-2
66, '&9
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
3-3
Configuration options 3.3 Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential
3.3
3.3
Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential
Placing and Connecting to Common Potential With ET 200S, you can choose where to position the power modules. Each TM-P terminal module (for a power module) that you install in the ET 200S opens a new voltage group. All sensor and load supplies of the downstream electronic modules/motor starters are fed from this TM-P terminal module (for a power module). If you place an additional TM-P terminal module after an electronic module/motor starter, you interrupt the voltage buses (P1/P2) and simultaneously open a new voltage group. This enables sensor and load supplies to be individually connected to common potential.
AUX(iliary) Rail (AUX 1) A TM-P terminal module (for a power module) enables you to connect an additional potential (up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module), which you can apply by means of the AUX(iliary) bus. You can set the AUX(iliary) bus individually: • As a protective conductor bar • For additionally required voltage
Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential
(0
5
(0
(0
3
(0
5
(0
(0
2
(0
5
(0
6
(0
1
4
9
8
3-4
7
①
Voltage group 1
⑧
Supply voltage 2
②
Voltage group 2
⑨
Supply voltage 1
③
Voltage group 3
⑩
Additionally required voltage
④
Termination
⑪
Protective conductor
⑤
Power module
⑫
P1/P2 power buses
⑥
Interface module
⑬
AUX bus
⑦
Supply voltage 3
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Configuration options 3.3 Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential
Warning If you connect the AUX1 bus to common potential independently of the P1/P2 buses (different voltages), there is no safe electrical separation between the AUX1 bus and the P1/P2 buses.
Connecting different potentials to the AUX1 bus Note If you apply different potentials to the AUX1 bus within an ET 200S station, you must separate the voltage groups by means of a power module with the TM-P15S23-A0 terminal module.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
3-5
Configuration options 3.4 Configuration options for the interface modules
3.4
3.4
Configuration options for the interface modules
Which Interface Module Matches Your Application: Table 3-3
Interface modules and the applications for which they are suited Applications
• • • • • • • • • • •
Interface module
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via an RS 485 Transfer rates: IM151-1 BASIC interface 9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s Operation as a DPV0 slave Direct data exchange ET 200S Power Supply Bus Length: not relevant Number of modules: max. 12 Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via an RS 485 interface Operation as a DPV0 slave Direct data exchange ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m (can be parameterized) Number of modules: max. 63 Option handling and status byte for power modules
Transfer rates: 9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.,75; 187.5; 500 kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s
IM151-1 STANDARD
In addition, for 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher: • Operation as a DPV1 slave – Acyclic data traffic (read/write data record) – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts • Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP • Identification data • • • • • •
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via fiber-optic cable Operation as a DPV0 slave Direct data exchange ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m (can be parameterized) Number of modules: max. 63 Option handling and status byte for power modules
Transfer rates: IM 151-1 FO STANDARD 9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kBaud, 1.5 ; 12 Mbit/s
In addition, for 6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher: • Operation as a DPV1 slave – Acyclic data traffic (read/write data record) – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts • Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP • Identification data
3-6
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Configuration options 3.4 Configuration options for the interface modules
• • • • • • •
•
•
Applications Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via an RS 485 interface Direct data exchange Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication via PROFIBUS DP Use of fail-safe modules Clocking as of 1.5 Mbps Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP using HW Config Operation as a DPV0 slave – Noncyclical data traffic (dataset read/write): Class 2 services (e.g. firmware update) Operation as a DPV1 slave – Acyclic data traffic (read/write data record) – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts Number of modules: max. 63
Interface module Transfer rates: IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE 9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s
after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 additional: • ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m (can be parameterized) • Identification Data • Option handling and status byte for power module • Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication for fault-secure modules • Operation as DPV1-slave on the Y-switching • •
• • •
Connection of the PROFINET IO via RJ45 connector Operation as an IO device – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m Number of modules: max. 63 Status byte for power modules
Transfer rate: 100 Mbit/s Autosensing
IM151-3 PN
after 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 additional: • Summary of modules within a byte (packing) • Slot granular replacement value behavior • Data sets for I/O devices
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
3-7
Configuration options 3.4 Configuration options for the interface modules
Rules for setting up a fiber-optic cable network with IM151-1 FO STANDARD For fiber-optic cable networks containing nodes with integrated fiber-optic cable interfaces, note the following: • The fiber-optic cable network can only be set up as a line segment. • If you remove the fiber-optic cable from an integrated fiber-optic cable interface, or the supply voltage to the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module fails, all the downstream nodes are no longer accessible.
Example configuration of a fiber-optic cable network with IM151-1 FO STANDARD The figure below presents an example of how to set up a fiber-optic cable network with the ET 200S and the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module. 1
2
3
①
S7-400H automation system with IM 467 FO as the DP master
②
ET 200S Distributed I/O with IM151-1 FO STANDARD
③
Fiber-optic duplex cable
Rules for setup of a PROFINET network You can find information about setting up and starting up PROFINET in the PROFINET system documentation.
3-8
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Configuration options 3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules
3.5
3.5.1
3.5
Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules
Electronic modules and applications
Use of electronic modules Table 3-4
Electronic modules and the applications for which they are suitable Applications
•
Evaluating switches, proximity switches (BEROs), sensors, and encoders
24 VDC
Electronic module 2DI 24 VDC Standard 2DI 24 VDC High Feature 4DI 24 VDC Standard 4DI 24 VDC High Feature 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard
UC 24 to 48V
4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature
• •
Evaluating NAMUR sensors Evaluating wired, unwired mechanical sensors
4 input channels
4DI NAMUR
•
Evaluating switches, proximity switches (BEROs), sensors, and encoders
120 VAC
2DI 120 VAC Standard
230 VAC
2DI 230 VAC Standard
Switching solenoid valves, DC and AC contactors, indicator lights, actuators
24 VDC up to 0.5 A
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
•
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard 24 VDC up to 2 A
2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
120/230 VAC up to 1 A
2DO 24 to 230 VAC/1 A
Up to 120 VDC/230 VAC up to 5 A
2RO NO 24 to 120 VDC/5 A 24 to 230 VAC/5 A
Up to 48 VDC/230 VAC up to 5 A
2RO NO/NC 24 to 48 VDC/5 A 24 to 230 VAC/5 A
•
Measuring voltages
±10 V/ ± 5 V/ 1 to 5 V
2AI U Standard
•
Measuring voltages with high resolution
±10 V/ ± 5 V/ 1 to 5 V
2AI U High Feature
•
Time-critical measuring of voltages
± 10V/ ± 5V/ ± 2.5V/ 1 to 5V
2AI U High Speed
•
Measuring currents with two-wire measuring transducers
4 to 20 mA
2AI I 2WIRE Standard
Time-critical measuring of currents with two-wire measuring transducers
4 to 20 mA
Measuring currents with four-wire measuring transducers
± 20 mA/ 4 to 20 mA
•
•
4AI I 2WIRE Standard 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed
0 to 20 mA
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2AI I 4WIRE Standard
3-9
Configuration options 3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules Applications
Electronic module
•
Measuring currents with two-wire, four-wire measuring transducers and high resolution
± 20 mA/ 4 to 20 mA
2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature
•
Time-critical measuring of currents with four-wire measuring transducers
4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA ± 20 mA
2AI I 4WIRE High Speed
•
Measuring temperatures with thermoresistors and resistors Measuring reference junction temperatures in thermocouple applications
Pt100/ Ni100 150 Ω/300 Ω/600 Ω
2AI RTD Standard
Measuring temperatures with thermoresistors and resistors Measuring reference junction temperatures in thermocouple applications High degree of accuracy Temperature coefficient can be assigned
Pt100/ Ni100/ Pt 200/ Ni 120/ Pt 500/ Ni 500/ Pt 1000/ Ni 1000 150 Ω/ 300 Ω/ 600 Ω/ PTC
2AI RTD High Feature
•
Measuring temperatures with thermocouples and voltages
Type E/N/J/K/L/S/R/B/T ± 80 mV
2AI TC Standard
•
Measuring temperatures with thermocouples and voltages Internal reference junction in connection with TM-E15S24-AT
Type E/N/J/K/L/S/R/B/T/C ± 80 mV
2AI TC High Feature
•
Outputting of voltages
± 10 V/ 1 to 5 V
2AO U Standard
•
Outputting of voltages with high resolution
± 10 V/ 1 to 5 V
2AO U High Feature
•
Outputting of currents
±20 mA/ 4 to 20 V
2AO I Standard
•
Outputting of currents with high resolution
± 20 mA/ 4 to 20 V
2AO I High Feature
•
Photoelectric proximity switch
Reflex sensor and diffuse sensor with IQ-SENSE
4 IQ-SENSE
•
Counting of pulses, measurement of frequency, rotational speed, or period duration by means of incremental encoders
24 V signals up to 100 kHz
1COUNT 24V/100kHz
5 V signals up to 500 kHz
1COUNT 5V/500kHz
Detecting and evaluating of paths with absolute encoders (SSI) Simple positioning tasks
Absolute encoder: 13 Bit/ 21 Bit/ 25 1SSI Bit
Control of stepper motor power sections Positioning of stepper motors
5 V pulses up to 204 kHz
1STEP 5V/204kHz
•
Outputting of pulses in 4 different operating modes
Minimum pulse duration of 200 µs
2PULSE
•
Controlled positioning, incremental encoder 5 V differential signals
Drive controlled by means of digital 1POS INC/Digital outputs: backwards, forwards, rapid traverse/creep speed
•
• •
• •
•
• • • •
Drive triggered via analog output ±10V
3-10
1POS INC/Analog
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Configuration options 3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules Applications •
Controlled positioning, SSI encoder
Electronic module
Drive controlled by means of digital 1POS SSI/Digital outputs: backwards, forwards, rapid traverse/creep speed Drive triggered via analog output ±10V
1POS SSI/Analog
•
RS-232C/RS-422/RS-485 serial data transmission
ASCII and 3964(R) protocol
1SI 3964/ASCII
Protocol mode and USS
1SI Modbus/USS
•
Reservation of a slot for any electronic module
Width 15 mm
RESERVE
Width 30 mm
Use of electronic modules on terminal modules You can combine the terminal modules in the ET 200S configuration. Table 3-5
TM-P terminal modules and the power modules for which they are suitable
Power modules
TM-P terminal modules for power modules
Screw terminal
15S23-A1
15S23-A0
15S22-01
30S44-A0
F30S47-F0
Order number 6ES7-193
...4CC20-0AA0
...4CD20-0AA0
...4CE00-0AA0
...4CK20-0AA0
3RK1 903-3AA00
Spring terminal
15C23-A1
15C23-A0
15C22-01
30C44-A0
Order number 6ES7-193
...4CC30-0AA0
...4CD30-0AA0
...4CE10-0AA0
...4CK30-0AA0
---
---
---
Fast Connect
15N23-A1
15N23-A0
15N22-01
Order number 6ES7-193
...4CC70-0AA0
...4CD70-0AA0
...4CE60-0AA0
PM-E 24 VDC
●
●
●
PM E 24-48 VDC
●
●
●
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/ 24 to 230 VAC
●
●
●
PM-E F pm 24 VDC PROFIsafe*
●
PM-E F pp 24 VDC PROFIsafe*
●
PM-D F 24 VDC PROFISafe
●
* see manual ET 200S Fault-Secure Modules
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
3-11
Configuration options 3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules Table 3-6
TM-E terminal modules and the electronic modules for which they are suitable
Electronic modules
TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules
Screw terminal
15S26-A1
15S24-A1
15S24-01
15S23-01
15S24-AT
30S44-01
30S46-A1
Order number 6ES7193
...4CA400AA0
...4CA200AA0
...4CB200AA0
...4CB000AA0
...4CL200AA0
...4CG200AA0
...4CF400AA0
Spring terminal
15C26-A1
15C24-A1
15C24-01
15C23-01
15C24-AT
30C44-01
30C46-A1
Order number 6ES7193
...4CA500AA0
...4CA300AA0
...4CB300AA0
...4CB100AA0
...4CL300AA0
...4CG300AA0
...4CF500AA0
Fast Connect
15N26-A1
15N24-A1
15N24-01
15N23-01
---
---
---
Order number 6ES7193
...4CA800AA0
...4CA700AA0
...4CB700AA0
...4CB600AA0
●
●
●
●
4DI UC24..48V HF
●
●
●
●
4DI NAMUR
●
●
●
●
2DI 120 VAC Standard
●
●
●
●
2DI 230 VAC Standard
●
●
●
●
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A
●
●
●
●
2RO NO 24 to 120 VDC/5 A 24 to 230 VAC/5 A
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2DI 24 VDC Standard 2DI 24 VDC High Feature 4DI 24 VDC Standard 4DI 24 VDC High Feature 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
2RO NO/NC 24 to 48 VDC/5 A 24 to 230 VAC/5 A 2AI U Standard 2AI U High Feature 2AI U High Speed 2AI I 2WIRE Standard 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed 4AI I 2WIRE Standard
●
●
2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature
●
●
2AI I 4WIRE Standard
●
●
●
●
2AI I 4WIRE High Speed 2AI RTD Standard
3-12
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Configuration options 3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules Electronic modules
TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules
Screw terminal
15S26-A1
15S24-A1
15S24-01
15S23-01
15S24-AT
30S44-01
30S46-A1
Order number 6ES7193
...4CA400AA0
...4CA200AA0
...4CB200AA0
...4CB000AA0
...4CL200AA0
...4CG200AA0
...4CF400AA0
Spring terminal
15C26-A1
15C24-A1
15C24-01
15C23-01
15C24-AT
30C44-01
30C46-A1
Order number 6ES7193
...4CA500AA0
...4CA300AA0
...4CB300AA0
...4CB100AA0
...4CL300AA0
...4CG300AA0
...4CF500AA0
Fast Connect
15N26-A1
15N24-A1
15N24-01
15N23-01
---
---
---
Order number 6ES7193
...4CA800AA0
...4CA700AA0
...4CB700AA0
...4CB600AA0
2AI RTD High Feature
●
●
●
●
2AI TC Standard
●
●
●
●
2AI TC High Feature 2AO U Standard
● ●
●
2AO U High Feature 2AO I Standard
●
●
●
●
2AO I High Feature 4 IQ-SENSE
●
●
1COUNT 24V/100kHz
●
●
1COUNT 5V/500kHz
●
1SSI
●
●
1STEP 5V/204kHz
●
●
2PULSE
●
●
1POS INC/Digital
●
1POS SSI/Digital
●
1POS INC/Analog
●
1POS SSI/Analog
●
1SI 3964/ASCII
●
●
1SI Modbus/USS
●
●
4/8 F-DI 24 VDC PROFIsafe*
●
●
4 F-DO 24 VDC/2 A PROFIsafe*
●
●
●
●
RESERVE (width 15 mm)
●
●
RESERVE (width 30 mm)
●
●
●
* see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
3-13
Configuration options 3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules
3.5.2
Identifying the proper terminal module for a power module
Applicability of power modules The table below indicates which power modules you can use with the various electronic modules: Power modules
Electronic modules
PM-E 24 VDC
Can be used with all electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC Standard, and 2DO 120/230 VAC.
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC
Can be used with all electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC Standard, and 2DO 120/230 VAC.
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/ 24 to 230 VAC
Can be used with all electronic modules.
PM-E F pm 24 VDC PROFIsafe
For the fail-safe modules.
PM-E F pp 24 VDC PROFIsafe
See ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe Modules manual
PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe
3-14
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Configuration options 3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules
Procedure Identifying the proper terminal module for a power module for your application:
'R\RX QHHGDFFHVVDWWKLV WHUPLQDOPRGXOHWRWKH$8; EXVE\PHDQVRIWHUPLQDOVIRU H[DPSOHIRUSURWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUVRU DGGLWLRQDOVXSSO\RISRWHQWLDOXSWR WKHPD[LPXPORDGYROWDJHRIWKH PRGXOH "
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO 7036 [WHUPLQDOV 1R
6SULQJWHUPLQDO 703& [WHUPLQDOV )DVW&RQQHFW 7031 [WHUPLQDOV
"Properties" button > "Parameter" tab > "Properties" button > "Network settings" tab > "Options" button – Activate equidistance on the DP master system – Set the length of the equidistance DP cycle (max. 32 ms) – Set "Times Ti and To for all DP slaves equal" (causes a synchronization of the I/O data of the various DP slaves) – Times Ti and To can be set separately. Recommendation: accept the standard settings Ti and To. Equidistance
Network Station
Cables
Activate equidistant bus cycle Recalculate
Optimize DP cycle (and poss. Ti, To): Number of PGs/OPs/TDs etc. on PROFIBUS Configured:
0
Total:
0
Graduation: Equidistant DP cycle:
8.000
ms
0.125
ms
Details ...
(min = 6.000 ms; max. = 32.000 ms) Synchronization of Slaves Times Ti an To identical for all slaves (if not: setting in Properties - Slaves) Graduation: Time Ti (read in process values): (min = 3.4375 ms; max = 3.5625 ms)
3.5000
ms
0.0625
ms
Graduation: Time To (output process values): (min = 0.8125 ms; max = 3.5625 ms)
Figure 3-4
3.5000
ms
0.0625
ms
Dialog box options
Note The "recalculate" button enables you to recalculate a value for the equidistant DP cycle from STEP 7 that takes the current PROFIBUS DP configuration into account. This value is then automatically entered in the fields "Equidistant DP cycle", Time Ti (...)" and "Time To (...)".
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
3-27
Configuration options 3.7 Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP 3. DP slave settings: DP slave "Object properties" > "Cycle synchronization" tab – Activate "Synchronize DP slave to equidistant DP cycle". – Enter times Ti and To (if "Times Ti and To for all DP slave equal" was not set on the DP master). Recommendation: Accept the standard settings for Ti and To. – Select the devices to be configured and assign in the "Addresses" tab the subprocess image defined in the CPU. 3URSHUWLHV'3VODYH *HQHUDO LQIRUPDWLRQ
6ODYHSDUDPHWHUV
&ORFNLQJ
6\QFKURQL]H'3VODYHWRHTXLGLVWDQW'3F\FOHWKHVDPH7L7RIRUDOOVODYHV 7LPH7LUHDGSURFHVVYDOXHV PLQ PVPD[ PV
PV 7LPHEDVH
PV
7LPH7LUHDGSURFHVVYDOXHV PLQ PVPD[ PV
PV 7LPHEDVH
PV
(TXLGLVWDQW'3F\FOH PLQ PVPD[ PV
PV
Figure 3-5
DP slave properties dialog box
Note If you click on "Cycle synchronization" in the "Edit" menu, a configuration overview of the cycle synchronized devices is displayed.
4. Create user program: – Creation of the OB 61. – At the start of the OB 61, the SFC 126 has to call up the inputs to update the subprocess image. – At the end of the OB 61, the SFC 127 has to call up the outputs to update the subprocess image. – The subprocess image to be used is the one in the CPU parameterized subprocess image ("Cycle synchronization alarms" tab).
3-28
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Configuration options 3.7 Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP
3.7.3
Fault correction during isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP
Diagnostics Event
Cause
Action
Station failure of the ET 200S
Faulty isochronous operation (10 or more clock failures or clock violations).
Check the parameter assignment.
The obtainable equidistance times are too long.
The input delays of the HIGH FEATURE digital input modules are not optimally set.
Decrease the input delay of the HIGH FEATURE digital input modules.
No isochronous signal detection/output
Wrong process image partition used.
Check whether the same process image partition was used in the user program of OB61 (or up to OB64) when SFCs 126/127 are called and in the configuration of the DP master/DP slave.
Neg. RET_VAL in the case of SFCs 126/127
Further information You can find further information to the cycle synchronization in the STEP 7 Online Help and in the manual Cycle synchronicity.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
3-29
Configuration options 3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP
3.8
3.8.1
3.8
Option handling on PROFIBUS DP
Basic principles of option handling on PROFIBUS DP
Principle Option handling enables you to set up the ET 200S for future expansions (options). Option handling means that you install, wire, configure, and program the planned maximum configuration of the ET 200S. The electronic modules required for this are merely replaced with inexpensive RESERVE modules, which you can easily replace later with the planned electronic modules. This means that the ET 200S can be completely prewired ("master cabling") because the RESERVE module is not connected to the terminals of the terminal module and therefore is not connected to the process. The RESERVE modules for future expansion at the right-hand end of the station are optional. In this case, preparatory installation and wiring are possible but not required.
See also Removing and inserting electronic modules (Page 5-28)
3.8.2
Principle of operation of option handling
Principle With option handling, the configuration of slots 2 to 63 of the ET 200S is checked. If the check is enabled for a slot, the RESERVE module (option) or a configured electronic module can occupy this slot without a diagnostic being signaled. If the check is disabled, only the configured electronic module can be located in this slot. Any other module will trigger a diagnostic. You can also control the configuration of slots 2 to 63 and monitor the configuration of slots 1 to 63 using the control and feedback interface in the process input image (PII) and process output image (PIQ).
3-30
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Configuration options 3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP 7KHVHWWLQJRIWKHSDUDPHWHUರ2SHUDWLRQDW3UHVHW!$FWXDO FRQILJXUDWLRQರLVQRWUHOHYDQWIRUWKHSURFHVVLOOXVWUDWHG
,VWKHFRQILJXUHG HOHFWURQLFPRGXOHLQVHUWHG"
actual installation" blocked, • The ET 200S does not start up if a module is missing or if an incorrect module is inserted. The diagnostic "No module" or "Incorrect module" is signaled. • The ET 200S starts up if you enable option handling for the slot of an inserted RESERVE module. A diagnostic is not signaled.
3-34
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Configuration options 3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP
Substitute values If you have assigned an electronic module for the RESERVE module, the following substitute values are signaled: • Digital input modules: 0 • Analog input modules: 7FFFH • Function module: 0
3.8.6
Controlling and monitoring options
Introduction You can use the control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) to control and monitor options by means of the user program. Recommendation: Before you work with the optional enhancements of the ET 200S, check via the feedback interface (see table further below) whether all configured electronic modules are plugged in.
Note The use of SFCs 14/15 enables consistent accesses to the control and feedback interface.
Principle The control and feedback interface is in the process output and input image of the PM-E 24 to 48 VDC or PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC power modules. It is only available if you have selected the entries ending in ...O or ...SO for the relevant power module in the configuration software. There is one bit for each slot of the electronic or RESERVE modules of the ET 200S. • Control interface: Slot 2 to 63 • Feedback interface: Slot 1 to 63 ,%4%[ ,%4%[ ,%4%[
,%4%[ ,%4%[ ,%4%[ ,%4%[ ,%4%[
%LWQR
1RWDSSOLFDEOH
Figure 3-8
Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII)
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
3-35
Configuration options 3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP
Control interface PIQ (AB x to AB x+7): You can use these bytes (8 bytes) to control the diagnostic behavior of the slots that you enabled for option handling in HW Config. Only the bits of the slots you enabled for option handling during parameter assignment are evaluated (they are marked with "0"). Table 3-9 Slot 2 to 63
Control interface Value of the bit
Response
0
Parameter assignment for option handling applies. RESERVE modules are permitted: • The station is engaged in data exchange. • A diagnostic is not signaled. • The SF LED on the interface module is off.
1
Parameter assignment for option handling is cancelled. RESERVE modules are not accepted on this slot: • The station is engaged in data exchange. • The diagnostic "Incorrect module" is signaled. • The SF LED on the interface module lights up.
Feedback interface PII (EB x to EB x+7): The feedback interface (8 bytes) tells you which module is actually on each slot. All slots are reported. This includes slots that you have not enabled for option handling. Table 3-10 Slot 1 to 63
3-36
Feedback interface Value of the bit
Response
0
The RESERVE module, an incorrect module, or a removed module is on the slot.
1
The configured module is on the slot.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Configuration options 3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP
3.8.7
Fault correction during option handling
Fault correction during option handling Table 3-11
Fault correction during option handling Event
ET 200S does not start up; configuration error
Cause
Action
There are multiple entries of power modules ending in ...O or ...SO in the ET 200S configuration.
Check and correct the configuration in HW Config.
There is no power module entry ending in ...O or ...SO in the ET 200S configuration.
Use a power module entry ending in ...O or ...SO in HW Config.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
3-37
Configuration options 3.9 Identification data
3.9
3.9
Identification data
Definition Identification data are data that are stored in a module for assisting the user in: • Checking the system configuration • Locating hardware changes in a system • Correcting errors in a system Identification data enable modules to be uniquely identified online. For IM151-STANDARD (after 6ES7151-AA04-AB0), IM151- FO STANDARD (after 6ES7151-AB03-AB0) and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0), this data is available on the ET 200S. In STEP 7, the identification data are displayed in the "Module Information - IM 151" and "Properties - DP Slave" tabs (see STEP 7 online help).
Reading of identification data The user can access particular identification data with Read data record. This requires a two-stage access: 1. A data record containing the associated data record numbers for the various indices is stored in data record 248 (see table below). Table 3-12
Structure of DS 248 for ET 200S Content
Length (bytes)
Coding (hex)
Header information ID of content directory
2
00 01
Index of content directory
2
00 00
Length of subsequent blocks in bytes
2
00 08
Number of blocks
2
00 05
SSL Associated data record number Length of data record Index
2 2 2 2
F1 11 00 E7 00 40 00 01
SSL Associated data record number Length of data record Index
2 2 2 2
F1 11 00 E8 00 40 00 02
SSL Associated data record number Length of data record Index
2 2 2 2
F1 11 00 E9 00 40 00 03
SSL Associated data record number Length of data record Index
2 2 2 2
F1 11 00 EA 00 40 00 04
Block information for identification data
8-bytes of block information for additional data record objects Σ: 48
3-38
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Configuration options 3.9 Identification data 1. The portion of the identification data assigned to the respective index is located under the associated data record number (see table on identification data below). – All data records with identification data have a length of 64 bytes. – The data records are structured according to the principle shown in the table below. Table 3-13
Basic structure of data records with identification data Content
Length (bytes)
Coding (hex)
Header information SSL
2
F1 11
Index
2
00 0x
Length of identification data
2
00 38
Number of blocks with identification data
2
00 01
Index
2
00 0x
Identification data for the respective index (see table below)
54
Identification data
The identification data are assigned to the indices corresponding to the table below. The data structures in data records 231 to 234 correspond to the specifications of PROFIBUS Guideline - Order No. 3.502, Version 1.1, May 2003. Table 3-14
Identification data
Identification data
Access
Default setting
Explanation
Identification data 0: Index 1 (data record 231) MANUFACTUREROR_ID
Read (2 bytes)
2A hex (=42 dec)
The name of the manufacturer is stored here. (42 dec = SIEMENS AG)
ORDER_ID
Read (20 bytes)
Dependent on the module
Order number of the module
SERIAL_NUMBER
Read (16 bytes)
Not relevant
HARDWARE_REVISION
Read (2 bytes)
Not relevant
SWSOFTWARE_REVISION
Read (4 bytes)
Firmware version
Provides information on the firmware version of the module.
REVISIONS_COUNTER
Read (2 bytes)
-
Provides information on the assigned changes on the module.
PROFILE_ID
Read (2 bytes)
F600 hex
Generic device
PROFILE_SPECIFIC_ TYPE
Read (2 bytes)
0005 hex
On interface modules
IM_VERSION
Read (2 bytes)
0101 hex
Provides information on the version of the identification data (0101 hex = Version 1.1)
IM_SUPPORTED
Read (2 bytes)
000E hex
Provides information on the available identification data (Index 2 to 4)
Maintenance Data 1: Index 2 (data record 232) TAG_FUNCTION
Read/write (32 bytes)
-
Enter a system-wide unique identifier for the module here.
TAG_LOCATION
Read/write (22 bytes)
-
Enter the installation location of the module here.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
3-39
Configuration options 3.9 Identification data Identification data
Access
Default setting
Explanation
Maintenance Data 2: Index 3 (Data set 233) INSTALLATION_DATE
Read/write (16 bytes)
-
Enter the installation date of the module here.
RESERVED
Read/write (38 bytes)
-
Reserved
-
Enter a comment on the module here.
Maintenance Data 3: Index 4 (Data set 234) DESCRIPTOR
3-40
Read/write (54 bytes)
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Configuration options 3.10 Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system
3.10
3.10
Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system
Properties The ET 200S is integrated in a redundant DP system as DPV0 or DPV1 slave via the Y switching.
Requirements DPV0 • • •
DPV1
Possible with all interface modules after STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 GSD file
• •
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE after (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0) STEP 7 V5.3 SP3
5HGXQGDQW'3V\VWHP 5HGXQGDQW352),%86'3
Install New GSD File" in HW Config. 2. In the next dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm with "OK." Result: The IO device is displayed in the PROFINET IO directory in the hardware catalog. 3. Configure the ET 200S using STEP 7 (refer to STEP 7 integrated help).
6.3.1.3
Combine modules for the configuration
Introduction The IM151-3 PN has a maximum address scope of 256 byte for inputs and 256 bytes for outputs. For a better utilization of the available address space of the IO controller, you can combine multiple electronic modules/ load branches within a byte in the input or output area of the system image. This occurs though a systematic arrangement and identification of the ET 200S electronic modules/ motor starters.
Note The combination is only possible with the IM151-3 PN after 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 and STEP 7 V5.3 SP 2.
You can find a specification of the required address space for individual modules in the appendix. You can combine the following device types within a byte: • Digital input modules • Digital output modules • Motor starters (direct starters and oscillating starters) Optional other devices may be connected between combinable devices. The combination procedure is identical to PROFIBUS DP.
6-60
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupts The combination of devices takes place during the configuration. By selecting a device label without "*", you open a byte. By selecting a device with "*", you fill the byte until all bits are occupied. For the generation of insert/remove interrupts results in the following asymmetrical behavior: %\WH[ 0RGXOH 0RGXOH 0RGXOH ZLWKRXW ZLWK ZLWK ಯ ರ ಯ ರ ಯ ರ
,IUHPRYHGWKHQRQO\WKHUHPRYHGPRGXOHZLOOIDLO DUHPRYHPRGXOHLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHG ,IUHPRYHGWKHQDOOPRGXOHVWKDWDUHFRPELQHGLQWKLVE\WH FDQQRORQJHUEHVXSSOLHGZLWKWKHUHIHUHQFHGDWD
Figure 6-22
Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupts
Further information You can find further information on combining modules for the configuration in chapter ET200S configuration on the PROFIBUS DP.
See also Grouping modules for configuration (Page 6-4)
6.3.2
Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFINET IO
Software requirements Table 6-21
Software requirements for commissioning on PROFINET IO
Configuration software used
STEP 7 Configuration software for a different IO controller
Version Version 5.3 Service Pack 1 or higher
Notes You use HW Config and the supplied GSD file. You need the GSD file of ET 200S.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
6-61
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
Requirements for commissioning The following additional requirements must be satisfied for commissioning the ET 200S on PROFINET IO: • IO device installed • IO device wired • SIMATIC Micro Memory Card inserted, IO device configured with device names (configured and parameterized) • Supply voltage for the IO controller is switched on (see manual for the IO controller) • IO controller is switched to RUN mode (see manual for the IO controller)
Commissioning the ET 200S To commission the IO device, proceed as follows: 1. Switch on the voltage supply for the IO device (see relevant section in this manual). 2. If necessary, switch on the supply voltage for the load.
Startup of the ET 200S
Switch on the supply voltage for the IO device
IO device sets outputs to "0" and accepts the configured device name from the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card The "ON" LED comes on "BF" LED flashes. (with connection to the switch) “BF” LED lights up (without connection to the switch)
IO device receives connect telegram and parameter data from IO controller
"BF" LED off; inputs and outputs enabled; data transfer possible.
Figure 6-23
6-62
Startup of the ET 200S on the PROFINET IO
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
Note The IM151-3 PN interface modules support the default startup. The following conditions then apply: • The preset parameters are used (refer to parameters for the electronic modules). • All supply voltages at the power modules must be switched on.
6.3.3
Diagnostics using LED display
Interface module LED display on the interface module IM151-3 PN (front door opened):
6)
1
%)
2
21
3
/,1.
4
5;7;
5
(76
①
Group error (red)
②
Bus fault (red)
③
Supply voltage (green) under the front door:
④
IO controller not available (green)
⑤
Data exchange (yellow)
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
6-63
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
Status and error displays by means of LEDs on IM151-3 PN interface module Table 6-22
Status and error displays of IM151-3 PN LEDs
SF
BF
Meaning
Remedy
ON
Off
Off
Off
There is no voltage at the interface module, or the interface module has a hardware defect.
Switch on the power supply voltage DC 24 V on the interface module.
*
*
On
There is voltage at the interface module.
-
*
Flashing On
Incorrect or no connect telegram - no data exchange between the IO controller and the interface module (IO device) takes place, but the device is physically linked with a switch.
• •
Causes: • Device name is incorrect • Configuration error • Parameter assignment error *
On
On
•
The IO device is not linked with a switch
• •
• • • • •
On
*
On
The designed configuration of the ET 200S does not match the actual configuration.
Check the interface module. Check the configuration and parameter assignment. Check the device name. Assign a valid device name to the interface module.
Establish a connection to the IO controller (via a switch). Assign a valid device name to the interface module. Check the bus configuration. Check that the bus connector is correctly inserted. Check whether the bus cable to the IO controller has been disconnected.
Check the configuration of the ET 200S to determine whether a module is missing or defective or whether an unconfigured module is inserted. Check the configuration (e.g., with STEP 7), and correct the parameter assignment error.
There is an error in an I/O module, or the interface module is defective.
Replace the interface module, or contact your Siemens representative.
Incoming diagnostic On
Off
On
• •
•
Off
Off
On
No SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is inserted. The inserted SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is full or does not have enough storage space for the device name. No suitable SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is inserted (i.e. no SIMATIC Micro Memory Card from Siemens).
Data exchange is taking place between the IO controller and the ET 200S.
Before switching on the power supply voltage, insert an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 PN.
-
The preset configuration and actual configuration of the ET 200S match. On
On
Off
Flashing Off 0.5 Hz
6-64
Off
FW update is running FW update successfully completed
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO LEDs SF
BF
Meaning
Remedy
ON
On
Flashing Off 0.5 Hz
External error during FW update (e.g., incorrect FW)
Use the proper FW for the update
On
Flashing Off 2 Hz
Internal error during FW update (e.g., read/write error)
Repeat FW update
LINK
RX/TX
Off
Off
There is no connection to the switch/IO controller (no IO controller is available on the network)
• •
On
*
Autonegotiation is complete and PROFINET transmission rate is accepted
-
On
On
Transmission/reception is in progress
-
No uniform transmission rate Autonegotiation not successful
* Not applicable
Power modules, electronic modules, technology modules The use of LED displays for diagnostics for power modules, electronic modules, and technology modules is the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.
6.3.4
Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules
Actions after a diagnostic message Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions: • The SF LED on the interface module lights up. • Several simultaneous diagnostic messages are possible. • Diagnostics are reported as diagnostic interrupts and can be read using data records. • After a diagnostic message is signaled, the message is stored in the diagnostic buffer of the IO controller. • OB82 is called. If OB82 is not available, the IO controller goes to STOP mode. • Acknowledgement of the diagnostic interrupt (after which a new interrupt is possible).
Causes of errors and corrective actions The causes of the errors and the correction actions to be taken when specific diagnostic messages appear are described later on in this manual.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
6-65
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
6.3.5
Evaluating interrupts of ET 200S
Introduction Interrupts are triggered by the IO device when certain errors occur. Interrupt evaluation differs according to the IO controller used.
Evaluating interrupts with IO controller The ET 200S supports the following interrupts: • Diagnostic interrupts • Process interrupts • Insert/remove module interrupts In case of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically executed in the CPU of the IO controller (see information on program design in the System Software for S7-300/ S7-400 programming manual). You can obtain information on the cause of the error and the error type using the OB number and the start information. You can obtain detailed information on the error event in the error OB with SFB 54 RALRM (read supplementary interrupt information)
Triggering of a diagnostic interrupt When an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break) is registered , the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt if "Enable: Diagnostic interrupt" is set. The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the OB82 diagnostic block. The event that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information of OB82.
Triggering of a process interrupt When a process interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the OB40 process interrupt block. The event that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information of OB40.
Triggering of an insert/remove-module interrupt The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the OB83 diagnostic block. The event that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information of OB83.
6-66
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
Diagnostic "Process interrupt lost" For the modules • 2DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0), • 4DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0 and • 4DI UC24..48V HF (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) the diagnostic "Process interrupt lost" is not available at present.
Note If more than 90 process interrupts are generated per second, process interrupts can be lost.
6.3.6
Differences in the replacement value behavior
Replacement value behavior station granular with 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 If you use an interface module 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 in the IO device, the following replacement value behavior is displayed: • All output modules output their parameterized replacement values or 0 on their outputs.
Replacement value behavior slot granular starting with 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 If you use an interface module 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 in the IO device, the following replacement value behavior is displayed: • All outputs whose reference data companion are "Bad", output their parameterized replacement values or 0 on their outputs.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
6-67
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
6.3.7
Diagnostics with STEP 7
6.3.7.1
Reading out the diagnostics
Options for reading out the diagnostics Table 6-23
Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7
Automation system with IO controller SIMATIC S7
6.3.7.2
Block or tab in STEP 7
Application
Reference
In HW Config via "Station > Open ONLINE"
Device diagnostics in form of plain text on STEP 7 interface (in the Quick View, Diagnostics View, or Module Information windows)
"Diagnosing hardware" in
SFB 52 "RDREC"
Reading data records from the IO device
For SFBs, refer to STEP 7 online help (system
SFB 54 "RALRM"
Receiving interrupts from the IO device
For SFBs, refer to STEP 7 online help (system
STEP 7 online help
functions/system function blocks)
functions/system function blocks)
Channel diagnostics
Definition The channel diagnostics provide information on channel faults of modules. Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics in IO diagnostic data records. Each data record contains 10 bytes. Diagnostics can be read for all of the following: a submodule slot, a slot, the slots in a device that are assigned to an IO controller, and a device. The determination is reached via the data record number:
6-68
800AH
Channel diagnostics for a submodule slot
800BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming)
800CH
Manufacturer-specific diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming and going)
C00AH
Channel diagnostics for a slot
C00BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming)
C00CH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming and going)
E002H
Deviation of the set configuration by the actual configuration of an IO controller assigned IO device
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO E00AH
Channel diagnostics for the slots in a device that are assigned to an IO controller
E00BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO controller assigned channel in an IO device (coming)
E00CH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for the IO controller assigned channels in an IO device (coming and going)
F00AH
Channel diagnostics for a device
F00BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming)
F00CH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming and going)
AFF0H to AFFFH
Manufacturer, order number, creation state, version, etc.
The data record is read with the SFB 52 RDREC (read data record).
Structure of diagnostic data records You can find the diagnostic data records structure and examples for programming in the programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO. The data records that the ET 200S supports are based on the PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.0 standard. You can download the standard at http://www.profibus.com at no cost.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
6-69
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
Channel diagnostics The channel diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-3 PN interface module:
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+
%\WHDQG 'DWDUHFRUGOHQJWK
%\WHDQG 9HUVLRQ
%\WHDQG 6ORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW
%\WHDQG 6XEPRGXOHVORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
,GHQWLILFDWLRQRIWKHLQWHUUXSWVRXUFH+6XEPRGXOH
%\WH
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG (UURUW\SH %,QFRPLQJIDXOW
%\WH
%LWQR
%LWQR
%\WHDQG (UURUW\SH +ELV)))+5HVHUYHG +'LDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHIRUVXEPRGXOHLVSHQGLQJ +0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV +WR))))+5HVHUYHG
Figure 6-24
6-70
Structure of the channel diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
%LWQR
%LWQR
%\WHDQG &KDQQHOQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW
%\WH
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG (UURUW\SH %,QFRPLQJIDXOW &KDQQHOW\SH 5HVHUYHG ,QSXWFKDQQHO 2XWSXWFKDQQHO ,QSXWRXWSXWFKDQQHO
%LWQR
%\WH &KDQQHOW\SH +IUHHGDWDW\SH +:RUG +%LW +'RXEOHZRUG +ELWV +GRXEOHZRUGV +ELWV +WR))+5HVHUYHG +%\WH
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
Figure 6-25
Structure of the channel diagnostic record for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN
The bytes 16 to 21 repeat themselves for every further error that is reported in this diagnostic message.
Error types of the other modules The error types of the power modules, digital electronic modules, analog electronic modules, and the technology modules are the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
6-71
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
6.3.7.3
Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFINET IO
Incorrect configuration states The following incorrect structure states of the ET 200S lead to a malfunction of the IO device ET 200S or prevent the entry in the data exchange: • starting with 2 missing modules • Terminating module missing • Number of modules exceeds the maximum configuration • Faulty backplane bus (for example, terminal module is defective)
Note If one module is missing (gap) and the ET 200S is powered up, the IO device will not start up.
6.3.7.4
Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus
Special diagnostics for bus interruption If the ET 200S does not start up or data exchange is terminated, the cause can be a defective terminal module. The defective terminal module causes the ET 200S backplane bus to be physically interrupted. The IM151-3 PN (slot 0) has a manufacturer-specific diagnostic consisting of 35 bytes for locating a bus interruption. The module status and the identifier-related diagnostics are mapped within this diagnostic, as is the familiar case with PROFIBUS DP. An interrupt is not generated in the event of an interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus. The information must be read out explicitly by the user. The data record with index F00BH is available for this purpose.
6-72
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
Composition of manufacturer-specific diagnostics Content of manufacturer-specific diagnostics:
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+
%\WHDQG 'DWDUHFRUGOHQJWK
%\WHDQG 9HUVLRQ
%\WHDQG 6ORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW
%\WHDQG 6XEPRGXOHVORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
,GHQWLILFDWLRQRIWKHLQWHUUXSWVRXUFH+6XEPRGXOH
%\WH
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG (UURUW\SH %,QFRPLQJIDXOW
%\WH
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
%LWQR
(UURUW\SH +0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV
Figure 6-26
Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN on PROFINET IO
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
6-73
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
%LWQR
%LWQR
%\WHDQG &KDQQHOQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW
%\WH
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG (UURUW\SH %,QFRPLQJIDXOW &KDQQHOW\SH 5HVHUYHG ,QSXWFKDQQHO 2XWSXWFKDQQHO ,QSXWRXWSXWFKDQQHO
%LWQR
%\WH &KDQQHOW\SH +IUHHGDWDW\SH +:RUG +%LW +'RXEOHZRUG +ELWV +GRXEOHZRUGV +ELWV +WR))+5HVHUYHG +%\WH
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
Figure 6-27
Structure of the channel diagnostic record for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN on the PROFINET IO
The bytes 16 to 21 repeat themselves for every further error that is reported in this diagnostic message.
6-74
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
6.3.7.5
Failure of the load voltage of the power module
Failure of the load voltage If there is a failure of the load voltage of the power module, electronic modules with their own controller (including analog and technology modules) exhibit the following behavior: • If such a module is removed during the load voltage failure, a remove-module interrupt is generated. • If such a module is inserted during the load voltage failure, the associated insert module interrupt is generated once the load voltage is restored and the module has powered up.
Restoration of the load voltage After the load voltage is restored and the electronic modules with their own controller are powered up, the IM151-3 PN interface module reassigns parameters for these modules with the saved startup parameters.
Note If parameters have been reassigned for an electronic module with its own controller by means of the user program, the reassigned data are no longer available after the load voltage is restored.
6.3.7.6
STOP of IO controller and recovery of IO device
Diagnostics after IO controller STOP If diagnostics are reported by the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP mode, the corresponding organization blocks are not started after startup of the IO controller. You must create an image of the device state in OB100.
Diagnostics after restoration of the IO device When an IO device is restored, you must use SFB 52 to read the E00CH data record. There, you will find complete diagnostics for the slots in a device that are assigned to an IO controller.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
6-75
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
6-76
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
General technical specifications 7.1
7.1
7
Standards, certifications, and approvals
Introduction The general technical specifications comprise the standards and test values met by the ET 200S distributed I/O system, as well as the criteria used to test the ET 200S distributed I/O system.
CE certification
The distributed I/O system ET 200S fulfills the requirements and protection target/goals of the following EC guidelines and matches the harmonized European standards (EN) that were published for the memory-programmable controllers in the official journals of the European communities. • 73/23/EEC "Electrical Equipment for Use within Fixed Voltage Ranges" (Low-Voltage Directive) • 89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive) • 94/9/EC "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive) The EC declarations of conformity are kept available for the responsible authorities at the following address: Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Automation and Drives A&D AS RD ST Type Test P.O. Box 1963 D-92209 Amberg Federal Republic of Germany
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
7-1
General technical specifications 7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals
UL approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with • UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
CSA approval
Canadian Standards Association in accordance with • C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) or
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. according to • UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) • CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Industrial Control Equipment) or
HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. according to • UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) • CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) • UL 1604 (Hazardous Location) • CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
7-2
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
General technical specifications 7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx The motor starters ET 200S have no cUlus for HAZ. LOC.
Note You can find the currently valid certificates and approvals on the type plate of each module.
FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810 APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx The ET 200S motor starters are not FM-approved. All other modules of the ET 200S are FM-approved.
In accordance with EN 50021 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; type of protection "n") II 3 G EEx nA II T4 to T5
Warning Personal injury and property damage can occur. Personal injury and property damage can occur can occur in hazardous areas if you disconnect plug-in connections while an ET 200S is in operation. In hazardous areas, always deenergize the ET 200S before disconnecting plug-in connections.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
7-3
General technical specifications 7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals
Warning Warning Explosion Hazard Substitution of components may impair the suitability for Class I, Div. 2.
Warning This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D or in non-hazardous locations only.
Mark for Australia
The ET 200S distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements of AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).
IEC 61131 The distributed I/O system ET 200S fulfills the requirements and criteria of the standard IEC 61131-2 (memory programmable controllers, part 2: equipment requirements and verifications).
PROFIBUS standard The ET 200S distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
Marine type approval Classification organizations: • ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) • BV (Bureau Veritas) • DNV (Det Norske Veritas) • GL (Germanischer Lloyd) • LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping) • Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
Use in industrial environment SIMATIC products are designed for use in industrial environment.
7-4
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
General technical specifications 7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals Table 7-1
Use in industrial environment
Area of application
Requirement for Emitted interference
Industry
EN 61000-6-4: 2001 2001
Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2 : 2001 2001
Use in residential areas If you use the ET 200S in residential areas, you must ensure limit class B in accordance with EN 55011 with respect to emission of radio interference. Suitable measures for achieving a limit class B radio interference level are: • Installation of the ET 200S in grounded control cabinets/control boxes • Use of filters in supply lines
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
7-5
General technical specifications 7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
7.2
7.2
Electromagnetic compatibility
Definition Electromagnetic compatibility is the capability of an electrical device to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with this environment. The ET 200S distributed I/O system meets the requirements of the European Union's EMC law, for example. This requires that the ET 200S distributed I/O system meets the specifications and directives concerning electrical installation.
Pulse-shaped interferences The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S distributed I/O system relative to pulse-shaped interferences. Pulse-shaped interference
Tested with
Corresponds to severity
Electrostatic discharge
8 kV
3 (air discharge)
in accordance with IEC 61000-4-2
4 kV
2 (contact discharge)
Burst pulses (rapid, transient interferences) in accordance with IEC 61000-4-4.
2 kV (supply line) 2 kV (signal line)
3 3
Surge in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5 Only with lightning protection elements (see the DP master manual and the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks description) •
Asymmetrical interconnection
2 kV (supply line) 2 kV (signal line/data line)
•
Symmetrical interconnection
1 kV (supply line)
3
1 kV (signal line/data line)
7-6
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
General technical specifications 7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
Sinusoidal interferences The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S distributed I/O system relative to sinusoidal interferences. RF radiation in accordance with IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic RF field Amplitude-modulated 80 MHz to 1000 MHz
Pulse-modulated 900 MHz ±5 MHz
0.15 MHz to 80 MHz
50% ED
80% AM (1 kHz)
200 Hz repetition rate
150 Ω source impedance
10 V/m 80% AM (1 kHz)
RF coupling in accordance with IEC 61000-4-6
10 Veff unmodulated
Emission of radio interferences Emitted interference of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit class A, Group 1 (measured at a distance of 10 m). Frequency
Emitted interference
From 30 MHz to 230 MHz
< 40 dB (µV/m)Q
From 230 MHz to 1000 MHz
< 47 dB (µV/m)Q
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
7-7
General technical specifications 7.3 Transport and storage conditions
7.3
7.3
Transport and storage conditions
Transport and storage conditions The ET 200S distributed I/O system surpasses the transport and storage requirements of IEC 61131-2. The following specifications apply to modules that are transported and stored in their original packaging.
7.4
7.4
Type of condition
Permitted range
Free fall
≤1 m
Temperature
From -40°C to +70 °C
Temperature change
20 K/h
Air pressure
From 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to a height of -1000 to 3500 m)
Relative humidity
From 5% to 95%, without condensation
Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
Climatic environmental conditions The following climatic environmental conditions apply: Environmental conditions
Areas of application
Remarks
Temperature
From 0°C to 60°C
For horizontal installation
From 0°C to 40°C
For all other mounting positions
From 0°C to 55°C (see restrictions below)*
For vertical installation
Temperature change
10 K/h
Relative humidity
From 15% to a maximum of 95%
Without condensation
Air pressure
From 1,080 hPa to 795 hPa
Corresponds to an altitude of -1,000 m to 2,000 m
Contaminant concentration
SO2: < 0.5 ppm; rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation H2S: < 0.1 ppm; rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation
Test: 10 ppm; 4 days 1 ppm; 4 days
* Restrictions for area of application: 0 to 55°C, vertically mounted This area of application (0°C to 55°C, vertically-mounted) is permitted for the following modules only: • IM151-1 STANDARD: 6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0 • PM-E DC24V: 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 • 2DI DC24V ST: 6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0
7-8
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
General technical specifications 7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions • 2DI DC24V HF: 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 • 4DI DC24V ST: 6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0 • 4DI DC24V HF: 6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0 • 2DO DC24V/0,5A ST: 6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0 • 2DO DC24V/0,5A HF: 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 • 4DO DC24V/0,5A: 6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0 • 2DO DC24V/2A ST: 6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0 • 2DO DC24V/2A HF: 6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0 • 4DO DC24V/2A ST: 6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0 • 2RO NO DC24..120V/5A AC24..230V/5A: 6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0
Note None of the supply and load voltages of the ET 200S are permitted to exceed 24 VDC. This voltage limit must be ensured.
Mechanical environmental conditions The mechanical environmental conditions are shown in the following table in the form of sinusoidal vibrations. ET 200S modules
Frequency range
All modules except motor starters 10 ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz 58 ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Constant
Intermittent
0.15 mm amplitude
0.35 mm amplitude
2 g constant acceleration
5 g constant acceleration
7-9
General technical specifications 7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
Testing mechanical environmental conditions The following table provides information on the type and extent of tests for mechanical environmental conditions. Test for ...
Test standard
Terminal modules and electronic modules
Vibrations
Vibration test in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6
Vibration type: Frequency sweep with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. 10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz, constant amplitude of 0.35 mm 58 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 5 g Vibration duration: 20 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the 3 mutually vertical axes
Shock
Repetitive shock
7-10
Shock, tested in accordance with IEC 60068-2-27 Shock, tested in accordance with IEC 60068-29
Type of shock: Half-sine Strength of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in +/- direction in each of the 3 mutually vertical axes Type of shock: Half-sine Strength of shock: 25g peak value, 6 ms duration Direction of shock: 1000 shocks each in +/- direction in each of the 3 mutually vertical axes
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
General technical specifications 7.5 Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated voltage of the ET 200S
7.5
7.5
Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated voltage of the ET 200S
Test voltage Insulation resistance is demonstrated during the type test with the following test voltage in accordance with IEC 61131-2: Circuits with a rated voltage of Ue relative to other circuits or ground
Test voltage
1 m: The bus length of the ET 200S is > 1 m up to a maximum of 2 m. This setting will, however, increase the response time of the ET 200S.
8.2.3
Operation at Preset Actual Configuration
Description If the parameter is enabled and: • Modules are removed and inserted during operation, this does not lead to a station failure of the ET 200S. • The actual configuration differs from the expected configuration, the ET 200S remains engaged in data transfer with the DP master.
8-4
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Interface modules 8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules If the parameter is disabled and: • Modules are removed and inserted during operation, this leads to a station failure of the ET 200S. • The actual configuration differs from the expected configuration, there is no data transfer between the DP master and the ET 200S. Exception: Option handling with RESERVE modules.
8.2.4
Option handling, general
Description Using this parameter you can enable or disable the option handling for the entire ET 200S.
8.2.5
Option handling: slots 2 to 63
Description Using this parameter you can enable or disable the checking of the configuration. • Slots 2 to 63 are enabled: Instead of the configured electronic module you can also insert a RESERVE module in the relevant slot without diagnostics being reported. • Slots 2 to 63 are disabled: Only the configured module can be located on the relevant slot. RESERVE modules are treated as incorrect modules. Depending on the setting of the "Operation at Preset Actual Configuration" parameter, the ET 200S will either fail or remain in data transfer.
8.2.6
Diagnostic interrupt
Description This parameter allows you to enable or disable diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupts are supported • On PROFIBUS DP, when the ET 200S is in DPV1 mode. • On PROFINET IO.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
8-5
Interface modules 8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules
8.2.7
Hardware interrupt
Description This parameter allows you to enable or disable hardware interrupts. Hardware interrupts are supported • On PROFIBUS DP, when the ET 200S is in DPV1 mode. • On PROFINET IO.
8.2.8
Insert/remove-module interrupt
Description This parameter allows you to enable or disable insert/remove-module interrupts. Insert/remove-module interrupts are supported • On PROFIBUS DP, when the ET 200S is in DPV1 mode. • On PROFINET IO.
8.2.9
Analog-value format
Description Here you set the number format for all analog electronic modules.
8.2.10
Interference frequency suppression
Description The frequency of your alternating voltage system can affect measured values negatively, particularly in the case of both measurements in small voltage ranges and thermocouples. Specify here the dominant line frequency in your system (50 Hz or 60 Hz). The interference frequency suppression parameter is valid for all analog electronic modules. The integration time and conversion time of the individual modules are also set by means of this parameter. See the technical specifications of the analog electronic modules.
8-6
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Interface modules 8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules
8.2.11
Reference junction slot
Description This parameter allows you to assign a slot (none, 2 to 12 or 2 to 63) where the channel for measuring the reference temperature is located (calculation of the compensation value).
See also Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-8)
8.2.12
Reference junction input
Description This parameter allows you to set the channel (0/1) for measuring the reference temperature (calculation of the compensation value) for the assigned slot.
See also Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-8)
8.2.13
Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle
Description You can use this parameter to enable or disable isochronous operation. If you enable isochronous operation, the I/O of the ET 200S are synchronized with the global control frame of the master (as an equidistance cycle).
8.2.14
Time Ti (read in process values)
Description This value can only be set provided you have enabled the "Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle" parameter. Ti is the time reserved for reading in the input data at the ET 200S. At the beginning of Ti, the input data is converted at the terminals and stored in a buffer via the backplane bus of the ET 200S. Ti ends at the beginning of the next, equidistant DP cycle (i.e. with the global control frame).
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
8-7
Interface modules 8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules At this point, the most recent, most up-to-date input data must be available to be read in on the PROFIBUS subnet. The time Ti must take into account the processing and delay times in the modules and in the backplane bus of the ET 200S and, in the case of modular slaves, is therefore dependent on the configuration. The time Ti can only be set in the specified increments between the minimum and maximum values. Normally, the default values should be accepted.
8.2.15
Time To (output process values)
Description This value can only be set provided you have enabled the "Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle" parameter. The end of the To time is the point at which the output data is switched to the module terminals in its converted form. The time To includes the following: • Distribution of the output data via the PROFIBUS DP bus system to the slaves (= cyclic master- slave data exchange) • Distribution of the output data to the modules via the backplane bus of the slave • Conversion and transfer of the output data to the output terminals of the module To starts with the arrival of the global control frame. Like Ti, the time can be set only in the specified increments between the minimum and maximum values displayed. Normally, you should accept the default values.
8-8
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Interface modules 8.3 IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)
8.3
8.3
IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)
Order number 6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0
Features The IM151-1 BASIC interface module has the following features: • It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the RS485 interface. • It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted. • It supplies the backplane bus. • The PROFIBUS DP address of the ET 200S can be set by means of switches. • If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 BASIC interface module is also disconnected. • The maximum address space is 88 bytes for inputs and 88 bytes for outputs. • The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 BASIC to the rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting an ungrounded configuration. • Operation as a DPV0 slave • A maximum of 12 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 BASIC. • The maximum bus length is not relevant.
Terminal assignment The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP: Table 8-4
Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module View
Signal name
Designation
1
-
-
2
-
-
3
RxD/TxD-P
Data line B
4
RTS
Request To Send
5
M5V2
Data reference potential (station)
6
P5V2
Supply plus (station)
7
-
-
8
RxD/TxD-N
Data line A
9
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
8-9
Interface modules 8.3 IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0) View / / 0 0
Signal name
Designation
1L+
24 VDC
2L+
24 VDC (for loop through)
1M
Chassis ground
2M
Ground (for loop through)
Block diagram
6)
%)
21
(OHFWULFDO LVRODWLRQ
352),%86'3 FRQQHFWLRQ $ $ % %
%DFNSODQHEXV
(OHFWURQLF FRPSRQHQWV (76 EDFNSODQH EXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
352),%86 DGGUHVV ,QWHUQDOSRZHU VXSSO\
Figure 8-1
8-10
3 3 3 3
Block diagram for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Interface modules 8.3 IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimension W x H x D (mm)
45 x 119.5 x 75
Weight
Approx. 150 g Data for specific modules
Transmission rate
9.6, 19.2, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500 kbps, 1.5, 3; 6; 12 Mbps
Bus protocol
PROFIBUS DP
Interface
RS 485
SYNC capability
Yes
FREEZE capability
Yes
Manufacturer ID
80F3H
Direct data exchange
Yes
Isochronous operation
No
Max. output current of the PROFIBUS DP interface (5, 6)
80 mA
Voltages, currents, potentials Rated supply voltage of the electronic components (1L+)
24 VDC
•
P1
Yes
•
Power failure bypass
No
Isolation •
Between the backplane bus and electronic components
No
•
Between the PROFIBUS DP and electronic components
Yes
•
Between the supply voltage and electronic components
No
Permitted potential difference (to the rail)
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with
500 VDC
Current consumption from rated supply voltage (1L+)
Approx. 70 mA
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 1.5 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts
None
Diagnostic function
Yes
• •
Group error PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring
Red "SF" LED red "BF" LED
•
Monitoring of the power supply voltage of the electronics
Green "ON" LED
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
8-11
Interface modules 8.4 IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)
8.4
8.4
IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)
Order number 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0
Features The IM151-1 STANDARD interface module has the following features: • It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the RS485 interface. • It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted. • It supplies the backplane bus. • The PROFIBUS DP address of the ET 200S can be set by means of switches. • Switching off the DC 24 V power supply voltage also switches off the interface module IM151-1 STANDARD. • The maximum address space is 244 bytes for inputs and 244 bytes for outputs. • The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 STANDARD to the rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting an ungrounded configuration. • Operation as a DPV0 slave • A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 STANDARD. • The maximum bus length is 2 m (can be set). • Supports option handling and status byte for power modules. Additional features as compared to the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (up to 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0): • Operation as a DPV1 slave – Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write): Class 2 services and class 1 services – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts • Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP • Identification data
8-12
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Interface modules 8.4 IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)
Terminal assignment The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP: Table 8-5
Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module View
Signal name
Designation
1
-
-
2
-
-
3
RxD/TxD-P
Data line B
4
RTS
Request To Send
5
M5V2
Data reference potential (station)
6
P5V2
Supply plus (station)
7
-
-
8
RxD/TxD-N
Data line A
9 / / 0 0
1L+
24 VDC
2L+
24 VDC (for loop through)
1M
Chassis ground
2M
Ground (for loop through)
Block diagram 6)
%)
21
(OHFWULFDO LVRODWLRQ
352),%86'3 FRQQHFWLRQ $ $ % %
%DFNSODQHEXV
(OHFWURQLF FRPSRQHQWV (76 EDFNSODQH EXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
352),%86 DGGUHVV
,QWHUQDOSRZHU VXSSO\
Figure 8-2
3 3 3 3
Block diagram for the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
8-13
Interface modules 8.4 IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimension W x H x D (mm)
45 x 119.5 x 75
Weight
Approx. 150 g Data for specific modules
Transmission rate
9.6, 19.2, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500 kbps, 1.5, 3; 6; 12 Mbps
Bus protocol
PROFIBUS DP
Interface
RS 485
SYNC capability
Yes
FREEZE capability
Yes
Manufacturer ID
806AH
Direct data exchange
Yes
Isochronous operation
No
Max. output current of the PROFIBUS DP interface (5, 6)
80 mA
Voltages, currents, potentials Rated supply voltage of the electronic components (1L+)
24 VDC
•
P1
Yes
•
Power failure bypass
Min. 20 ms
Isolation •
Between the backplane bus and electronic components
No
•
Between the PROFIBUS DP and electronic components
Yes
•
Between the supply voltage and electronic components
No
Permitted potential difference (to the rail)
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with
500 VDC
Current consumption from rated supply voltage (1L+)
Approx. 200 mA
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 3.3 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
8-14
Interrupts
yes
Diagnostic function
yes
• •
Group error PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring
Red "SF" LED
•
Monitoring of the power supply voltage of the electronics
Green "ON" LED
Red "BF" LED
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Interface modules 8.4 IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)
Updating the firmware of the IM151-1 STANDARD With STEP 7 V5.1, Service Pack 3 and higher, you can update the firmware of the IM151-1 STANDARD (via accessible nodes). To update the firmware you receive files (*.UPD) with the current firmware. The following prerequisites must be fulfilled: • The IM151-1 STANDARD in the station whose firmware is to be updated must be accessible online. • The files with the current firmware version must be available in the file system of your programming device (PG)/PC. You can find information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.
Note We recommend that you perform the firmware update via PROFIBUS DP.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
8-15
Interface modules 8.5 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)
8.5
8.5
IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)
Order number 6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0
Features The IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module has the following features: • It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the fiber-optic cable interface • It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted. • It supplies the backplane bus. • The PROFIBUS DP address of the ET 200S can be set by means of switches. • If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module is also disconnected. • The maximum address space is 244 bytes for inputs and 244 bytes for outputs. • The reference potential M of the supply voltage of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD to the rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting an ungrounded configuration. • Operation as a DPV0 slave • A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 FO STANDARD. • The maximum bus length is 2 m (can be set). • Supports option handling and status byte for power modules. Additional characteristics compared to the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD (up to 6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0): • Operation as a DPV1 – Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write): Class 2 services and class 1 services – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – insert/remove interrupts • Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP • Identification data
8-16
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Interface modules 8.5 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)
Terminal assignment In the following table you will find the terminal assignment of the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD for the DC 24V power supply and PROFIBUS DP with fiber optic interface: Table 8-6
Terminal assignment of the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD View
5HFHLYLQJVWDWLRQV
Signal name
Designation
5HFHLYLQJVWDWLRQV
)LEHURSWLFLQWHUIDFH
7UDQVPLWWHU
7UDQVPLWWHU
/ / 0 0
1L+
24 VDC
2L+
24 VDC (for loop through)
1M
Chassis ground
2M
Ground (for loop through)
Block diagram 352),%86'3 FRQQHFWLRQILEHURSWLFV 6)
%)
21
%DFNSODQHEXV
(OHFWURQLF FRPSRQHQWV (76 EDFNSODQH EXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
352),%86 DGGUHVV ,QWHUQDOSRZHU VXSSO\
Figure 8-3
$ % $ %
)LEHU RSWLF LQWHUIDFH
3 3 3 3
Block diagram for the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
8-17
Interface modules 8.5 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
45 × 119.5 × 75
Weight
Approx. 150 g Data for specific modules
Transmission rate
9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kbps, 1.5; 12 mbps
Bus protocol
PROFIBUS DP
Interface
Fiber-optic cable
SYNC capability
Yes
FREEZE capability
Yes
Manufacturer ID
806BH
Direct data exchange
Yes
Isochronous operation
No Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated supply voltage of the electronic components (1L+)1
24 VDC
•
P1
Yes
•
Power failure bypass
Min. 20 ms
Isolation •
Between the backplane bus and electronic components
No
•
Between the supply voltage and electronic components
No
Current consumption from rated supply voltage (1L+) •
Power supply for the ET 200S backplane bus
Power dissipation of the module
Approx. 200 mA Max. 700 mA Typ. 3.3 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
8-18
Interrupts
yes
Diagnostic function
yes
• •
Group error PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring
Red "SF" LED red "BF" LED
•
Monitoring of the power supply voltage of the electronics
Green "ON" LED
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Interface modules 8.5 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)
Updating the firmware of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD With STEP 7 V5.1, Service Pack 3 and higher, you can update the firmware of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD (via accessible nodes). To update the firmware you receive files (*.UPD) with the current firmware. The following prerequisites must be fulfilled: • The IM151-1 FO STANDARD in the station whose firmware is to be updated must be accessible online. • The files with the current firmware version must be available in the file system of your programming device (PG)/PC. You can find information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.
Note We recommend that you perform the firmware update via PROFIBUS DP.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
8-19
Interface modules 8.6 Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)
8.6
8.6
Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)
Order number 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0
Features The IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module has the following features: • Links the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP. • prepares the data for the populated electronic modules and motor starters. • Supplies the backplane bus. • synchronizable with the DP cycle (cycle synchronization). • Via switch, the PROFIBUS DP address is adjustable from ET 200S. • If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module is also disconnected. • The maximum address space is 244 bytes for inputs and 244 bytes for outputs. • The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE to the rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting a floating configuration. • Operation as a DPV0 slave – Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write): Class 2 services • Operation as a DPV1 slave – Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write): Class 2 services and class 1 services – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts • A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE. 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 and higher: • The maximum bus length on the backplane bus amounts to 2 m. • Operation as DPV1-slave on the Y switching • Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication via PROFIBUS DP. You saw the description of this function in the manual S7 Distributed Safety Configuration and Programming. • Use of fault-secure RESERVE modules • Supports option handling and status byte for power modules • Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP with HW config possible. • Identification Data
8-20
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Interface modules 8.6 Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)
Restrictions when operating the modules with the IM 151 HIGH FEATURE The following modules cannot be used with the IM 151 HIGH FEATURE: Module
Up to order number
Up to product version
1Count 24V/100kHz
6ES7138-4DA02-0AB0
1
1Count 5V/500kHz
6ES7138-4DE00-0AB0
1
1SSI
6ES7138-4DB00-0AB0
3
1STEP 5V/204kHz
6ES7138-4DC00-0AB0
3
1SI serial interface module
6ES7138-4DF00-0AB0
1
Modbus/USS serial interface module
6ES7138-4DF10-0AB0
1
2AI U; HIGH FEATURE
6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0
1
2AI I 2/4DMU; HIGH FEATURE
6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0
1
2AO U; HIGH FEATURE
6ES7135-4LB00-0AB0
1
Terminal assignment The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP: Table 8-7
Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module View
Signal name
Designation
1 -
-
2 -
-
3 RxD/TxD-P
Data line B
4 RTS
Request To Send
5 M5V2
Data reference potential (station)
6 P5V2
Supply plus (station)
7 -
-
8 RxD/TxD-N
Data line A
9 / / 0 0
1L+
24 VDC
2L+
24 VDC (for loop through)
1M
Chassis ground
2M
Ground (for loop through)
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
8-21
Interface modules 8.6 Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)
Block diagram
6)
%)
21
(OHFWULFDO LVRODWLRQ
352),%86'3 FRQQHFWLRQ $ $ % %
%DFNSODQHEXV
(OHFWURQLF FRPSRQHQWV (76 EDFNSODQH EXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
352),%86 DGGUHVV 3 3 3 3
,QWHUQDOSRZHU VXSSO\
Figure 8-4
Block diagram for the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
45 × 119.5 × 75
Weight
Approx. 150 g Data for specific modules
Transmission rate
9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kbps, 1.5; 3; 6; 12 Mbps
Bus protocol
PROFIBUS DP
Interface
RS 485
SYNC capability
Yes
FREEZE capability
Yes
Manufacturer ID
80E0H
Direct data exchange
Yes
Isochronous operation
Yes1
Max. output current of the PROFIBUS DP interface (5, 6)
80 mA
Voltages, currents, potentials Rated supply voltage of the electronic components (1L+)
24 VDC
•
P1
Yes
•
Power failure bypass
Min. 20 ms
Isolation
8-22
•
Between the backplane bus and electronic components
No
•
Between the PROFIBUS DP and electronic components
Yes
•
Between the supply voltage and electronic components
No
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Interface modules 8.6 Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0) Permitted potential difference (to the rail)
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with
500 VDC
Current consumption from rated supply voltage (1L+)
Approx. 200 mA
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 3.3 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts
Yes
Diagnostic function
Yes
• •
Group error PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring
Red "SF" LED
•
Monitoring of the power supply voltage of the electronics
Green "ON" LED
1
Red "BF" LED
As of 1.5 Mbps
Update of firmware for IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE As of STEP 7 V5.1, ServicePack 3, you can update the firmware of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE. To update the firmware you receive files (*.UPD) with the current firmware. The following prerequisites must be fulfilled: • The IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE in the station whose firmware is to be updated is accessible online. • The files with the current firmware version are available in the file system of your programming device (PG)/PC. You can find information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.
Note Be sure to use the correct firmware version for the interface module you are using for the update. An interface module with an older issue date can not be updated with the firmware version for an interface module with a newer issue date and vice versa.
Note We recommend you update the firmware using PROFIBUS DP.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
8-23
Interface modules 8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
8.7
8.7.1
8.7
Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
Features of the IM151-3 PN interface module
Order number 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0
Features The IM151-3 PN interface module has the following features: • It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS IO • It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted. • It supplies the backplane bus. • Adoption of the device name and backup on SIMATIC Micro Memory Card • Firmware update via SIMATIC Micro Memory Card • The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-3 PN to the mounting rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting an ungrounded configuration. • Supported Ethernet services – Network diagnostics (SNMP) • Interrupts – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts • The maximum address scope amounts to 256 byte I/O data. • A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-3 PN. • The maximum bus length on the backplane bus is 2 m. • Summary of modules within a byte (packing). • Data sets for I/O devices
8-24
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Interface modules 8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
Compatibility of the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) Note Firmware version of the controller used In order for you to be able to operate the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) on a controller, this must be operated with one of the firmware versions listed in the tables below. You can utilize the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0) independently of the controller firmware version.
The following firmware versions are compatible to the interface module IM 151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0): CPU Controller
CP
SOFTNET PNIO
315-2 PN/DP 317-2 PN/DP
443-1
343-1
SIMATIC NET-CD
≥ V2.3.2
≥ V2.2
≥2.0
V 6.3 Hotfix 1
Firmware version
Restrictions when operating the modules with the IM 151 PN The following modules cannot be used with the IM 151-3 PN: Module
Up to order number
Up to product version
2AO U; HIGH FEATURE
6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0
3
2AO I; HIGH FEATURE
6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0
3
1SI serial interface module
6ES7138-4DF00-0AB0
4
Modbus/USS serial interface module
6ES7138-4DF10-0AB0
4
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
8-25
Interface modules 8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
Terminal assignment The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-3 PN interface module for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFINET IO: Table 8-8
Terminal assignment of the IM151-3 PN interface module View 6KLHOG
/ / 0 0
Signal name
Designation
1 TD
Transmit Data +
2 TD_N
Transmit Data –
3 RD
Receive Data +
4 GND
Ground
5 GND
Ground
6 RD_N
Receive Data –
7 GND
Ground
8 GND
Ground
1L+
24 VDC
2L+
24 VDC (for loop through)
1M
Chassis ground
2M
Ground (for loop through)
Block diagram ,VRODWLRQ /,1.
5;7;
6)
%)
21
%DFNSODQHEXV
(OHFWURQLFFRPSRQHQWV
8-26
5-
P& 6,0$7,&0LFUR 0HPRU\&DUG
,QWHUQDO SRZHUVXSSO\
Figure 8-5
352),1(7 FRQQHFWLRQ
3 3 3 3
Block diagram for the IM151-3 PN interface module
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Interface modules 8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
45 x 119.5 x 75
Weight
Approx. 135 g Data for specific modules
Transmission rate
100 Mbps full duplex
Transmission method
100BASE-TX
Autonegotiation
Yes
Bus protocol
PROFINET IO + TCP/IP
Supported Ethernet services
PROFINET IO (device), TCP/IP Protocol Suite: • ping • arp • Network diagnostics (SNMP) / MIB-2
PROFINET interface
RJ45
Vendor ID
002AH
Device ID
0301H Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated supply voltage of the electronic components (1L+)
24 VDC
•
P1
Yes
•
Power failure bypass
Min. 20 ms
Isolation •
Between the backplane bus and electronic components
No
•
Between Ethernet and electronic components
Yes
•
Between the supply voltage and electronic components
No
Permitted potential difference (to the rail)
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with
500 VDC
Current consumption from rated supply voltage (1L+)
Approx. 200 mA
Power dissipation of the module
Approx. 2 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts
Yes
Diagnostic function
Yes
• •
Group error PROFINET IO bus monitoring
Red "SF" LED
•
Monitoring of the power supply voltage of the electronics
Green "ON" LED
•
Existing connection to network
Green "LINK" LED
•
Send/receive via network
Yellow "RX/TX" LED
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Red "BF" LED
8-27
Interface modules 8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
8.7.2
SNMP The IM151-3 PN supports the Ethernet service SNMP. MIB-2 (RFC1213) is supported R/W objects are changeable using SNMP tools and are stored in the device. Remanent stored SNMP parameters are reset to default settings (STEP 7 V5.3 SP 3 and higher) in HW config dialog "Target system > Ethernet > Edit Ethernet nodes" "Reset" button under "Reset to default settings". After exchange with a factory-new device, the R/W objects in the IM151-3 PN are set to default settings.
8.7.3
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for IM151-3 PN
Insertion of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card A SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is used as storage medium for the IM151-3 PN. The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be used as a portable data medium.. The following data are saved on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. • Technology data (device names) • Data for a firmware update
Note On one SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, you can save either technology data or update data.
Life of a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card The life of an SIMATIC Micro Memory Card depends substantially on the following factors: • Number of deletion or programming operations • External factors, such as ambient temperature At an ambient temperature up to 60 ° C, a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card has a useful life of 10 years at maximum 100,000 write/delete operations.
Caution Possible data loss If the maximum number of write/delete operations is exceeded, data loss is possible.
8-28
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Interface modules 8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
Applicable SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards The following memory modules are available for use: Table 8-9
Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards Type
Order numbers
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 64k
6ES7953-8LF11-0AA0
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 128k
6ES7953-8LG11-0AA0
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 512k
6ES7953-8LJ11-0AA0
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 2M
6ES7953-8LL11-0AA0
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 4M
6ES7953-8LM11-0AA0
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 8M
6ES7953-8LP11-0AA0
For storage of the device name, a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 64k sufficient. For a firmware update the SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards with 2 MB or higher are required.
Inserting/replacing the card The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card designed so that it can also be removed and inserted under power. The beveled corner of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card prevents it from being inserted the wrong way around (reverse polarity protection). The module slot on the IM 151-3 PN is located behind the front door. The front door has a protruding edge for opening. The socket of the module slot has an ejector enabling you to remove the card. To eject the card, push in the ejector with a small screwdriver or ball-point pen. Position of the module slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card on the IM151-3 PN:
1
2 3
(6/[$$ 6,(0(16
6,0$7,&
0LFUR 0HPRU\ &DUG
(76
①
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
②
Module slot
③
Ejector
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
8-29
Interface modules 8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
8.7.4
Updating the firmware of the IM151-3 PN
Introduction • Starting with STEP 7 V5.3, Service Pack 1, you can update the firmware of the IM151-3 PN. • You receive three files (*.upd) with the current firmware for the update of the firmware. For performing the update use the file "header.upd".
Procedure You perform the firmware update using a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with FW update. 1. Transfer the update files using STEP 7 and your programming device to an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (≥ 2 MB). 2. Switch off the power to the IM151-3 PN and insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with FW update. 3. Switch on the power. IM151-3 PN recognizes the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with the FW update automatically and starts the FW update. During the FW update, the SF and BF LEDs are illuminated, and the ON LED is off. Once the FW update is complete, the BF LED flashes at 0.5 Hz. 4. Switch off the power to the IM151-3 PN and remove the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with FW update. 5. Insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with the device names and switch on the power supply again. The IM 151-3 PN powers up with the new firmware and is now ready for operation.
8-30
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
9
Terminal modules 9.1
9.1
Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules
Assignment of the terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules The following table describes which electronic modules you can use with the different power modules: Table 9-1
Assignment of TM-P terminal modules and power modules
Power modules
TM-P terminal modules for power modules
Screw terminal
15S23-A1
15S23-A0
15S22-01
30S44-A0
F30S47-F1
Order number 6ES7193...
4CC20-0AA0
4CD20-0AA0
4CE00-0AA0
4CK20-0AA0
3RK1 903-3AA00
Spring terminal
15C23-A1
15C23-A0
15C22-01
30C44-A0
---
Order number 6ES7193...
4CC30-0AA0
4CD30-0AA0
4CE10-0AA0
4CK30-0AA0 ---
Fast Connect
15N23-A1
15N23-A0
15N22-01
Order number 6ES7193...
4CC70-0AA0
4CD70-0AA0
4CE60-0AA0
PM-E 24 VDC
●
●
●
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC
●
●
●
PM-E 24-48 VDC/ 120-230 VAC
●
●
●
PM-E F pm 24 VDC PROFIsafe*
●
PM-E F pp 24 VDC PROFIsafe*
●
PM-D F 24 VDC PROFISafe *
●
* see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual
The following table describes which electronic modules you can use with the different terminal modules:
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
9-1
Terminal modules 9.1 Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules Table 9-2
Assignment of TM-E terminal modules and electronic modules
Electronic modules Screw terminal Order number 6ES7193...
TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules 15S26-A1 4CA400AA0
15S24-A1 4CA200AA0
15S24-01 4CB200AA0
15S23-01 4CB000AA0
15S24-AT 4CL200AA0
30S44-01 4CG200AA0
30S46-A1 4CF400AA0
Spring terminal
15C26-A1
15C24-A1
15C24-01
15C23-01
15C24-AT
30C44-01
30C46-A1
Order number 6ES7193...
4CA500AA0
4CA300AA0
4CB300AA0
4CB100AA0
4CL300AA0
4CG300AA0
4CF500AA0
Fast Connect
15N26-A1
15N24-A1
15N24-01
15N23-01
---
---
---
Order number 6ES7193...
4CA800AA0
4CA700AA0
4CB700AA0
4CB600AA0
●
●
●
●
4DI UC24..48V HF
●
●
●
●
4DI NAMUR
●
●
●
●
2DI 120 VAC Standard
●
●
●
●
2DI 230 VAC Standard
●
●
●
●
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A
●
●
●
●
2RO NO 24 to 120 VDC/5 A 24 to 230 VAC/5 A
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2DI 24 VDC Standard 2DI 24 VDC High Feature 4DI 24 VDC Standard 4DI 24 VDC High Feature 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
2RO NO/NC 24 to 48 VDC/5 A 24 to 230 VAC/5 A 2AI U Standard 2AI U High Feature 2AI U High Speed 2AI I 2WIRE Standard 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed
9-2
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.1 Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules Electronic modules Screw terminal Order number 6ES7193...
TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules 15S26-A1 4CA400AA0
15S24-A1 4CA200AA0
15S24-01 4CB200AA0
15S23-01 4CB000AA0
15S24-AT 4CL200AA0
30S44-01 4CG200AA0
30S46-A1 4CF400AA0
Spring terminal
15C26-A1
15C24-A1
15C24-01
15C23-01
15C24-AT
30C44-01
30C46-A1
Order number 6ES7193...
4CA500AA0
4CA300AA0
4CB300AA0
4CB100AA0
4CL300AA0
4CG300AA0
4CF500AA0
Fast Connect
15N26-A1
15N24-A1
15N24-01
15N23-01
---
---
---
Order number 6ES7193...
4CA800AA0
4CA700AA0
4CB700AA0
4CB600AA0
4AI I 2WIRE Standard
●
●
2AI 2/4WIRE High Feature
●
●
2AI I 4WIRE Standard, 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed
●
●
2AI RTD Standard
●
2AI RTD High Feature
●
●
●
●
2AI TC Standard
●
●
●
●
●
2AI TC High Feature 2AO U Standard
● ●
●
2AO U High Feature 2AO I Standard
●
●
●
●
2AO I High Feature 4 IQ-SENSE
●
●
1COUNT 24V/100kHz
●
●
1SSI
●
●
1STEP 5V/204kHz
●
●
2PULSE
●
●
1COUNT 5V/500kHz
●
1POS INC/Digital
●
1POS SSI/Digital
●
1POS INC/Analog
●
1POS SSI/Analog
●
1SI 3964/ASCII
●
●
1SI Modbus/USS
●
●
4/8 F-DI 24 VDC PROFIsafe*
●
●
4 F-DO 24 VDC/2 A PROFIsafe*
●
●
●
●
RESERVE (width 15 mm)
●
●
●
RESERVE (width 30 mm)
●
●
* see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
9-3
Terminal modules 9.2 TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)
9.2
9.2
TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)
Order numbers 6ES7193-4CC20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CC30-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features • Terminal module for power module • Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S23-A1 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C23-A1 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N23-A1 • 2 x 3 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8
Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules: Table 9-3
Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules View
Terminal 2 L+/L
AUX1 A A 4 8
L+/L 2
6
3
7
M/N AUX1 A 4
9-4
L+/L
Designation
3 M/ N
Rated load voltage for inserted power module and associated potential group
A AUX1 4
Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module
6 L+/L 7 M/ N
Rated load voltage for inserted power module and associated potential group
A AUX1 8
Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module
M/N
A AUX1 8
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.2 TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)
Block diagram Block diagram of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules 1 2 PM-E
2
6
3 A 4
7 A 8
3 4 5
①
Backplane bus
②
Infeed of the power buses to the electronic modules
③
Terminals with connection to the power module
④
Use of terminals A4 and A8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any kind
⑤
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) • Screw-type/spring terminals • Fast Connect Weight
15 × 132 × 43 15 × 162 × 43 Approx. 65 g Data for specific modules
Number of terminals
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2x3
9-5
Terminal modules 9.3 TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)
9.3
9.3
TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)
Order numbers 6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CD30-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CD70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features • Terminal module for power module • Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S23-A0 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C23-A0 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N23-A0 • 2 x 3 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Interrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8 This table shows the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules. Table 9-4
Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules View
Terminal
AUX1 A A 4 8
L+/L 2
6
M/N 3 AUX1 A 4
9-6
7
L+/L M/N
2
L+/L
3
M/ N
Designation Rated load voltage for inserted power module and associated potential group
A AUX1 4
Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module
6
L+/L
7
M/ N
Rated load voltage for inserted power module and associated potential group
A AUX1 8
Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module
A AUX1 8
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.3 TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)
Block diagram Block diagram for the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules
1 2
PM-E
2
6
3 A 4
7 A 8
3 4 5
①
Backplane bus
②
Infeed of the power buses to the electronic modules
③
Terminals with connection to the power module
④
Use of terminals A4 and A8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any kind
⑤
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) • Screw-type/spring terminals • Fast Connect Weight
15 × 132 × 43 15 × 162 × 43 Approx. 65 g Data for specific modules
Number of terminals
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2x3
9-7
Terminal modules 9.4 TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)
9.4
9.4
TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)
Order numbers 6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CE10-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CE60-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features • Terminal module for power module • Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S22-01 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C22-01 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N22-01 • 2 x 2 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals
Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules: Table 9-5
Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules View
Signal name 2 L+/L 3 M/ N 6 L+/L 7 M/ N
Designation Rated load voltage for inserted power module and associated potential group Rated load voltage for inserted power module and associated potential group
AUX1 L+/L
L+/L 2
6
3
7
M/N
9-8
M/N
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.4 TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)
Block diagram Block diagram for the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules 1 2 PM-E
2 3
6
3
7
4
①
Backplane bus
②
Infeed of the power buses to the electronic modules
③
Terminals with connection to the power module
④
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) • Screw-type/spring terminals • Fast Connect
15 x 119.5 x 43
Weight
Approx. 55 g
15 x 142 x 43 Data for specific modules
Number of terminals
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2x2
9-9
Terminal modules 9.5 TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)
9.5
9.5
TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)
Order numbers 6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CK30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
Features • Terminal module for the fail-safe PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module • Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module • Wiring of the fail-safe digital outputs of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe • Prewiring possible • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Interrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8
9-10
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.5 TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)
Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module: Table 9-6
Terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module View
Terminal 2
9
1 3
2
1 60
1 4
3 A 4
1 71 A1 82
1 5 1 6
A A 4 8
24 VDC
Designation Load voltage of 24 VDC for: inserted power module, associated potential group. DO 0 and DO 1 and P1 and P2 voltage buses
3
M
Chassis ground
A 4
AUX 1
Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module
6
24 VDC
Load voltage of 24 VDC for: inserted power module, associated potential group. DO 0 and DO 1 and P1 and P2 voltage buses
7
M
Chassis ground
A 8
AUX 1
Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module
9
DO 0 P
10
DO 0 M
Connections for fail-safe digital output 0 (switching to P/M potential)
11
DO 2 P
12
DO 2 M
Connections (relay contacts) for fail-safe switching of the voltage buses P1 and P2. P1 and P2 can also be used as DO 2 M and DO 2 P (for a diagram of the wiring, see the
ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual). 13
DO 1 P
14
DO 1 M
15
DO 2 P
16
DO 2M
Connections for fail-safe digital output 0 (switching to P/M potential) Connections (relay contacts) for fail-safe switching of the voltage buses P1 and P2. P1 and P2 can also be used as DO 2 M and DO 2 P (for a diagram of the wiring, see the
ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual).
Caution If high currents occur at DO 2 P and DO 2 M, you must wire terminals 11 and 15 (DO 2 P) and 12 and 16 (DO 2 M) in parallel. Otherwise, the temperature of the terminals cannot be prevented from rising due to the current load.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
9-11
Terminal modules 9.5 TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)
Block diagram Block diagram of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module
1 2
(OHFWULFDO 0RGXOH (0
$
$
3
4 5
①
Backplane bus
②
Uninterrupted power buses from the power module
③
Terminals with connection to the electronic module
④
Use of terminals A4 and A8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any kind
⑤
Infeed of the AUX1 bus by means of terminals A4 and A8
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
30 x 132 x 43
Weight
Approx. 116 g (TM-P30S44-A0) Approx. 100 g (TM-P30C44-A0) Data for specific modules
Number of terminals
14
Description of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module You can find a description of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module you can use with the above terminal modules in the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules manual.
9-12
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.6 TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00)
9.6
9.6
TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00)
Order number 3RK1 903-3AA00 (screw-type terminal)
Features • Terminal module for the fail-safe PM-D F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module • Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals
Pin assignment The following table shows the terminal assignment of the terminal module TM-PF30S47-F1: Table 9-7
Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module View
Terminal
2 0
2 7
2 1
2 8
Designation
20
24 VDC
Rated load voltage 24 VDC: for inserted power module and voltage buses SG 1 to SG 6 and U 1
21
M
Chassis ground
27
24 VDC
Rated load voltage 24 VDC: for inserted power module and voltage buses SG 1 to SG 6 and U 1
28
M
Chassis ground
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
9-13
Terminal modules 9.6 TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00)
Block diagram Block diagram of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module
1 2 (OHFWULFDO 0RGXOH (0
3
4
①
Backplane bus
②
Uninterrupted power buses from the power module
③
Terminals with connection to the electronic module
④
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
30 × 196,5 × 102
Weight
Approx. 300 g Data for specific modules
Number of terminals
9-14
4
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.7 TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)
9.7
9.7
TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)
Order numbers 6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features • Universal terminal module for the electronic modules • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S26-A1 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C26-A1 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N26-A1 • 2 x 6 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
9-15
Terminal modules 9.7 TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)
Pin assignment • Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules: Table 9-8
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules View
1
5
2
6
3
7
4 A 4 A 3
8 A 8 A 7
Terminal
Designation
1
DI0/DO0
DI: Digital input
2
DI2/DO2
DO: Digital output
3
24 VDC for DI0/ M for DO0
4
24 VDC for DI2/ M for DO2
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
5
DI1/DO1
6
DI3/DO3
7
24 VDC for DI1/ M for DO1
8
24 VDC for DI3/ M for DO3
A 4
AUX1 bus implemented. Connection to terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7.
M: Ground load power supply
A 3 A 8 A 7
• Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 terminal modules with the 2-channel electronic modules and technology modules: The terminal assignment of terminals 1 to 8 corresponds to that of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules. You will find the various terminal assignments in the technical specifications of the different electronic modules. You can obtain the terminal assignment of terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7 from the above table.
9-16
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.7 TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)
Block diagram Block diagram for the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 terminal modules
1
(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH (0
2
3
$ $ $ $
4
①
Backplane bus
②
Uninterrupted power buses from the power module
③
Terminals with connection to the electronic module
④
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) • Screw-type/spring terminals • Fast Connect
15 × 157 × 43
Weight
Approx. 70 g (TM-E15C26-A1)
15 × 202 × 43 Approx. 83 g (TM-E15S26-A1) Approx. 95 g (TM-E15NS26-A1) Data for specific modules
Number of terminals
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2x6
9-17
Terminal modules 9.8 TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)
9.8
9.8
TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)
Order numbers 6ES7193-4CA20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CA30-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features • Terminal module for electronic modules • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-A1 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-A1 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N24-A1 • 2 x 4 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8
Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules: Table 9-9
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules View
Terminal 1 2
Designation
The assignment depends on which electronic module is inserted
3
9-18
A 4
AUX1
The assignment depends on which electronic module is inserted
1
5
5
2
6
6
3
7
A 4
A 8
Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module
7 A 8
AUX1
Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.8 TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)
Block diagram Block diagram for the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules
1
(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH (0
2
$
$
3 4 5
①
Backplane bus
②
Uninterrupted power buses from the power module
③
Terminals with connection to the electronic module
④
Use of terminals 4 and 8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any kind
⑤
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals 4 and 8
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) • Screw-type/spring terminals • Fast Connect Weight
15 × 132 × 43 15 × 162 × 43 Approx. 65 g (TM-E15S24-A1 and TM-E15C24-A1) Approx. 72 g(TM-E15N24-A1) Data for specific modules
Number of terminals
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2x4
9-19
Terminal modules 9.9 TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)
9.9
9.9
TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)
Order numbers 6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CB30-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CB70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features • Terminal module for electronic modules • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-01 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-01 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N24-01 • 2 x 4 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without connection to terminals 4 and 8
Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules: Table 9-10
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules View
Terminal
Designation
1 The assignment depends on which electronic module is inserted 2 No access to the AUX1 bus. 3 Terminals not used by the electronic module can be used for 4 unneeded connecting wires. The permitted potential 5 corresponds to the potential of the electronic module used.
9-20
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
6 7 8
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.9 TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)
Block diagram Block diagram for the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules
1
(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH (0
2
3
4
①
Backplane bus
②
Uninterrupted power buses from the power module
③
Terminals with connection to the electronic module
④
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without connection to terminals 4 and 8
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) • Screw-type/spring terminals • Fast Connect Weight
15 × 132 × 43 15 × 162 × 43 Approx. 65 g (TM-E15S24-01 and TM-E15C24-01) Approx. 72 g (TM-E15N24-01) Data for specific modules
Number of terminals
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2x4
9-21
Terminal modules 9.10 TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)
9.10
9.10
TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)
Order numbers 6ES7193-4CB00-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CB10-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CB60-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features • Terminal module for electronic modules • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S23-01 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C23-01 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N23-01 • 2 x 3 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals
Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules: Table 9-11
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules View
Terminal
Designation
1
The assignment depends on which electronic module is inserted
2
No access to the AUX1 bus.
3 5 6
9-22
1
5
2
6
3
7
7
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.10 TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)
Block diagram Block diagram for the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules 1 (OHFWULFDO0RGXOH (0
2
3
4
①
Backplane bus
②
Uninterrupted power buses from the power module
③
Terminals with connection to the electronic module
④
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) • Screw-type/spring terminals • Fast Connect Weight
15 × 120 × 43 15 × 142 × 43 Approx. 55 g (TM-E15S23-01 and TM-E15C23-01) Approx. 60 g (TM-E15N23-01) Data for specific modules
Number of terminals
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
2x3
9-23
Terminal modules 9.11 TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)
9.11
9.11
TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)
Order numbers 6ES7193-4CL20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CL30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
Features • Terminal module for the 2AI TC High Feature electronic module
Caution You can only insert the 2AI TC HF electronic module into the TM-E15S24-AT/TM-E15C24-AT terminal module. Inserting another electronic module can result in the destruction of the internal reference junction of the terminal module.
• Terminal module has an internal reference junction for temperature compensation. Temperature compensation is thus possible directly at the reference junction of the thermocouples. • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-AT • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-AT • 2 x 2 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without connection to terminals 4 and 8
9-24
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.11 TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)
Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of terminal module TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT: Table 9-12
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal module View
Terminal
Designation
1 Assignment: See electronic module 2AI TC HF 2 3 Not available 4 5 Assignment: See electronic module 2AI TC HF 1
5
2
6
6 7 Not available 8
Block diagram Block diagram of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-P15C24-AT terminal module
1
(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH (0
2
3
4
①
Backplane bus
②
Uninterrupted power buses from the power module
③
Terminals with connection to the electronic module
④
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
9-25
Terminal modules 9.11 TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) Weight
15 × 132 × 43 Approx. 55 g Data for specific modules
Number of terminals
2x2
See also 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) (Page 12-91)
9-26
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.12 TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)
9.12
9.12
TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)
Order numbers 6ES7193-4CG20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CG30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
Features • Terminal module for electronic modules with a width of 30 mm and fail-safe electronic modules • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E30S44-01 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E30C44-01 • 4 x 4 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to terminals 4 and 8 or 12 and 16.
Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules: Table 9-13
Terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module View
Terminal 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
59 1 60 1 71 1 82
1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6
5
Designation
The assignment depends on which electronic module is inserted No access to the AUX1 bus. Terminals not used by the electronic module can be used for unneeded connecting wires. The permitted potential corresponds to the potential of the electronic module used.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
9-27
Terminal modules 9.12 TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)
Block diagram Block diagram of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module
1 2
(OHFWULFDO 0RGXOH (0
3
4
①
Backplane bus
②
Uninterrupted power buses from the power module
③
Terminals with connection to the electronic module
④
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to terminals 4 and 8 or 12 and 16
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
30 × 132 × 43
Weight
Approx. 110 g (TM-E30C44-01) Approx. 125 g (TM-E30S44-01) Data for specific modules
Number of terminals
9-28
4x4
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.13 TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)
9.13
9.13
TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)
Order numbers 6ES7193-4CF40-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CF50-0AA0 (spring terminal)
Features • Terminal module for the fail-safe electronic modules 4/8 F-DI 24 VDC PRFOFIsafe and 4 F-DO 24 VDC/2A PROFIsafe. • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E30S46-A1 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E30C46-A1 • 6 x 4 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with a connection to terminals A4, A8, A3, A7 and A12, A16, A11, A15.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
9-29
Terminal modules 9.13 TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)
Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules: Table 9-14
Terminal assignment of the terminal module View
1 2 3 4 A 4 A 3
9-30
59 1 60 1 71 1 82 AA 1 82 AA 1 71
Terminal
1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 A 1 6 A 1 5
F-DI
F-DO
Designation
1
DI 0
DO 0 P
DI: Digital input
2
Vs1
DO 0 M
3
DI 2
-
4
Vs1
-
DO P and DO M: Connection for fail-safe digital output (switching to P/M potential)
5
DI 1
DO 1 P
6
Vs1
DO 1 M
7
DI 3
-
8
Vs1
-
9
DI 4
DO 2 P
10
Vs2
DO 2 M
11
DI 6
-
12
Vs2
-
13
DI 5
DO 3 P
14
Vs2
DO 3 M
15
DI 7
-
16
Vs 2
-
A4, A3, A8, A7
AUX1
AUX1 bus implemented. Connection to terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7.
A12, A11, A16, A15
AUX1
AUX1 bus implemented. Connection to terminals A12, A11 and A16, A15.
Vs1: Internal sensor supply 1 for DI 0 to DI 3 Vs2: Internal sensor supply 2 for DI 4 to DI 7
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminal modules 9.13 TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)
Block diagram Block diagram of the TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal module
1 2
(OHFWULFDO 0RGXOH (0
$$ $$
$ $
$
$
3
4 5
①
Backplane bus
②
Uninterrupted power buses from the power module
③
Terminals with connection to the electronic module
④
Connection of terminals A4, A8, A3, A7 and A12, A16, A11, A15 as productive conductor terminals or potential terminals of any kind
⑤
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with a connection to terminals A4, A3, A8, A7 and A12, A11, A16, A15
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
30 x 157 x 43
Weight
Approx. 158 g (TM-E30S46-A1) Approx. 131 g (TM-E30C46-A1) Data for specific modules
Number of terminals
6x4
Description of the electronic modules You can find a description of the 4/8 F-DI 24VDC PROFIsafe and 4 F-DO 24 VDC/2A PROFIsafe electronic modules you can use with the above terminal modules in the ET 200S Distributed I/O Module, Fail-Safe Modules manual.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
9-31
Terminal modules 9.13 TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)
9-32
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
10
Power modules 10.1
10.1
Parameters for power modules
Parameters The following table contains the parameters of the power modules. Table 10-1
Parameters for power modules Value range
Power module
Default setting
Applicability
PM-E24 VDC
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC
Diagnostics: No load voltage
Diagnostics: No load voltage
Diagnostics: No load voltage
Disable/enable
Disable
Power module
---
---
Diagnostics: Fuse blown
Disable/enable
Disable
Power module
---
---
Voltage type
DC/AC
DC
Power module
The parameters are explained below.
Diagnostics: No load voltage You use this parameter to enable a diagnostic message about missing load voltage. In the absence of load voltage, only the diagnostic message of the affected power module is forwarded to the DP master. The SF error LEDs of all the modules in the affected potential group come on.
Diagnostics: Fuse blown You use this parameter to enable a diagnostic message about a blown fuse. In the event of a blown fuse, only the diagnostic message of the affected power module is forwarded to the DP master. The SF error LEDs of all the modules in the affected potential group come on.
Voltage type You use this parameter to select the load voltage connected to the power module: DC voltage or AC voltage. The correct diagnosis is thus provided in the event of missing load voltage or a blown fuse.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
10-1
Power modules 10.2 PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)
10.2
10.2
PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)
Order number 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0
Features • The PM-E 24 VDC power module monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic modules in the potential group. The supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminal module. • You can use any electronic module in the potential group of the PM-E 24 VDC power module except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC Standard and 2DO 24-230 VAC/1 A.
Caution Only connect the specified rated load voltage of 24 VDC to the TM-P terminal module of the power module. The connected rated load voltage must correspond to the supply voltage of the electronic modules in the potential group.
• The current status of the power module is stored in the status byte in the process input image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnostic has been enabled.
Pin assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module for the different terminal modules: Table 10-2
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module View
Pin assignment
Remarks 24 VDC: Rated load voltage
7036$DQG30(9'&
M: Chassis ground AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage.
$8; $ $
9'&
9'&
0
0
$8;
$
$
$8;
9'&
10-2
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Power modules 10.2 PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks 24 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground
7036$DQG30(9'&
AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage. AUX1 is used as PE.
$8; $
9'&
$
9'&
0
$
$
$8;
9'& 0 $8;
7036DQG30(9'&
24 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground
$8;
9'&
9'&
0
0
9'&
Block diagram
3:5
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
/RDG YROWDJH PRQLWRULQJ
9'& 3 3
0
Figure 10-1
Block diagram of the PM-E 24 VDC power module
Technical specifications
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
10-3
Power modules 10.2 PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)
Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage •
24 VDC
Overvoltage protection
No
Protection with automatic circuit breakers
Yes, type C tripping characteristics
Max. current-carrying capacity (up to 60° C)
10 A
•
Short-circuit protection
No
Isolation •
Between rated load voltage and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between the power modules
Yes
Insulation tested with
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From the load voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module
Max. 4 mA Typ. 100 mW
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic function
10-4
Yes
• •
Group error Load voltage monitoring
Red "SF" LED
•
Diagnostic information readable
Yes
Green "PWR" LED
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Power modules 10.3 PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)
10.3
10.3
PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)
Order number 6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0
Features • The PM-E 24-48 VDC power module monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic modules in the voltage group. The supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminal module. • You can use all the electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC Standard, and 2DO 24-230 VAC/1 A in the voltage group of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module. • Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) in the process image for option handling. • The current status of the power module is stored in the status byte in the process input image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnosis has been enabled. • The PM-E 24-48 VDC power module is suitable for fail-safe modules.
Caution Only connect the specified rated load voltage of 24-48 VDC to the TM-P terminal module of the power module. The connected rated load voltage must correspond to the supply voltage of the electronic modules in the voltage group.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
10-5
Power modules 10.3 PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)
Pin assignment The following table shows you the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module for the different terminal modules: Table 10-3
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module View
Pin assignment 7036$DQG30(9'&
Remarks 24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage.
$8; $
9'&
$
9'&
0
$
$
$8;
9'& 0 $8;
24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage 7036$DQG30(9'&
M: Chassis ground $8; $ $
9'&
9'&
0
0
$8;
$
$
$8;
9'&
7036DQG30(9'&
AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage. AUX1 is used as PE.
24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground
$8;
9'&
9'&
0
0
9'&
10-6
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Power modules 10.3 PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)
Block diagram
3:5
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
/RDG YROWDJH PRQLWRULQJ
9'& 3 3
0
Figure 10-2
Block diagram of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage •
P1
•
Overvoltage protection
VDC Yes No
Protection with automatic circuit breakers
Yes, tripping characteristic B, C
Max. current-carrying capacity (up to 60° C)
10 A
•
Short-circuit protection
No
Isolation •
Between rated load voltage and backplane bus
•
Between the power modules
Yes Yes
Insulation tested with
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From the load voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module
Max. 12 mA Typ. 500 mW
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic function
Yes
• •
Group error Load voltage monitoring
Red "SF" LED
•
Diagnostic information readable
Yes
Green "PWR" LED
See also Address space of the inputs and outputs (Page C-1)
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
10-7
Power modules 10.4 PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)
10.4
PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)
10.4
Order number 6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0
Features The PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC has the following characteristic features: • Monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic modules in the voltage group. The supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminal module. • Can be used universally and can be assigned parameters for DC and AC load voltage for use with any electronic module. • Is required at least once for the ET 200S (to the right of the interface module). • Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) in the process image for option handling (see Appendix). • The current status of the power module is stored in the status byte in the process input image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnostic has been enabled (see Appendix). • Is additionally equipped with a replaceable fuse (5 mm x 20 mm).
1 2 Figure 10-3
10-8
Replacing the fuse
(1)
3-mm screwdriver
(2)
Fuse
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Power modules 10.4 PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)
Note The PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0) is not a direct replacement for the device with the order number 6ES7138-4CB00-0AB0 for AC applications because you have to select either AC or DC supply voltage. In the case of DC applications, the new module is a direct replacement because the default setting of the new parameter is "DC". If you want to replace the device 6ES7138-4CB00-0AB0 in AC applications, you have to create a new hardware configuration and set the value "AC" for the load voltage type parameter. If the hardware configuration is not changed for AC applications, the SF status LED remains on all the time. If the "No load voltage" diagnostic interrupt is enabled, several interrupts are activated in each AC cycle. The electronic modules that are connected to the voltage group of this PM-E continue to function normally, however.
Pin assignment
Table 10-4
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module for the different terminal modules:
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module View
Pin assignment
Remarks 24-48 VDC/ L1: Rated load voltage
7036$DQG30(9'&9$&
M/ N: Ground/neutral conductor AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage.
$8; $
$
9'&/
9'&/
01
01
$8;
$
$
$8;
9'&
a
$&
24-48 VDC/ L1: Rated load voltage 7036$DQG30(9'&9$&
M/ N: Ground/neutral conductor AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage.
$8; $
9'&/
$
AUX1 is used as PE.
9'&/ 9'&
01
01
$8;
$
$
$8;
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
a $&
10-9
Power modules 10.4 PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks 24-48 VDC/ L1: Rated load voltage
7036DQG30(9'&9$&
M/ N: Ground/neutral conductor
$8; 9'&/ 01
9'&/
9'&
a
$&
01
%DFNSODQHEXV
Block diagram
3 3
)6*
)XVH PRQLWRULQJ
3:5
/RDG YROWDJH PRQLWRULQJ
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV FLUFXLW
01
9'&/
)XVHV
Figure 10-4
10-10
Block diagram of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Power modules 10.4 PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
34 g Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage
24 to 56.7 VDC 24 to 48 VAC/120 VAC/ 230 VAC
Overvoltage protection
Yes
Max. current-carrying capacity
10 A
• •
For 24-56.7 VDC
Up to 30° C Max. 10 A up to 40° C: max. 9 A up to 60° C: max. 7 A
•
For 24-48/120/230 VAC
up to 30° C: max. 8 A up to 40° C: max. 7 A up to 60° C: max. 5 A
•
Short-circuit protection
Yes, IEC 127-2/1, 250 V, 10 A, fast fuse (5 x 20 mm), replaceable1
Isolation • Between rated load voltage and backplane bus • Between the power modules
Yes
Insulation tested with
1500 VAC
Current consumption from backplane bus
Max. 9.5 mA
•
From load voltage L1/L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module
Yes
Max. 9 mA Max. 5 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic function
Yes
• •
Group error Load voltage monitoring
Red "SF" LED
•
Fuse
Green "FSG" LED
•
Diagnostic information can be displayed
Yes
Green "PWR" LED
The fuses on this module are only additional fuses. External overcurrent protection (suitable for branch circuits in accordance with the applicable national regulations for electrical engineering) is required in the supply lines of the load circuit. 1
See also Address space of the inputs and outputs (Page C-1)
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
10-11
Digital Electronic Modules 11.1
11.1.1
11.1
11
Parameters for digital electronic modules
Parameters for digital input modules
Introduction The range of digital electronic modules (EM) includes input and output modules for 24 VDC. Input and output modules for 120/230 VAC are also available. A relay module enables the switching of voltages for AC and DC.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-1
Digital Electronic Modules 11.1 Parameters for digital electronic modules
Overview This table shows the parameters for digital input modules: Table 11-1
Parameters for digital input modules
2DI 24 VDC High Feature
4DI 24 VDC High Feature
4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature
2DI/ 4DI 24 VDC Standard 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard 2DI 120 VAC Standard 4DI 230 VAC Standard
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
Hardware interrupt3
---
---
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
---
Diagnostic interrupt
---
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
Input delay1
---
---
• • • •
0.1 ms 0.5 ms 3 ms 15 ms
3 ms
Module
Diagnostics: Short-circuit to M2
---
---
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
---
Diagnostics: Wire break4
---
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
---
Diagnostics: Fuse defect
---
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
---
Diagnostics: Load voltage missing
---
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
---
---
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Channel 0
Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge3
Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge3
---
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
1
The input delay applies to "0" to "1" and to "1" to "0".
2
Short circuit of the sensor supply.
3Can
only be assigned parameters for the IM151-1 High Feature interface module and the IM151-7 CPU
If the wire break check is activated, all the unused inputs must be stabilized to prevent them from triggering a module wire break. To do this, connect a resistor between terminal 24/48 V (3, A4, 7, A8) and the free input. The resistor must provide at least 0.5 mA of input current (see "Sensor Switching" in the table of technical specifications). This ensures that sufficient current is flowing to prevent wire break detection.. 4
In the off state, a sensor must provide a minimum of 0.5 mA (otherwise a wire break is detected in the off state). Alternatively, a resistor can be connected parallel to the sensor terminals (the current must be at least. 0.5 mA).
11-2
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.1 Parameters for digital electronic modules
11.1.2
Parameters for 4DI NAMUR
List of parameters This table shows the parameters for 4 DI NAMUR: Table 11-2
Parameters for 4DI NAMUR
4DI NAMUR
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
Diagnostic interrupt
• •
Enable Disable
Disable
Module
Sensor type
• • • •
Channel disabled NAMUR sensor Open single contact Single contact, closed, with 10 kΩ NAMUR changeover contact Open changeover contact Changeover contact, closed, with 10 kΩ
Disable
Channel
• • • Pulse stretching
• • • •
None 0.5 s 1s 2s
None
Channel
Diagnostics
• •
Enable Disable
Disable
Module
Diagnostics: wire break
• •
Enable Disable
Disable
Channel
Diagnostics: wire break
• •
Enable Disable
Disable
Channel
Chatter monitoring:
• •
0.5 s 1 s to 100 s (can be set at increments of 1 s)
0.5 s
Channel
• •
Disable 2 to 31
Disable
Channel
No sensor supply
Monitoring window* Chatter monitoring: Number of signal changes
* The parameters can only be set when the number of signal changes for chatter monitoring is activated
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-3
Digital Electronic Modules 11.1 Parameters for digital electronic modules
11.1.3
Parameters for digital output modules
Overview This table shows the parameters for digital output modules: Table 11-3
Parameters for digital output modules
2DO 24 VDC/0.50, 5 A High Feature
2RO NO NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/ 5 A
2DO 24 to 230 VAC/ 1A
Value range
Default setting Applicability
Substitute a value Keep last value
Substitute a value
Module
• •
"0" "1"
"0"
Channel
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
2DO/ 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard 2DO/ 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
2RO NO 2DO 24 24 to 120 VDC/5 A VDC/2 A High Feature 24 to 230 VAC/5 A Reaction to CPU-/master-STOP
---
• •
Substitute value 1
-----
Diagnostics: Wire break2
---
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Channel
Diagnostics: Short-circuit to M
---
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Channel
If the interface module becomes deenergized, the digital output modules will not produce substitute values. The value that is output = 0. 1
2
A wire break is only detected in the switched output state.
11-4
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.2 Parameter description for the digital electronic modules
11.2
11.2
11.2.1
Parameter description for the digital electronic modules
Hardware interrupt
Description This parameter enables the hardware interrupts for the module.
11.2.2
Input delay
Description You can use this parameter to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal are detected once the set time has elapsed.
11.2.3
Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge
Description This parameter allows you to enable a hardware interrupt at a rising edge (of a signal status change) for each channel.
11.2.4
Pulse stretching
Definition Pulse stretching is a function that changes a digital input signal. A pulse at a digital input is stretched to at least the assigned parameter length. If the input pulse already longer than the assigned parameter length, the pulse is not changed.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-5
Digital Electronic Modules 11.2 Parameter description for the digital electronic modules
The principle of pulse stretching The following figure uses examples to illustrate how and when input pulses are changed. 3XOVHVWUHWFKLQJSDUDPHWHU 7 7IRU!HGJH
7IRU!HGJH
3URFHVVVLJQDO ರSURFHVVHGರ LQSXWVLJQDO
3XOVHLVVKRUWHUWKDQ7 DQGLVVWUHWFKHGWR7
3XOVHLVORQJHUWKDQ7DQG LVWKXVQRWFKDQJHG
3URFHVVVLJQDO
ರSURFHVVHGರ LQSXWVLJQDO
7KHVHFRQGSXOVHRXWSXWGXULQJDFWLYH SXOVHVWUHWFKLQJLVVKLIWHGXQWLOWKH FXUUHQWVWUHWFKLQJSHULRGKDVH[SLUHG
Figure 11-1
6KRUWSXOVHVRXWSXWZLWKLQD SXOVHVWUHWFKLQJF\FOHDUH LJQRUHG
Principle of pulse stretching
Note If you set pulse stretching for an input channel, this also affects the chatter monitoring enabled for this channel. The signal with a "stretched" pulse is the input signal for chatter monitoring. Make sure, therefore, that the parameter assignment for pulse stretching and chatter monitoring correspond with one another. By selecting the appropriate values for the parameters you can adapt the functions to suit your process.
11-6
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.2 Parameter description for the digital electronic modules
11.2.5
Chatter monitoring
Definition Chatter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects and reports signal characteristics that are unusual from a process engineering viewpoint, such as the input signal fluctuating too frequently between "0" and "1". If signal characteristics like these occur, it is a sign that the sensors are faulty or that there are instabilities from a process engineering viewpoint.
Activating chatter monitoring You activate chatter monitoring by setting the number of signal changes for chatter monitoring to a value other than zero.
Detecting unusual signal patterns Each input channel has a monitoring window that has been assigned parameters. The monitoring window is started the first time the input signal changes. If the input signal changes more often within the monitoring window than the set number of signal changes, a chatter error is detected. If no chatter error is detected within the monitoring window, the monitoring window is started again at the next signal change.
Reporting a chatter error If a chatter error has occurred, the current signal status is entered in the process image and the value of the signal is set to "invalid". A chatter error is also entered as diagnostic information, triggering an incoming diagnostic interrupt. You must evaluate and process the status of the value and the diagnostic information in the user program.
Resetting a chatter error If no further chattering of the input signal is detected within three monitoring windows, the diagnostic entry is removed and an outgoing diagnostic interrupt is triggered. The status of the value of the current signal in the process image is set to "valid".
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-7
Digital Electronic Modules 11.2 Parameter description for the digital electronic modules
Principle The following figure gives you another graphic illustration of the principle of chatter monitoring. 3DUDPHWHUIRUWKHQXPEHURIVLJQDOWUDQVLWLRQV 3DUDPHWHUIRUPRQLWRULQJZLQGRZW [
[PRQLWRULQJZLQGRZW [
3URFHVV VLJQDO 'HWHFWLRQ 'LDJQRVWLFV
,QFRPLQJರIOXWWHUHUURUರ PRGXOHGLDJQRVLV PHVVDJH
Figure 11-2
11-8
0RGXOHGLDJQRVWLFV ರ)OXWWHUHUURUರJRLQJ UHVHW
The principle of chatter monitoring
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.3 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).
11.3
11.3
2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).
Order number 6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0
Features • Digital electronic module with two inputs • Rated input voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Pin assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-4
Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
70(6$DQG','&967 &+
DI: Input signal 24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
',
',
9'&
9'&
0
0
$8;HJ3(
$
$
$8;HJ3(
ZLUH
ZLUH
M: Chassis ground
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG ZLWKZLUHVDW3(
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 DI: Input signal
&+
&+ ZLUH
',
9'&
9'&
0
0
QF
ZLUH
',
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage M: Chassis ground Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
QF
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-9
Digital Electronic Modules 11.3 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0). View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
70(6DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG
DI: Input signal &+ ',
&+
ZLUH
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
ZLUH
M: Chassis ground
',
9'&
9'&
0
0
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
&+
70(6$XQG','&967
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
&+
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
/HLWHU ',
',
'&9
'&9
0
0
QF
QF
$
$
$
$
$8; $8;
11-10
/HLWHU
DI: Input signal
/HLWHU
M: Chassis ground Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
$8; $8;
$8;PXVVEHL/HLWHU DXI3(JHOHJWZHUGHQ
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.3 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV FLUFXLW
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
3
0
3
/
Figure 11-3
Block diagram of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-11
Digital Electronic Modules 11.3 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g Data for specific modules
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Unshielded
max. 600m
•
Shielded
max. 1000m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated supply voltage (from the power module) •
Reverse polarity protection
24 VDC Yes
Isolation •
between the channels
No
•
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
between the different circuits
Insulation tested with
75 VDC, 60 VAC 500 VDC
Current consumption •
From supply voltage
Power dissipation of the module
Dependent on the sensor Typ. 0.4 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Diagnostic functions
Green LED per channel No Sensor supply output
Output voltage •
with load
min. L+ (-0.5 V)
Output current •
Rated value
500 mA
•
Permitted range
0 to 500 mA Data for selecting a sensor
Input voltage •
Rated value
24 VDC
•
For signal "1"
15 to 30 V
•
For signal "0"
-30 to 5 V
Input current • At signal "1"
Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)
Input delay •
At "0" to "1"
Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
•
At "1" to "0"
Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
Input characteristic curve
To IEC 61131, Type 1
Connection of two-wire BEROs
Possible
•
11-12
Permitted bias current
Max. 1.5 mA
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)
11.4
11.4
4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)
Order number 6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0
Features • Digital electronic module with four inputs • Rated input voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-5
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3
70(6$DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3
&+ &+ ',
',
',
',
$
$
9'& $8;HJ3(
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7
&+ &+
ZLUH
DI: Input signal 24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
9'& $8;HJ3(
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4
&+ &+
&+ &+
',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
9'&
9'&
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8 ZLUH
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
DI: Input signal 24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
11-13
Digital Electronic Modules 11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7
70(6DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG
Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3 Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7
&+ &+
&+ &+ ',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
DI: Input signal
ZLUH
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6$DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4
&+ &+
&+ &+
',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
9'&
9'&
$8;HJ0
$
$
$8;HJ0
$8;HJ0
$
$
$8;HJ0
11-14
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8 ZLUH
ZLUH
DI: Input signal 24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV FLUFXLW
3 3
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
0
/
9'&RQO\ZLWK70(6
Figure 11-4
Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81× 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g Data for specific modules
Number of inputs
4
Length of cable •
Unshielded
max. 600m
•
Shielded
max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated supply voltage (from the power module) •
Reverse polarity protection
24 VDC Yes
Isolation •
between the channels
No
•
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
between the different circuits
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
75 VDC, 60 VAC
11-15
Digital Electronic Modules 11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0) Insulation tested with
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From supply voltage
Power dissipation of the module
Dependent on the sensor Typ. 0.7 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display Diagnostic functions
Green LED per channel No Sensor supply output
Output voltage •
with load
min. L+ (-0.5 V)
Output current •
Rated value
500 mA
•
Permitted range
0 to 500 mA Data for selecting a sensor
Input voltage •
Rated value
24 VDC
•
For signal "1"
15 to 30 V
•
For signal "0"
-30 to 5 V
Input current • At signal "1"
Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)
Input delay •
At "0" to "1"
Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
•
At "1" to "0"
Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
Input characteristic curve
To IEC 61131, Type 1
Connection of two-wire BEROs
Possible
•
11-16
Permitted bias current
Max. 1.5 mA
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)
11.5
4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)
11.5
Order number 6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0
Features • Digital electronic module with four inputs • Source input • Rated input voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-6
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3
70(6$DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3
&+ &+
&+ &+
',
',
',
',
0
0
$
$
$8;HJ9'&
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7 ZLUH
DI: Input signal M: Sensor supply voltage
$8;HJ9'&
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-17
Digital Electronic Modules 11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3
70(6DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4
&+ &+
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8
&+ &+
',
',
',
',
0
0
0
0
DI: Input signal
ZLUH
M: Sensor supply voltage
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3 Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7
&+ &+
&+ &+ ',
',
',
',
0
0
DI: Input signal
ZLUH
M: Sensor supply voltage
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6$DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4
&+ &+
&+ &+
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8 ZLUH
',
',
',
',
0
0
0
0
$8;HJ9'&
$
$
$8;HJ9'&
$8;HJ9'&
$
$
$8;HJ9'&
11-18
ZLUH
DI: Input signal M: Sensor supply voltage
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV FLUFXLW
3 3
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
0 /
0RQO\ZLWK70(6
Figure 11-5
Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g Data for specific modules
Number of inputs
4
Length of cable •
Unshielded
max. 600 m
•
Shielded
max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated supply voltage (from the power module) •
Reverse polarity protection
24 VDC Yes
Isolation •
between the channels
No
•
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
between the different circuits
Insulation tested with
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
75 VDC, 60 VAC 500 VDC
11-19
Digital Electronic Modules 11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0) Current consumption •
From supply voltage
Power dissipation of the module
Dependent on the sensor Typ. 0.7 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display
Green LED per channel
Diagnostic functions
No Sensor supply output
Output voltage •
With load
Max. M +0.5 V
Output current •
Rated value
•
Permitted range
500 mA 0 to 500 mA Data for selecting a sensor
Input voltage •
Rated value
24 VDC
•
For signal "1"
-15 to -30 V1
•
For signal "0"
30 to -5 V1
Input current • At signal "1"
Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)
Input delay •
At "0" to "1"
•
At "1" to "0"
Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
Input characteristic curve
To IEC 61131, Type 1
Connection of two-wire BEROs
Possible
• 1
11-20
Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
Permitted bias current
Max. 1.5 mA
Reference potential is L+
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)
11.6
2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)
11.6
Order number 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0
Features • Digital electronic module with two inputs • Rated input voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) • Supports isochronous operation
Pin assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 11-7
Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
70(6$DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG &+
&+ ZLUH
',
',
9'&
9'&
0
0
$
$
$8;HJ3(
DI: Input signal
ZLUH
ZLUH
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage M: Chassis ground
$8;HJ3( $8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG ZLWKZLUHVDW3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-21
Digital Electronic Modules 11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 DI: Input signal
&+
&+ ZLUH
9'&
9'&
0
0
QF
ZLUH
',
',
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage M: Chassis ground Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
QF
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 DI: Input signal
&+
&+ ZLUH
',
ZLUH
',
9'&
9'&
0
0
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage M: Chassis ground
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
70(6$DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH
DI: Input signal &+
&+ ZLUH
9'&
9'&
0
0
$
$
$
$
QF $8; $8;
11-22
ZLUH
ZLUH
',
',
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage M: Chassis ground Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
QF $8; $8;
$8;PXVWEH RFFXSLHGZLWKZLUHVDW3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV FLUFXLW
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
6KRUWFLUFXLW SURWHFWLRQ 3
0
3
/
Figure 11-6
3RODULW\UHYHUVDO SURWHFWLRQ
Block diagram of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
Yes
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Unshielded
•
Shielded
max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated supply voltage (from the power module) •
Reverse polarity protection
24 VDC Yes
Isolation •
between the channels
No
•
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
between the different circuits
Insulation tested with
75 VDC, 60 VAC 500 VDC
Current consumption •
From supply voltage
Power dissipation of the module
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Dependent on the sensor Typ. 0.4 W
11-23
Digital Electronic Modules 11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display
Green LED per channel
Interrupts •
Hardware interrupt
Parameters can be assigned
Diagnostic functions •
Group error
•
Diagnostic information can be displayed
Red "SF" LED Yes
Sensor supply output Output voltage •
with load
Min.. L+ (-0.5V)
Output current •
Rated value
500 mA
•
Permitted range
0 to 500 mA
Short-circuit protection
Yes, electronic1 Data for selecting a sensor
Input voltage •
Rated value
24 VDC
•
For signal "1"
11 to 30 V
•
For signal "0"
-30 to 5 V
Input current • At signal "1"
Typ. 8 mA
Input delay (parameters can be assigned) •
At "0" to "1"
0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms) 0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms) 3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms) 15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)
•
At "1" to "0"
0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms) 0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms) 3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms) 15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)
Input characteristic curve
To IEC 61131, Type 1
Connection of two-wire BEROs
Possible
• 1
11-24
Permitted bias current
max. 1.5 mA
Per module
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)
11.7
4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)
11.7
Order number 6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0
Features • Digital electronic module with four inputs • Rated input voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) • Supports isochronous operation
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 11-8
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3
70(6$DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH &+ &+
&+ &+
',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
$8;HJ0
$
$
$8;HJ0
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3 Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7
ZLUH
DI: Input signal 24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4
&+ &+
&+ &+
',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
9'&
9'&
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8 ZLUH
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
DI: Input signal 24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
11-25
Digital Electronic Modules 11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7
70(6DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3 Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7
&+ &+
&+ &+ ',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
DI: Input signal
ZLUH
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6$DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4
&+ &+
11-26
&+ &+
',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
9'&
9'&
$8;HJ0
$
$
$8;HJ0
$8;HJ0
$
$
$8;HJ0
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8 ZLUH
ZLUH
DI: Input signal 24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV FLUFXLW
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
6KRUWFLUFXLW SURWHFWLRQ
3 3
0
3RODULW\UHYHUVDO SURWHFWLRQ
/
9'&RQO\ZLWK70(6DQG70(6$
Figure 11-7
Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
Yes
Number of inputs
4
Length of cable •
Unshielded
max. 600 m
•
Shielded
max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated supply voltage (from the power module) •
Reverse polarity protection
24 VDC Yes
Isolation •
between the channels
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
No
11-27
Digital Electronic Modules 11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) •
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
between the different circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From supply voltage
Dependent on the sensor
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 0.7 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display
Green LED per channel
Interrupts •
Hardware interrupt
Parameters can be assigned
Diagnostic functions •
Group error
Red "SF" LED
•
Diagnostic information can be displayed
Yes
Sensor supply output Output voltage •
with load
Min.. L+ (-0.5V)
Output current •
Rated value
500 mA
•
Permitted range
0 to 500 mA
Short-circuit protection
Yes, electronic1 Data for selecting a sensor
Input voltage •
Rated value
24 VDC
•
For signal "1"
11 to 30 V
•
For signal "0"
-30 to 5 V
Input current • At signal "1"
Typ. 8 mA
Input delay (parameters can be assigned) •
At "0" to "1"
0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms) 0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms) 3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms) 15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)
•
At "1" to "0"
0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms) 0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms) 3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms) 15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)
Input characteristic curve
To IEC 61131, Type 1
Connection of two-wire BEROs
Possible
• 1
11-28
Permitted bias current
max. 1.5 mA
Per module
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)
11.8
4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)
11.8
Order number 6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0
Features • Digital electronic module with four inputs • Rated input voltage 24-48 VAC/VDC • Parameter assignment length: 3 bytes • Diagnostics: Wire break • Diagnostics: Fuse blown • Diagnostics: Load voltage missing • Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) • Supports isochronous operation
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 11-9
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature
View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3
70(6$DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH
&+ &+
&+ &+
',
',
',
',
9$&9'&
9$&9'&
$
$
$8;3(
ZLUH
ZLUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3 Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7 DI: Input signal VDC sensor supply PE: Chassis ground
$8;3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-29
Digital Electronic Modules 11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3
70(6DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4
&+ &+
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8
&+ &+
DI: Input signal
ZLUH
VDC sensor supply
',
',
',
',
9$&9'&
9$&9'&
9$&9'&
9$&9'&
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3 Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7
&+ &+
&+ &+
',
',
',
',
9$&9'&
9$&9'&
ZLUH
ZLUH
DI: Input signal VDC sensor supply
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6$DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH
&+ &+ ',
&+ &+ ',
',
',
9$&9'&
9$&9'&
9$&9'&
$
$
9$&9'&
$
$
$8;3( $8;3(
11-30
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4 Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8
ZLUH
ZLUH
DI: Input signal VDC sensor supply AUX: Terminals A4, A3, A8 DC/AC and A7 can be used for unused cables up to 30 VDC.
$8;3( $8;3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV
6KRUWFLUFXLW SURWHFWLRQ 3 3
0
5HYHUVH SRODULW\ SURWHFWLRQ
/
Figure 11-8
Block diagram of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D
15 × 81 × 52 (mm)
Weight
Approx. 35 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
Yes
Number of inputs
4
Length of cable •
Unshielded
Max. 600 m
•
Shielded
Max. 1000 m Voltage, currents, potentials
Rated supply voltage (from the power module) •
Horizontal installation up to 60° C
•
Vertical installation up to 40° C
•
P1
24-48 VAC/VDC
AC or DC automatically
Isolation •
Between the channels
No
•
Between channels and backplane bus
Yes
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-31
Digital Electronic Modules 11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) Permissible potential difference •
Between the different circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with
2500 VDC
Current consumption •
From the power supply L+
Dependent on the sensor
•
From the backplane bus
Max. 10 mA
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 0.7 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display
Green LEDs per channel
Diagnostic functions • Group error display
Parameters can be assigned Red LEDs (SF) Sensor power supply outputs
Output voltage •
With load
Min. L+ (-0.5 V)
Output current •
Rated value
500 mA
•
Permitted range
0 to 500 mA
Short-circuit protection
Yes (per module) Data for selecting a sensor
Input voltage • Rated value
24 to 48 VUC
•
For signal "1"
-15 VDC to -57.6 VDC 15 VDC to 57.6 VDC 15 VAC to 48 VAC
•
For signal "0"
-6 VDC to 6 VDC 0 VAC to 5 VAC
•
Frequency range
47 Hz to 63 Hz
Input current • At signal "1"
From 4 mA to 10 mA
Input delay • At "0" to "1" • At "1" to "0"
Max. 15 ms Max. 15 ms
Input characteristic curve1 Connection of two-wire BEROs •
Possible
Permitted bias current
Max. 0.5 to 2 mA2 Sensor switching
Resistance circuit of the sensor for wire break monitoring • Nominal voltage 24 V (15 V to 35 V) • Nominal voltage 48 V (30 V to 60 V)
18 kΩ 39 kΩ
IEC 61131 does not provide technical specifications for UC modules. However, the values have been adjusted to IEC 61131 as closely as possible. 1
2
11-32
Minimum load current is required in the case of wire-break monitoring.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)
11.9
11.9
4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)
Order number 6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0
Features • Digital electronic module with four inputs • 8.2 VDC sensor supply • Suitable for NAMUR sensors and both closed and open mechanical contacts
Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6 This table shows the terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors according to IEC 60947-5-6. Table 11-10 Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6 View
Pin assignment
Remarks Sensor 1:
70(6$DQG',1$085
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 Sensor 2:
&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
9V
9V
$
$
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Sensor 3: Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3
RU
',
$8;3(
([DPSOHRIDFKDQQHO FRQQHFWLRQ
Sensor 4: Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7 DI: Input signal Vs: Sensor supply voltage
$8;3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-33
Digital Electronic Modules 11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)
Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contacts or sensors to IEC 60947-5-6 This table shows the terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contacts or sensors according to IEC 60947-5-6. Table 11-11 Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contact or sensor to IEC 60947-5-6 View
Pin assignment
Changeover contact 1:
70(6DQG',1$085
&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9V
9V
9V
Changeover contact 2 terminals 2, 6 and 7 DI: Input signal
12FRQWDFW
RU
Vs: Sensor supply voltage
9V
terminals 1, 5 and 3
([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQ RIFKDQQHO
Remarks
1&FRQWDFW
Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical normally open contact) This table shows the terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical normally open contact). Table 11-12 Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical normally open contact) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Single contact 1:
70(6DQG',1$085
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 Single contact 2:
&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
9V
9V
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Single contact 3: Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3
Single contact 4: N
',
11-34
([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQRI FKDQQHO
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7 DI: Input signal
Vs: Sensor supply voltage
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)
Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical changeover contact) This table shows the terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical normally open contact). Table 11-13 Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical changeover contact) View
Pin assignment
Changeover contact 1: Terminals 1, 5 and 3
70(6DQG',1$085 &+ &+
Changeover contact 2: Terminals 2, 6 and 7
([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQRI &+ FKDQQHODQGFKDQQHO &+ N ',
',
',
',
9V
9V
9V
9V
Remarks
DI: Input signal Vs: Sensor supply voltage
Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with single contact) This table shows the terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with single contact). Table 11-14 Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with single contact) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Single contact 1:
70(6DQG',1$085
&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9V
9V
9V
9V
([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQ RIFKDQQHO
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 Single contact 2: Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Single contact 3:
Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4 Single contact 4: Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8 DI: Input signal
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Vs: Sensor supply voltage
11-35
Digital Electronic Modules 11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)
Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact) This table shows the terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact). Table 11-15 Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Changeover contact 1: terminals 1, 5 and 3
70(6$DQG',1$085
Changeover contact 2: &+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
9V
9V 9V
$8; $8;
$
$
$
$
terminals 2, 6 and 7 DI: Input signal Vs: Sensor supply voltage
',
',
9V
([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQRI FKDQQHODQGFKDQQHO
$8; $8;
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
,QSXWZLULQJ
(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
w&
,QSXWV
9 33
0XOWLSOH[HU FRPSDUDWRU
9
Figure 11-9
11-36
9V
Block diagram of the 4DI NAMUR
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g Data for specific modules
Number of inputs
4
Length of cable •
Shielded
Max. 200 m
Voltage, currents, potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously
4
•
Horizontal installation up to 60° C
4
•
All other mounting positions up to 40° C
4
Isolation •
Between the channels
No
•
Between channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between channels and load voltage
Yes
•
Between load voltage and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
Between different circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with: •
Channels against the backplane bus and load voltage
500 VDC
•
Load voltage against the backplane bus
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From load voltage L+
Dependent on the sensor
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 1.6 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display
Green LED per channel
Interrupts • •
Hardware interrupt Diagnostic interrupt
No Yes, can be set
Diagnostic functions • •
Group error display Diagnostic information can be displayed
Red "SF" LED Possible
Monitoring for • •
Short circuit Wire break
I > 7 mA* I < 0.35 mA* Data for selecting a sensor
Input current for NAMUR sensors • •
At signal "1" At signal "0"
according to NAMUR or IEC 60947-5-6 2.1 mA to 7 mA 0.35 mA to 1.2 mA
Input current for a closed contact
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-37
Digital Electronic Modules 11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0) •
At signal "1"
2.1 mA to 7 mA
•
For signal "0"
0.35 mA to 1.2 mA
Input current for an open contact •
At signal "1"
Typ. 8 mA
•
Permitted bias current
0.5 mA
Input delay •
At "0" to "1"
Max. 4.6 ms
•
At "1" to "0"
Max. 4.6 ms
Tolerated switchover time with changeover contacts
300 ms
Parallel connection of inputs
No Sensor power supply outputs
Number of outputs
1
Output voltage •
With load
Min. 8.2 V
Output current •
Rated value
45 mA
Additional (redundant) supply
Not permissible
Short-circuit protection
Yes, electronic
* Only for NAMUR sensors and closed contacts.
Value status The value status provides additional binary information on a digital input signal. The value status is entered in the process input image at the same time as the signal, and it provides information on the validity of the input signal. The value status is affected by: • Wire break check/short circuit • Flutter monitoring • Pulse extension • Validity check of changeover contact sensor types Meaning of the value status: • "1": input signal is valid • "0": Input signal is invalid
11-38
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)
Assignment in the process input image The data is transferred to the process image in two bytes (16 bits).
%\WH
,QSXWVLJQDOIRUFKDQQHO ,QSXWVLJQDOIRUFKDQQHO ,QSXWVLJQDOIRUFKDQQHO ,QSXWVLJQDOIRUFKDQQHO 9DOXHVWDWXVIRUFKDQQHO 9DOXHVWDWXVIRUFKDQQHO 9DOXHVWDWXVIRUFKDQQHO 9DOXHVWDWXVIRUFKDQQHO
%\WH
XQDVVLJQHG
0HDQLQJ 6LJQDOYDOLG 6LJQDOLQYDOLG
&KDQQHOQRWIRUHQFRGHUW\SHFKDQJHRYHUFRQWDFW
Figure 11-10 Assignment in the process input image for 4DI NAMUR
Diagnosis for changeover contact sensor types When a diagnosis is made for the changeover contact sensor type, the digital electronic module controls the switchover between two input channels. If there is no signal change in the normally closed contact after the set switchover time (see technical specifications), the module reports a diagnosis.
Purpose of changeover contact diagnostics You can use the diagnosis for the following: • A diagnosis of the sensor • To make absolutely sure that there has been a switchover between a normally open contact and normally closed contact
Principle of changeover contact diagnostics If the digital inputs of a channel group are assigned parameters as changeover contacts, the module carries out a diagnosis for changeover contact sensor types for this channel group. The tolerated switchover time between the two channels is fixed at 300 ms. If the validity check is negative, the following applies: • The module designates the value status of the normally open contact channel as invalid. • The module creates a diagnostic entry for the NO contact channel. • The module triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-39
Digital Electronic Modules 11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0) The digital input signal and the value status are only updated for the NO contact channel (channel 0 and 2). In the case of the NC contact channel (channel 1 and 3) the digital input signal is fixed at "zero" and the value status is "invalid" because this channel is only used for a validity check of the sensor. Note the following points when carrying out a diagnosis for a changeover contact sensor type: • If there is already an error on the NO contact channel (wire break, for example), the module will not carry out a diagnosis for changeover contact errors. The diagnosis for changeover contact errors continues to be carried out on the second channel. • You will find additional points to note in the following table: Table 11-16 Diagnosis for changeover contacts Changeover contact
A negative check means...
Changeover contact as NAMUR
• •
Short circuit or Wire break
Closed changeover contact
•
Defective sensor or short circuit
Additionally:
No distinction can be made here between a defective sensor and short circuit Open changeover contact
11-40
Changeover contact error or external fault (in the case of DP diagnosis)
Attention: No distinction possible between • Signal "0" and wire break • Signal "1" and short circuit
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)
11.10
2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)
11.10
Order number 6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0
Features • Digital electronic module with two inputs • Rated input voltage 120 VAC • Suitable for switches
Pin assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-17 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard View
Pin assignment
70(6$DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG
&+
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 DI: Input signal
&+ ZLUH
',
',
/
/
1
$
$
1 $8;HJ3(
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
ZLUH
ZLUH
L1: Sensor supply voltage N: Neutral conductor
$8;HJ3( $8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHGZLWK ZLUHVDW3(
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 DI: Input signal L1: Sensor supply voltage
&+
&+
N: Neutral conductor ZLUH
',
',
/
/
1
1
QF
ZLUH
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 120 VAC.
QF
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-41
Digital Electronic Modules 11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 DI: Input signal L1: Sensor supply voltage
&+
&+
N: Neutral conductor ZLUH
',
',
/
/
1
1
ZLUH
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 DI: Input signal L1: Sensor supply voltage
&+
&+ ZLUH
',
',
/
/
1
1
QF
$
$
QF $8; $8;
11-42
$
$
ZLUH
ZLUH
N: Neutral conductor Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 120 VAC.
$8; $8;
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHGZLWK ZLUHVDW3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXVFLUFXLW
1
/
3 3
Figure 11-11 Block diagram of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 31 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
No
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Unshielded
•
Shielded
Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Supply voltage (from the power module) •
Frequency
120 VAC 47 to 63 Hz
Isolation •
between the channels
No
•
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
between Minternal and the inputs
1500 VAC
Insulation tested with
2500 VDC
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 0.5 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display
Green LED per channel
Diagnostic functions
No
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-43
Digital Electronic Modules 11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0) Data for selecting a sensor Input voltage •
Rated value
120 VAC
•
For signal "1"
79 to 132 VAC
•
For signal "0"
0 to 20 VAC
Input current • At signal "1"
3 to 9 mA
Input delay •
At "0" to "1"
15 ms
•
At "1" to "0"
25 ms
Input characteristic curve
To IEC 61131, Type 1
Connection of two-wire BEROs
No
•
11-44
Permitted bias current
Max. 1 mA
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)
11.11
2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)
11.11
Order number 6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0
Features • Digital electronic module with two inputs • Rated input voltage 230 VAC • Suitable for switches
Pin assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-18 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard View
Pin assignment
70(6$DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG
&+
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 DI: Input signal
&+ ZLUH
',
',
/
/
1
$
$
1 $8;HJ3(
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
ZLUH
ZLUH
L1: Sensor supply voltage N: Neutral conductor
$8;HJ3( $8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG ZLWKZLUHVDW3(
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 DI: Input signal L1: Sensor supply voltage
&+
&+
N: Neutral conductor ZLUH
',
',
/
/
1
1
QF
QF
ZLUH
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 230 VAC.
11-45
Digital Electronic Modules 11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 DI: Input signal L1: Sensor supply voltage
&+
&+
N: Neutral conductor ZLUH
',
',
/
/
1
1
ZLUH
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 DI: Input signal L1: Sensor supply voltage
&+
&+ ZLUH
',
',
/
/
1
1
QF
$
$
QF $8; $8;
11-46
$
$
ZLUH
ZLUH
N: Neutral conductor Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 230 VAC.
$8; $8;
$8;PXVWEH RFFXSLHGZLWKZLUHVDW3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV FLUFXLW
1
/
3 3
Figure 11-12 Block diagram of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81× 52
Weight
Approx. 31 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
No
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Unshielded
•
Shielded
Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Supply voltage (from the power module) •
Frequency
230 VAC 47 to 63 Hz
Isolation •
between the channels
No
•
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
between Minternal and the inputs
1500 VAC
Insulation tested with
4000 VDC
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 0.7 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display
Green LED per channel
Diagnostic functions
No
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-47
Digital Electronic Modules 11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0) Data for selecting a sensor Input voltage •
Rated value
230 VAC
•
For signal "1"
164 to 264 VAC
•
For signal "0"
0 to 40 VAC
Input current • At signal "1"
5 to 30 mA
Input delay •
At "0" to "1"
15 ms
•
At "1" to "0"
45 ms
Input characteristic curve
To IEC 61131, Type 1
Connection of two-wire BEROs
No
•
11-48
Permitted bias current
Max. 2 mA
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)
11.12
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)
11.12
Order number 6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0
Features • Digital electronic module with two outputs • Output current 0.5 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights • Supports isochronous operation
Peculiarity When you supply the 24 VDC rated load voltage at the power module by means of a mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for approximately 50 µs. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast counters.
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-19 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
70(6$DQG'29'&R$6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)
&+ '2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
$
$
$8;HJ3(
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply
$8;HJ3( $8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG ZLWKZLUHVDW3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-49
Digital Electronic Modules 11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)
&+
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
QF
QF
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)
&+
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)
&+
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
QF
$
$
$
$
QF $8;HJ0 $8;HJ0
11-50
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
$8;HJ0 $8;HJ0
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV FLUFXLW
3 3
0 /
5HYHUVHSRODULW\ SURWHFWLRQ LQWHUQDO SRZHUVXSSO\
Figure 11-13 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-51
Digital Electronic Modules 11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
Yes
Number of outputs
2
Length of cable •
Unshielded
•
Shielded
Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
P1
24 VDC Yes1
Total current of the outputs (per module)
1A
Isolation •
between the channels
No
•
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
between the different circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From the load voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module
Max. 5 mA per channel Typ. 0.4 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display
Green LED per channel
Diagnostic functions
No Data for selecting an actuator
Output voltage •
At signal "1"
Min.. L+ (-1V)
Output current •
•
At signal "1" – Rated value – Permitted range
0.5 A 7 mA up to 0.6 A
With signal "0" (leakage current)
Max. 0.3 mA
Output delay (for resistive load) •
At "0" to "1"
Max. 200 µs
•
At "1" to "0"
Max. 1.3 ms
Load resistor range
48 Ω to 3.4 kΩ
Lamp load
Max. 5 W
Connecting two outputs in parallel •
For redundant triggering of a load
Yes (per module)
•
To increase performance
No
Control of a digital input
11-52
Yes
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0) Switch rate •
For resistive load
100 Hz
•
With inductive load
2 Hz
•
For lamp load
10 Hz
Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on circuit interruption
Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)
Reverse-voltage proof
Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the power module
Short-circuit protection of the output
Yes2
•
Threshold on
Typ. 0.7 to 1.8 A
1
Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through
2
Per channel
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-53
Digital Electronic Modules 11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)
11.13
4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)
11.13
Order number 6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0
Features • Digital electronic module with four outputs • Output current 0.5 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
Peculiarity When you supply the 24 VDC rated load voltage at the power module by means of a mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for approximately 50 µs. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast counters.
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-20 Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3
70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3
&+ &+
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7
&+ &+ ZLUH
'2 '2 0 $8;HJ3(
11-54
'2
'2 0
$
$
DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel) M: Ground load power supply
$8;HJ3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) View
Pin assignment
70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4
&+ &+
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8
&+ &+
'2
'2
'2
'2
0
0
0
0
DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3
&+ &+ '2
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7
&+ &+
'2
'2
'2
0
0
DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
&+ &+
&+ &+
'2
'2
'2
'2
0
0
0
0
$
$
$8;HJ3( $8;HJ3(
$
$
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4 Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8
ZLUH
DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel) M: Ground load power supply
$8;HJ3( $8;HJ3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-55
Digital Electronic Modules 11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV FLUFXLW
0 3 3
/
5HYHUVHSRODULW\ SURWHFWLRQDQG LQWHUQDOSRZHUVXSSO\
0RQO\ZLWK70(6
Figure 11-14 Block diagram of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
11-56
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
No
Number of outputs
4
Length of cable •
Unshielded
•
Shielded
Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
P1
24 VDC Yes1
Total current of the outputs (per module)
2A
Isolation •
between the channels
No
•
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
between the different circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From the load voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module
Max. 5 mA per channel Typ. 0.8 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display
Green LED per channel
Diagnostic functions
No Data for selecting an actuator
Output voltage •
At signal "1"
Min.. L+ (-1V)
Output current •
•
At signal "1" – Rated value – Permitted range
0.5 A 7 mA up to 0.6A
With signal "0" (leakage current)
Max. 0.3 mA
Output delay (for resistive load) •
At "0" to "1"
Max. 100 µs
•
At "1" to "0"
Max. 300 µs
Load resistor range
48 Ω to 3.4 kΩ
Lamp load
Max. 5 W
Connecting two outputs in parallel •
For redundant triggering of a load
Yes (per module)
•
To increase performance
No
Control of a digital input
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Yes
11-57
Digital Electronic Modules 11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) Switch rate •
For resistive load
100 Hz
•
With inductive load
2 Hz
•
For lamp load
10 Hz
Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on circuit interruption
Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)
Reverse-voltage proof
Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the power module2
Short-circuit protection of the output
Yes3
• 1
11-58
Threshold on
Typ. 0.7 to 1.5 A
Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through
2
The module must be supplied with voltage.
3
Per channel
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)
11.14
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)
11.14
Order number 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0
Features • Digital electronic module with two outputs • Output current 0.5 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights • Supports isochronous operation
Peculiarity When you connect the 24 VDC rated load voltage to the power module by means of a mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for approximately 50 µs. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast counters.
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 11-21 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
70(6$DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)
&+ '2
'2
9'&
9'& 0
0 $8;HJ3(
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+
$
$
ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply
$8;HJ3( $8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG ZLWKZLUHVDW3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-59
Digital Electronic Modules 11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)
&+
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
QF
QF
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)
&+
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A7 70(6$DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A3 DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)
&+
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
QF
$
$
$
$
QF $8; $8;
11-60
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
$8; $8;
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV FLUFXLW
3 3
0 /
5HYHUVHSRODULW\ SURWHFWLRQDQGLQWHUQDO SRZHUVXSSO\
Figure 11-15 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-61
Digital Electronic Modules 11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
Yes
Number of outputs
2
Length of cable •
Unshielded
•
Shielded
Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
P1
24 VDC Yes1
Total current of the outputs (per module)
1A
Isolation •
between the channels
No
•
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
between the different circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From the load voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module
Max. 5 mA per channel Typ. 0.4 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display
Green LED per channel
Diagnostic functions •
Group error
•
Diagnostic functions readable
Red "SF" LED Yes Data for selecting an actuator
Output voltage •
At signal "1"
Min. L+ (-1V)
Output current •
•
At signal "1" – Rated value – Permitted range
0.5 A 7 mA up to 0.6A
With signal "0" (leakage current)
Max. 0.3 mA
Output delay (for resistive load) •
At "0" to "1"
•
At "1" to "0"
Max. 100 µs Max. 400 µs
Load resistor range
48Ω to 3.4 kΩ
Lamp load
Max. 2.5 W
Connecting two outputs in parallel •
11-62
For redundant triggering of a load
Yes (per module)
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0) •
To increase performance
Control of a digital input
No Yes
Switch rate •
For resistive load
100 Hz
•
With inductive load
2 Hz
•
For lamp load
10 Hz
Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on circuit interruption
Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)
Reverse-voltage proof
Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the power module
Short-circuit protection of the output
Yes2
•
Threshold on
Typ. 1.5 A
1
Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through
2
Per channel
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-63
Digital Electronic Modules 11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)
11.15
2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)
11.15
Order number 6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0
Features • Digital electronic module with two outputs • Output current 2 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
Peculiarity When you supply the 24 VDC rated load voltage at the power module by means of a mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for approximately 50 µs. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast counters.
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 2 A Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-22 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
&+ '2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
$
$
$8;HJ3(
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply
$8;HJ3( $8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG ZLWKZLUHVDW3(
11-64
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
&+
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
QF
QF
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
&+
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
&+
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
QF
$
$
$
$
QF $8; $8;
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
$8; $8;
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-65
Digital Electronic Modules 11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXVFLUFXLW
3 3
0 /
5HYHUVHSRODULW\ SURWHFWLRQDQGLQWHUQDO SRZHUVXSSO\
Figure 11-16 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
11-66
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports clocked operation
No
Number of outputs
2
Length of cable •
Unshielded
•
Shielded
Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
Polarity reversal
24 VDC Yes1
Total current of the outputs (per module)
4A
Isolation •
between the channels
No
•
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
between the different circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From rated load voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module
Max. 5 mA per channel Typ. 1.4 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display
Green LED per channel
Diagnostic functions
No Data for selecting an actuator
Output voltage •
At signal "1"
Min. L+ (-1V)
Output current •
•
At signal "1" – Rated value – Permitted range
2A 7 mA to 2.4 A
With signal "0" (leakage current)
Max. 0.5 mA
Output delay (for resistive load) •
At "0" to "1"
Max. 200 µs
•
At "1" to "0"
Max. 1.3 ms
Load resistor range
12 Ω to 3.4 kΩ
Lamp load
Max. 10 W
Connecting two outputs in parallel •
For redundant triggering of a load
Yes (per module)
•
To increase performance
No
Control of a digital input
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Yes
11-67
Digital Electronic Modules 11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0) Switch rate •
For resistive load
100 Hz
•
With inductive load
2 Hz (0.5 H)
•
For lamp load
10 Hz
Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on circuit interruption
Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)
Reverse-voltage proof
Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the power module
Short-circuit protection of the output
Yes2
•
11-68
Threshold on
Typ. 2.8 to 7.2 A
1
Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through
2
Per channel
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)
11.16
4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)
11.16
Order number 6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0
Features • Digital electronic module with four outputs • Output current 2 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
Peculiarity When you connect the 24 VDC rated load voltage to the power module by means of a mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for approximately 50 µs. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast counters.
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC, 2 A Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-23 Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3
70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3 Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7
ZLUH
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel) M: Ground load power supply
$8;HJ3(
$8;HJ3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-69
Digital Electronic Modules 11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3
70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4
&+ &+
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8
&+ &+
'2
'2
'2
'2
0
0
0
0
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7
70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3 &+ &+ '2
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7
&+ &+
'2
'2
'2
0
0
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4 Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8
&+ &+ '2
'2
'2
'2
0
0
0
0
$
$
$
$
$8;HJ3( $8;HJ3(
11-70
&+ &+
ZLUH
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel) M: Ground load power supply
$8;HJ3( $8;HJ3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXVFLUFXLW
3 3
0 /
5HYHUVHSRODULW\ SURWHFWLRQDQGLQWHUQDO SRZHUVXSSO\
0RQO\ZLWK70(6
Figure 11-17 Block diagram of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-71
Digital Electronic Modules 11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports clocked operation
No
Number of outputs
4
Length of cable •
Unshielded
•
Shielded
Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
Polarity reversal
24 VDC Yes1
Total current of the outputs (per module)
4A
Isolation •
between the channels
No
•
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
between the different circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From rated load voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module
Max. 5 mA per channel Typ. 1.6 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display
Green LED per channel
Diagnostic functions
No Data for selecting an actuator
Output voltage •
At signal "1"
Min. L+ (-1V)
Output current •
•
At signal "1" – Rated value – Permitted range
2A 7 mA to 2.4 A
With signal "0" (leakage current)
Max. 0.5 mA
Output delay (for resistive load) •
At "0" to "1"
Max. 200 µs
•
At "1" to "0"
Max. 1.3 ms
Load resistor range
12 Ω to 3.4 kΩ
Lamp load
Max. 10 W
Connecting two outputs in parallel •
For redundant triggering of a load
Yes (per module)
•
To increase performance
No
Control of a digital input
11-72
Yes
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0) Switch rate •
For resistive load
100 Hz
•
With inductive load
2 Hz (0.5 H)
•
For lamp load
10 Hz
Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on circuit interruption
Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)
Reverse-voltage proof
Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the power module
Short-circuit protection of the output
Yes2
•
Threshold on
Typ. 2.8 to 7.2 A
1
Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through
2
Per channel
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-73
Digital Electronic Modules 11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)
11.17
2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)
11.17
Order number 6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0
Features • Digital electronic module with two outputs • Output current 2 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights • Supports clocked operation
Peculiarity When you connect the 24 VDC rated load voltage to the power module by means of a mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for approximately 50 µs. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast counters.
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 2 A High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 11-24 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
70(6$DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
&+ '2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
$
$
$8;HJ3(
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply
$8;HJ3( $8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG ZLWKZLUHVDW3(
11-74
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
&+
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
QF
QF
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
&+
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
&+
24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
&+ ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
QF
$
$
QF $8; $8;
$
$
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
$8; $8;
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-75
Digital Electronic Modules 11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXVFLUFXLW
0 3 3
/
5HYHUVHSRODULW\ SURWHFWLRQDQGLQWHUQDO SRZHUVXSSO\
Figure 11-18 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature
11-76
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports clocked operation
Yes
Number of outputs
2
Length of cable •
Unshielded
•
Shielded
Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
Polarity reversal
24 VDC Yes1
Total current of the outputs (per module)
4A
Isolation •
Between the channels
No
•
Between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
Between the different circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From rated load voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module
Max. 5 mA per channel Typ. 1.4 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display
Green LED per channel
Diagnostic functions •
Group error
•
Diagnostic functions readable
Red "SF" LED Yes Data for selecting an actuator
Output voltage •
At signal "1"
Min. L+ (-1V)
Output current •
•
At signal "1" – Rated value – Permitted range
2A 7 mA to 2.4 A
With signal "0" (leakage current)
Max. 0.5 mA
Output delay (for resistive load) •
At "0" to "1"
•
At "1" to "0"
Max. 100 µs Max. 400 µs
Load resistor range
12 Ω to 3.4 kΩ
Lamp load
Max. 5 W
Connecting two outputs in parallel •
For redundant triggering of a load
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Yes (per module)
11-77
Digital Electronic Modules 11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0) •
To increase performance
No
Control of a digital input
Yes
Switch rate •
For resistive load
100 Hz
•
With inductive load
2 Hz (0.5 H)
•
For lamp load
10 Hz
Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on circuit interruption
Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)
Reverse-voltage proof
Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the power module
Short-circuit protection of the output
Yes2
•
11-78
Threshold on
Typ. 4 A
1
Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through
2
Per channel
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)
11.18
11.18
Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)
Order number 6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0
Features • Digital electronic module with two outputs • Output current 2 A per output • Rated load voltage 24-48/120/230 VAC • Substitute value • Parameter assignment length: 3 bytes • Suitable for solenoid valves, AC contactors, and indicator lights
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 to 230 VAC for the different terminal modules: Table 11-25 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24-230 VAC View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6$DQG'29$&
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
&+ '2
1 $8;HJ3(
N: Neutral conductor
&+
$
$
'2
1 $8;HJ3( $8;PXVWEHDVVLJQHGWR3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-79
Digital Electronic Modules 11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
70(6DQG'29$&
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
&+ '2
1
N: Neutral conductor
&+
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 230 VAC.
'2
1
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6DQG'29$&
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
&+ '2
1
N: Neutral conductor
&+
'2
1
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6$DQG'29$&
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)
&+ '2 QF 1 QF $8; $8;
11-80
&+
N: Neutral conductor
'2
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 230 VAC.
1 QF
$
$
$
$
QF
$8; $8;
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)
Block diagram
=&
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV FLUFXLW
3 3
=&
1 /
Figure 11-19 Block diagram of the 2DO 24-230 VAC
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 37 g Data for specific modules
Supports clocked operation
No
Number of outputs
2
Length of cable •
Unshielded
Max. 600 m
•
Shielded
Max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L1 (from the power module) •
Frequency
24-230 VAC 47 to 63 Hz
Total current of the outputs (per module) •
Up to 40° C
Max. 2 A*
•
Up to 60° C
Max. 1 A*
Isolation •
Between the channels
•
Between the channels and backplane bus
Insulation tested
No Yes 2500 VDC
Current consumption •
From the backplane bus
Max. 18 mA
•
From rated load voltage L1 (no load)
Max. 15 mA per channel
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-81
Digital Electronic Modules 11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0) Power dissipation of the module
Max. 4 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display
Green LED per channel
Diagnostic functions
No Data for selecting an actuator
Output voltage •
At signal "1"
Min. L (-1.5 V)
Output current (per channel) •
•
At signal "1" – Rated value – Permitted range
2A 0.1 mA to 2.2 A
With signal "0" (leakage current)
Max. 3 mA
Output delay (for resistive load) •
At "0" to "1"
•
At "1" to "0"
Zero cross inhibit voltage
Max. 15 ms Max. 15 ms Max. 25 V
Motor starter size •
Up to 40° C
Max. size in accordance with NEMA: 5
•
Up to 60° C
Max. size in accordance with NEMA: 4
Lamp load
Max. 100 W
Connecting two outputs in parallel •
For redundant triggering of a load
•
To increase performance
Control of a digital input
Yes (per module) No Possible
Switch rate •
For resistive load
Max. 10 Hz
•
With inductive load
Max. 0.5 Hz
•
For lamp load
Max. 1 Hz
Short-circuit protection of the output
Yes, by means of fuse in the power module
* Total current of the outputs (per module), see figure below
11-82
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)
Total current of the outputs 7HPSHUDWXUH
r&
r&
r&
7RWDOFXUUHQWSHUPRGXOH $
$
$
Figure 11-20 Total current of the outputs for 2DO 24 to 230 VAC
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-83
Digital Electronic Modules 11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)
11.19
2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)
11.19
Order number 6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0
Note If you connect an extra-low voltage system (SELV/PELF) on one channel of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A, you can only use an extra-low voltage system (SELV/PELF) on the other channel. As of version 2 of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A there is no longer an internal jumper between terminals 2 and 6. If you need this jumper, you can replace it with an external jumper between terminals 3 and 7 (see block diagram below).
Features • Digital electronic module with two relay outputs • Output current 5 A per output • Rated load voltage up to 120 VDC and up to 230 VAC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights • Isolated from the supply voltage
Caution The rated supply voltage of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A is 24 VDC. The 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A can only be located in a potential group with 24 VDC (from the power module).
11-84
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A (as of version 2) for the different terminal modules: Table 11-26 Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A (as of Version 2) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6$DQG5212 9'&$9$&$
&+
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 13, 14: Normally open contact channel 0:
&+
23, 24: Normally open contact channel 1: Internal jumper between terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7
$8;HJ3(
$
$
$8;HJ3( $8;UDLOPXVWEH DVVLJQHGWR3(
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6DQG5212 9'&$9$&$
&+
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 13, 14: Normally open contact channel 0:
&+
23, 24: Normally open contact channel 1:
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires up to the load voltage used.
Internal jumper between terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7
QF
QF
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
&+
70(6DQG5212 9'&$9$&$
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
&+
23, 24: Normally open contact channel 1: Internal jumper between terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
13, 14: Normally open contact channel 0:
11-85
Digital Electronic Modules 11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6$DQG5212 9'&$9$&$
&+
23, 24: Normally open contact channel 1: Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires up to the load voltage used.
QF
$
$
$8; $8;
$
$
13, 14: Normally open contact channel 0:
&+
QF
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
Internal jumper between terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7
$8; $8;
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQH EXV FLUFXLW
3 3
0 /
3RODULW\UHYHUVDO SURWHFWLRQ
)URPSURGXFWOHYHORIWKH52129'&9$&$WKHLQWHUQDO EULGJHEHWZHHQWHUPLQDOVDQGLVQRWLQVWDOOHG,I\RXUHTXLUHWKLVEULGJHLWFDQEH UHSODFHGE\DQH[WHUQDOEULGJHEHWZHHQWHUPLQDOVDQG
Figure 11-21 Block diagram of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 230 VAC/5 A
11-86
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 50 g Data for specific modules
Supports clocked operation
No
Number of outputs
2
Length of cable •
Unshielded
•
Shielded
Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated supply voltage L+ (from the power module)
24 VDC
Reverse polarity protection Current per channel Yes •
Up to 50° C
Max. 5 A
•
Up to 60° C
Max. 4 A
Isolation •
Between the channels
Yes
•
Between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between the channels and supply voltage
Yes
•
Between the supply voltage and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
Between the supply voltage and backplane bus
75 VDC, 60 VAC
•
Between channels and backplane bus
240 VAC
•
Between the channels and supply voltage
Insulation tested
240 VAC Yes
•
Between the supply voltage and backplane bus
500 VDC
•
Between channels and backplane bus
1500 VAC
•
Between the channels and supply voltage
1500 VAC
Current consumption From the power supply L+
Max. 30 mA
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 0.6 W
•
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display
Green LED per channel
Diagnostic functions
No Data for selecting an actuator
Output current •
Continuous thermal current
Max. 5 A
•
Min. load current
8 mA
•
Min. voltage
17 V
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-87
Digital Electronic Modules 11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0) Connecting two outputs in parallel •
For redundant triggering of a load
No
•
To increase performance
No
Control of a digital input
Yes
Switch rate •
For resistive load
2 Hz
•
With inductive load
0.5 Hz
•
For lamp load
2 Hz
Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on circuit interruption
No
Short-circuit protection of the output 1
No
1
11-88
The relay outputs must be fused externally with 6A.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the table. This table shows the switching capacity and endurance of the relay contacts: Table 11-27 Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts Resistive load For resistive load
Voltage 24 VDC
For inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/ AC 15
Operating cycles (typical)
5.0 A
0.1 million
4.0 A
0.2 million
2.0 A
0.5 million
1.0 A
1.6 million
0.5 A
4 million
0.1 A
7 million
60 VDC
0.5 A
1.6 million
120 VDC
0.2 A
1.6 million
48 VAC
2.0 A
1.6 million
60 VAC
2.0 A
1.2 million
120 VAC
5.0 A
0.1 million
3.0 A
0.2 million
2.0 A
0.4 million
1.0 A
0.8 million
0.5 A
1.5 million
5.0 A
0.1 million
3.0 A
0.2 million
2.0 A
0.4 million
1.0 A
0.8 million
0.5 A
1.5 million
2.0 A
0.1 million
1.0 A
0.2 million
0.5 A
0.5 million
60 VDC
0.5 A
0.2 million
120 VDC
0.2 A
0.5 million
48 VAC
1.0 A
0.7 million
60 VAC
1.0 A
0.5 million
120 VAC
2.0 A
0.1 million
230 VAC
For inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/ AC 15
Current
24 VDC
230 VAC
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
1.0 A
0.3 million
0.5 A
1 million
0.1 A
2 million
2.0 A
0.1 million
1.0 A
0.3 million
0.5 A
1 million
11-89
Digital Electronic Modules 11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)
11.20
2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)
11.20
Features • Digital electronic module with two relay outputs • Output current 5 A per output • Substitute value • Parameter assignment length: 3 bytes • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights • Isolated from the supply voltage • Normally open contact and normally closed contact
Note If you connect an extra-low voltage system (SELV/ PELV) on one channel of the relay module, you can only use an extra-low voltage system (SELV/ PELV) on the other channel.
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A for the different terminal modules: Table 11-28 Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6$DQG52121& 9'&$9$&$
&+
&RPPRQ
12FRQWDFW
12FRQWDFW
1&FRQWDFW
1&FRQWDFW
$8;HJ3(
$
$
$8;HJ3(
1, 2: normally open contact channel 0 1, 3: normally closed contact channel 0
&+
&RPPRQ
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
5, 6: normally open contact channel 1 5, 7: normally closed contact channel 1
$8;UDLOPXVWEH DVVLJQHGWR3(
11-90
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0) View
Pin assignment 70(6DQG52121& 9'&$9$&$
&+
&+
&RPPRQ
12FRQWDFW 1&FRQWDFW
&RPPRQ
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 1, 2: normally open contact channel 0 1, 3: normally closed contact channel 0
12FRQWDFW
5, 6: normally open contact channel 1
1&FRQWDFW
5, 7: normally closed contact channel 1
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
&+ &RPPRQ
12FRQWDFW
1&FRQWDFW
70(6DQG52121& 9'&$9$&$
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
&+
1, 3: normally closed contact channel 0
&RPPRQ 12FRQWDFW
5, 6: normally open contact channel 1
1&FRQWDFW
5, 7: normally closed contact channel 1
1, 2: normally open contact channel 0
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6$DQG52121& 9'&$9$&$
&+ &RPPRQ
&+
12FRQWDFW
1&FRQWDFW
$8; $8;
&RPPRQ
$
$
$
$
1, 2: normally open contact channel 0 1, 3: normally closed contact channel 0
12FRQWDFW
5, 6: normally open contact channel 1
1&FRQWDFW
5, 7: normally closed contact channel 1
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
$8; $8;
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-91
Digital Electronic Modules 11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
3 3
0 /
3RODULW\ UHYHUVDO SURWHFWLRQ
Figure 11-22 Block diagram of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D
15 × 81 × 52 (mm)
Weight
Approx. 50 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
No
Number of outputs
2
Length of cable •
Unshielded
Max. 600 m
•
Shielded
Max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated supply voltage L+ (from the power module)
24 VDC
Reverse polarity protection Current per channel Yes •
Up to 50° C
Max. 5 A
•
Up to 60° C
Max. 4 A
Isolation
11-92
•
Between the channels
Yes
•
Between channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between the channels and supply voltage
Yes
•
Between the supply voltage and backplane bus
Yes
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0) Permissible potential difference •
Between the supply voltage and backplane bus
75 VDC, 60 VAC
•
Between channels and backplane bus
240 VAC
•
Between the channels and supply voltage
240 VAC
Insulation tested •
Between the supply voltage and backplane bus
500 VDC
•
Between channels and backplane bus
2500 VDC
•
Between the channels and supply voltage
2500 VDC
Current consumption •
From the power supply L+
Max. 30 mA
•
From the backplane bus
Max. 10 mA
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 0.6 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display
Green LEDs per channel
Diagnostic functions
No Data for selecting an actuator
Output current •
Continuous thermal current
Max. 5 A
•
Min. load current
8 mA
Connecting two outputs in parallel •
For redundant triggering of a load
•
To increase performance
Control of a digital input
No No Yes
Switch rate •
For resistive load
2 Hz
•
With inductive load
0.5 Hz
•
For lamp load
2 Hz
Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on circuit interruption
No
Short-circuit protection of the output 1
No
The relay outputs must be protected externally with a 6 A fuse. For installation in a hazardous area in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC), only remove the fuse using a suitable tool if the module is not in a potentially explosive area. 1
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-93
Digital Electronic Modules 11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the following table. The normally open and normally closed contacts of the relay vary in their length of service life. This table shows the switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts. Table 11-29 Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts Resistive load
For resistive load
Voltage
24 VDC
Operating cycles (typ.) Normally open contact
Operating cycles (typ.) Normally closed contact
5,0 A
0.1 million
0.15 million
4.0 A
0.2 million
0.175 million
2.0 A
0.45 million
0.3 million
0.5 A
1.4 million
1.1 million
0.1 A
1.5 million
1.5 million
2.0 A
0.15 million
0.11 million
1.0 A
0.3 million
0.2 million
0.5 A
0.6 million
0.6 million
0.1 A
0.8 million
0.6 million
48 VAC
2.0 A
0.45 million
0.35 million
60 VAC
2.0 A
0.45 million
0.35 million
120 VAC
5.0 A
0.1 million
0.1 million
3.0 A
0.2 million
0.2 million
2.0 A
0.4 million
0.3 million
1.0 A
0.8 million
0.6 million
0.5 A
1.5 million
1.0 million
5.0 A
0.1 million
0.1 million
3.0 A
0.2 million
0.2 million
2.0 A
0.4 million
0.3 million
1.0 A
0.8 million
0.6 million
0.5 A
1.5 million
1.0 million
48 VDC
230 VAC
11-94
Current
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Digital Electronic Modules 11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0) Resistive load
Voltage
Current
Operating cycles (typ.) Normally open contact
Operating cycles (typ.) Normally closed contact
For inductive load in 24 VDC accordance with IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/ AC15
2.0 A
0.1 million
0.1 million
1.0 A
0.2 million
0.2 million
0.5 A
0.5 million
0.5 million
48 VDC
2.0 A
0.07 million
0.05 million
1.0 A
0.15 million
0.1 million
0.5 A
0.4 million
0.25 million
48 VAC
1.0 A
0.5 million
0.3 million
60 VAC
1.0 A
0.5 million
0.3 million
120 VAC
2.0 A
0.1 million
0.1 million
1.0 A
0.3 million
0.1 million
0.5 A
0.9 million
0.6 million
0.1 A
1.5 million
1.0 million
2.0 A
0.1 million
0.1 million
1.0 A
0.5 million
0.3 million
0.5 A
0.9 million
0.6 million
0.1 A
1.0 million
1.0 million
230 VAC
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
11-95
Digital Electronic Modules 11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)
11-96
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.1
12.1
12
Introduction
Analog electronic module range The range of analog electronic modules (EM) includes modules for measuring voltages and currents. For time-critical measuring of voltage and current, you can use the HIGH SPEED modules. The HIGH FEATURE modules provide a higher resolution and greater accuracy. There are also modules available for connecting thermocouples and resistance thermometers or resistors. Modules for connecting loads/actuators to current and voltage outputs complete the range.
12.2
12.2.1
12.2
Analog value representation
Overview
Electronic modules with analog inputs You can use electronic modules with analog inputs to record, evaluate, and convert continuously changing signals to digital values that you can process further. Examples of such continuously changing signals are those that occur when measuring temperature or pressure.
Electronic modules with analog outputs The electronic modules with analog outputs allow digitized values that are input by means of a controller to be converted in an analog output module to a corresponding analog signal (current or voltage) to control actuators (setpoint input for speed controllers, temperature controllers, etc.).
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-1
Analog electronic modules 12.2 Analog value representation
Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled The rules and additions outlined below apply to the following measuring ranges: • V to 5 V, 4 mA to 20 mA • Temperature sensor Pt xxx Standard and Climatic, Ni xx Standard and Climatic, Cu 10 Standard and Climatic • Thermocouple type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, C, T The following additions and rules apply: Table 12-1 Format
Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled Parameter assignment
Measured values Decimal
S7
Explanation
Hexadecimal
•
Enable "Wire break" diagnostics (at 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1
32767
7FFFH
•
"Open circuit" diagnostic message
•
"Wire break check" enabled (in the case of TC)
32767
7FFFH
•
"Open circuit" diagnostic message
•
"Wire break" diagnostics disabled (at 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1 "Overflow/underflow" enabled
-32767
8000H
•
Measured value after leaving the underrange "Lower limit value violated" diagnostic message
"Wire break" diagnostics disabled (at 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1 "Overflow/underflow" disabled
-32767
8000H
•
Measured value after leaving the underrange
"Wire break check" disabled (in the case of TC)
---
---
•
Open input: undefined measured value
• • • •
•
Measuring range limits for detection of wire break/underrange: 1 to 5 V: for 0, 296 V 4 to 20 mA: for 1,185 mA
1
12.2.2
Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7
Analog value representation The digitized analog value for input and output values is the same in the same rated range. Analog values are represented in twos complement. The following table shows the analog value representation of the analog electronic modules. Table 12-2
Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format)
Resolution
Analog value
Bit number
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Significance of the bits
S
214
213
212
211
210
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
12-2
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.2 Analog value representation
Sign The sign (S, +/-) of the analog value is always in bit number 15: • "0" → + • "1" → –
Measured-value resolution In the table below, you will find the representation of the binary analog values and the associated decimal and hexadecimal representation of the units of the analog values. The following table shows the resolutions 11, 12, 13, and 15 bits + sign. Each analog value is entered in the accumulator with left justification. The bits marked "x" are set to "0". Table 12-3
Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format)
Resolution in bits
Units
Analog value
Decimal
Hexadecimal
High byte
Low byte
11+ sign (S)
16
10H
S0000000
001xxxx
12 + sign (S)
8
8H
S0000000
0001xxx
13 + sign (S)
4
4H
S0000000
00001xx
15 + sign (S)
1
1H
S0000000
0000001
Note This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog electronic module.
Note The following applies to temperature measurements: In the overrange and underrange, the gradient of the characteristic curve at the point where the linearized rated range is left is retained.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-3
Analog electronic modules 12.2 Analog value representation
12.2.3
Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage, current, and resistance-type sensors
Introduction The following tables contain the digitized analog values for the measuring ranges of the analog input modules. The binary representation of the analog values is always the same, so these tables only compare the measuring ranges and the units.
Measuring ranges for voltage: ± 80 mV, ± 2.5 V, ± 5 V, ± 10 V Table 12-4
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges ±80 mV, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, and ±10 V
Measuring range ± 80 mV
Measuring range ± 2.5 V
Measuring range ± 5 V
> 94,071 94,071 : 80,003 80,000 60,000 : - 60,000 - 80,000 - 80,003 : - 94,074 < - 94,074
> 2,9397 2,9397 : 2,5001 2,5 1,86 : - 1,86 - 2,50 - 2,5001 : - 2,9397 < - 2,9397
> 5,8794 5,8794 : 5,0002 5,00 3,75 : - 3,75 - 5,00 - 5,0002 : - 5,8796 < - 5,8796
Measuring range ± 10 V > 11,7589 11,7589 : 10,0004 10,00 7,50 : - 7,50 - 10,00 - 10,0004 : - 11,759 < - 11,759
Decimal
Units Hexadecimal
32767 32511 : 27649 27648 20736 : -20736 -27648 -27649 : -32512 -32768
7FFF H 7EFFH : 6C01H 6C00H 5100H : AF00H 9400H 93FFH : 8100H 8000H
Range
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange Underflow
Measuring ranges for voltage and current: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA Table 12-5
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Measuring range 1 to 5 V > 5,704 5,704 : 5,000145 5,000 4,000 : 1,000 0,999855 : 0,296 < 0,296
12-4
Measuring range 0 to 20 mA > 23,5178 23,5178 : 20,0007 20,0000 15,0000 : 0,0000 Negative values not possible
Measuring range 4 to 20 mA > 22,8142 22,8142 : 20,0005 20,0000 16,0000 : 4,0000 3,9995 . 1,1852 < 1,1852
Decimal 32767 32511 : 27649 27648 20736 : 0 -1 : -4864 -32768
Units
Hexadecimal 7FFFH 7EFFH : 6C01H 6C00H 5100H : 0H FFFFH : ED00H 8000H
Range Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange Underflow
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.2 Analog value representation
Measuring range for current: ± 20 mA Table 12-6
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range ± 20 mA
Measuring range ± 20 mA
Range
Units Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 23,5150
32767
7FFFH
23,5150
32511
7EFFH
:
:
:
20,0007
27649
6C01H
20,0000
27648
6C00H
14,9980
20736
5100H
:
:
:
- 14,9980
-20736
AF00H
- 20,0000
-27648
9400H
- 20,0007
-27649
93FFH
:
:
:
- 23,5160
-32512
8100H
< - 23,5160
-32768
8000H
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange Underflow
Measuring ranges for resistance-type sensors: 150 Ω, 300 Ω, 600 Ω, 3000 Ω Table 12-7
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 150 Ω, 300 Ω, 600 Ω, 3000 Ω
Measuring range 150 Ω
Measuring range 300 Ω
Measuring range 600 Ω
Measuring range 3000 Ω
Range
Decimal
> 176.38
> 352,77
> 705,53
> 3527,67
32767
7FFFH
176,38
352,77
705,53
3527,67
32511
7EFFH
Units Hexadecimal
:
:
:
:
:
:
150,005
300,01
600,02
3000,11
27649
6C01H
150,00
300,00
600,00
3000,00
27648
6C00H
112,50
225,00
450,00
2250,00
20736
5100H
:
:
:
:
:
:
0,00
0,00
0,00
0,00
(Negative values not physically possible)
0
0H
-1
FFFFH
:
:
-4864
ED00H
-32768
8000H
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange* Underflow*
* If the resistors are connected incorrectly
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-5
Analog electronic modules 12.2 Analog value representation
12.2.4
Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for resistance thermometer
Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Standard Table 12-8
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in °C and °F
Pt x00 Standard in °C (1 digit = 0.1°C)
Pt x00 Standard in °F (1 digit = 0.1 °F)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 1000,0
32767
7FFFH
> 1832,0
32767
7FFFH
1000,0 :
10000
2710H
1832,0
18320
4790H
:
:
:
:
:
850,1
8501
2135H
1562,1
15621
3D05H
850,0
8500
2134H
1562,0
15620
3D04H
Units
Range
Units
:
:
:
:
:
:
-200,0
-2000
F830H
-328,0
-3280
F330H
-200,1
-2001
F82FH
-328,1
-3281
F32FH
:
:
:
:
:
:
-243,0
-2430
F682H
-405,4
-4054
F02AH
< - 243,0
-32768
8000H
< - 405,4
-32768
8000H
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange Underflow
Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Climatic Table 12-9
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in °C and °F
Pt x00 Climatic in °C (1 digit = 0.01°C)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 155,00
32767
155,00 :
12-6
Pt x00 Climatic in °F (1 digit = 0.01 °F)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
7FFFH
> 311,00
32767
7FFFH
15500
3C8CH
311,00
31100
797CH
:
:
:
:
:
130,01
13001
32C9H
266,01
26601
67E9H
130,00
13000
32C8H
266,00
26600
67E8H
Units
Range
Units
:
:
:
:
:
:
-120,00
-12000
D120H
-184,00
-18400
B820H
-120,01
-12001
D11FH
-184,01
-18401
B81FH
:
:
:
:
:
:
-145,00
-14500
C75CH
-229,00
-22900
A68CH
< - 145,00
-32768
8000H
< - 229,00
-32768
8000H
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange Underflow
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.2 Analog value representation
Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Standard Table 12-10 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in °C and °F Ni x00 Standard in °C (1 digit = 0.1°C)
Ni x00 Standard in °F (1 digit = 0.1 °F)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 295,0
32767
7FFFH
> 563,0
32767
7FFFH
295,0 :
2950
B86H
563,0
5630
15FEH
:
:
:
:
:
250,1
2501
9C5H
482,1
4821
12D5H
250,0
2500
9C4H
482,0
4820
12D4H
Units
Range
Units
:
:
:
:
:
:
-60,0
-600
FDA8H
-76,0
-760
FD08H
-60,1
-601
FDA7H
-76,1
-761
FD07H
:
:
:
:
:
:
-105,0
-1050
FBE6H
-157,0
-1570
F9DEH
< -105,0
-32768
8000H
< -157,0
-32768
8000H
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange Underflow
Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Climatic Table 12-11 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in °C and °F Ni x00 Climatic in °C (1 digit = 0,01°C)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Ni x00 Climatic in °F (1 digit = 0.01 °F)
Decimal
Hexa decimal
> 295,00
32767
7FFFH
> 325,11
32767
7FFFH
295,00 :
29500
733CH
327,66
32766
7FFEH
:
:
:
:
:
250,01
25001
61A9H
280,01
28001
6D61H
250,00
25000
61A8H
280,00
28000
6D60H
Units
Range
Units
:
:
:
:
:
:
-60,00
-6000
E890H
-76,00
-7600
E250H
-60,01
-6001
E88FH
-76,01
-7601
E24FH
:
:
:
:
:
:
-105,00
-10500
D6FCH
-157,00
-15700
C2ACH
< - 105,00
-32768
8000H
< - 157,00
-32768
8000H
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange Underflow
12-7
Analog electronic modules 12.2 Analog value representation
Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Standard Table 12-12 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Standard in °C und °F Cu 10 Standard in °C (1 digit = 0.1°C)
Cu 10 Standard in °F (1 digit = 0.1 °F)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 312,0
32767
7FFFH
> 593,6
32767
7FFFH
312,0 :
3120
C30H
593,6
5936
1730H
:
:
:
:
:
260,1
2601
A29H
500,1
5001
12D5H
260,0
2600
A28H
500,0
5000
1389H
Units
Range
Units
:
:
:
:
:
:
-200,0
-2000
F830H
-328,0
-3280
F330H
-200,1
-2001
F82FH
-328,1
-3281
F32FH
:
:
:
:
:
:
-240,0
-2400
F6A0H
-400,0
-4000
F060H
< - 240,0
-32768
8000H
< - 400,0
-32768
8000H
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange Underflow
Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Climatic Table 12-13 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Climatic in °C und °F Cu 10 Climatic in °C (1 digit = 0.01°C)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 180,00
32767
180,00
18000
12-8
Cu 10 Climatic in °F (1 digit = 0.01° F)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
7FFFH
> 325,11
32767
7FFFH
4650H
327,66
32766
7FFEH
Units
Range
Units
:
:
:
:
:
:
150,01
15001
3A99H
280,01
28001
6D61AH
150,00
15000
3A98H
280,00
28000
6D60H
:
:
:
:
:
:
-50,00
-5000
EC78H
-58,00
-5800
E958H
-50,01
-5001
EC77H
-58,01
-5801
E957H
:
:
:
:
:
:
-60,00
-6000
E890H
-76,00
-7600
E250H
< - 60,00
-32768
8000H
< - 76,00
-32768
8000H
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange Underflow
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.2 Analog value representation
12.2.5
Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for thermocouples
Measuring range for thermocouple: Type B Table 12-14 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type B in °C and °F Type B in °C
Type B in °F
Units Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 2070,0
32767
7FFFH
2070,0
20700
:
:
1820,1 1820,0
Range
Units Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 3276,6
32767
7FFFH
50DCH
3276,6
32766
7FFEH
:
:
:
:
18201
4719H
2786,6
27866
6CDAH
18200
4718H
2786,5
27865
6CD9H
:
:
:
:
:
:
0,0
0
0000H
32
320
0140H
-0,1
-1
FFFFH
31,9
319
013FH
:
:
:
:
:
:
-120,0
-1200
FB50H
-184,0
-1840
F8D0H
< -120,0
-32768
8000H
< -184,0
-32768
8000H
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple: Type C Table 12-15 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type C in °C and °F Type C in °C
Type C in °F
Units Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 2500,0
32767
7FFFH
2500,0
25000
:
:
2315,1
23151
5A6FH
2315,0
23150
5A6EH
Range
Units Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 3276,6
32767
7FFFH
61A8H
3276,6
32766
7FFEH
:
:
:
:
2786,6
27866
6CDAH
2786,5
27865
6CD9H
:
:
:
:
:
:
0,0
0
0000H
32,0
320
0140H
0,1
-1
FFFFH
31,9
319
013FH
:
:
:
:
:
:
-120,0
-1200
FB50H
-184,0
-1840
F8D0H
< -120,0
-32768
8000H
< -184,0
-32768
8000H
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange Underflow
12-9
Analog electronic modules 12.2 Analog value representation
Measuring range for thermocouple type E Table 12-16 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type E in °C and °F Type E in °C
> 1200,0 1200,0 : 1000,1 1000,0 : -270,0 < -270,0
Decimal 32767 12000 : 10001 10000 : -2700 - 32768
Units
Hexadecimal 7FFFH 2EE0H : 2711H 2710H : F574H 8000H
Type E in °F
> 2192,0 2192,0 : 1832,1 1832,0 : -454,0 < -454,0
Units Decimal Hexadecimal 32767 7FFFH 21920 55A0H : : 18321 4791H 18320 4790H : : -4540 EE44H - 32768 8000H
Range
Overflow Overrange
Rated range Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple type J Table 12-17 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type J in °C and °F Type J in °C
> 1450,0 1450,0 : 1200,1 1200,0 : -210,0 < -210,0
Decimal 32767 14500 : 12010 12000 : -2100 - 32768
Units
Hexadecimal 7FFFH 38A4H : 2EEAH 2EE0H : F7CCH 8000H
Type J in °F
> 2642,0 2642,0 : 2192,1 2192,0 : -346,0 < -346,0
Units Decimal Hexadecimal 32767 7FFFH 26420 6734H : : 21921 55A1H 21920 55A0H : : -3460 F27CH - 32768 8000H
Range
Overflow Overrange
Rated range Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple type K Table 12-18 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type K in °C and °F Type K in °C
> 1622,0 1622,0 : 1372,1 1372,0 : -270,0 < -270,0
12-10
Decimal 32767 16220 : 13721 13720 : -2700 - 32768
Units Hexa-decim al 7FFFH 3F5CH : 3599H 3589H : F574H 8000H
Type K in °F
> 2951,6 2951,6 : 2501,7 2501,6 : -454,0 < -454,0
Units Decimal Hexa-deci mal 32767 7FFFH 29516 734CH : : 25062 61B9H 61B8H 25061 : : -4540 EE44H - 32768 8000H
Range
Overflow Overrange
Rated range Underflow
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.2 Analog value representation
Measuring range for thermocouple type L Table 12-19 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type L in °C and °F Type L in °C
> 1150,0 1150,0 : 900,1 900,0 : -200,0 < -200,0
Decimal 32767 11500 : 9001 9000 : -2000 -32768
Type L in °F
Units
Hexadecimal 7FFFH 2CECH : 2329H 2328H : F830H 8000H
> 2102,0 2102,0 : 1652,1 1652,0 : -328,0 < -328,0
Units Decimal Hexadecimal 32767 7FFFH 21020 521CH : : 16521 4089H 16520 4088H : : -3280 F330H -32768 8000H
Range
Overflow Overrange
Rated range Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple type N Table 12-20 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type N in °C and °F Type N in °C
> 1550,0 1550,0 : 1300,1 1300,0 : -270,0 < -270,0
Decimal 32767 15500 : 13001 13000 : -2700 -32768
Type N in °F
Units
Hexadecimal 7FFFH 3C8CH : 32C9H 32C8H : F574H 8000H
> 2822,0 2822,0 : 2372,1 2372,0 : -454,0 < -454,0
Units Decimal Hexadecimal 32767 7FFFH 28220 6E3CH : : 23721 5CA9H 23720 5CA8H : : -4540 EE44H -32768 8000H
Range
Overflow Overrange
Rated range Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple types R, S Table 12-21 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type R, S in °C and °F Types R, S in °C
> 2019,0 2019,0 : 1769,1 1769,0 : -50,0 -50,1 : -170,0 < -170,0
Decimal 32767 20190 : 17691 17690 : -500 -510 : -1700 -32768
Units
Hexadecimal 7FFFH 4EDEH : 451BH 451AH : FE0CH FE0BH : F95CH 8000H
Types R, S in °F
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
> 3276,6 3276,6 : 3216,3 3216,2 : -58,0 -58,1 : -274,0 < -274,0
Units Decimal Hexadecimal 32767 7FFFH 32766 7FFEH : : 32163 7DA3H 7DA2H 32162 : : -580 FDBCH -581 FDBBH : : -2740 F54CH -32768 8000H
Range
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange Underflow
12-11
Analog electronic modules 12.2 Analog value representation
Measuring range for thermocouple type T Table 12-22 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type T in °C and °F Type T in °C
Type T in °F
Units Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 540,0
32767
7FFFH
540,0
5400
:
:
400,1
4001
0FA1H
400,0
4000
0FA0H
Range
Units Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 1004,0
32767
7FFFH
1518H
1004,0
10040
2738H
:
:
:
:
752,1
7521
1DC1H
752,0
7520
1D60H
:
:
:
:
:
:
-270,0
-2700
F574H
-454,0
-4540
EE44H
< -270,0
-32768
8000H
< -454,0
-32768
8000H
12.2.6
Overflow Overrange
Rated range Underflow
Output ranges of the analog output modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage and current
Output modules for voltage and current: ± 5V; ± 10V; ± 20mA Table 12-23 SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges ± 5 V; ± 10 V; ± 20 mA Output range ± 5 V
12-12
Output range ± 10 V
Output range ± 20 mA
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Range
Units
0
0
0
> 32511
> 7EFFH
5,8800
11,7589
23,5150
32511
7EFFH
:
:
:
:
:
5,0002
10,0004
20,0007
27649
6C01H
5,0000
10,0000
20,0000
27648
6C00H
3,7500
7,5000
14,9980
20736
5100H
:
:
:
:
:
- 3,7500
- 7,5000
- 14,9980
-20736
AF00H
- 5,0000
- 10,0000
- 20,0000
-27648
9400H
- 5,0002
- 10,0004
- 20,0007
-27649
93FFH
:
:
:
:
:
- 5,8800
- 11,7589
- 23,5160
-32512
8100H
0
0
< - 23,5160
< -32512
< 8100H
Overflow Overrange Rated range
Underrange Underflow
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing
Output modules for voltage and current: 1 to 5 V; 4 to 20 mA Table 12-24 SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 1 to 5V; 4 to 20mA
12.3
12.3.1
12.3
Output range Up to 5 V
Output range Up to 20 mA
Range
Decimal
Hexadecimal
0
0
> 32511
> 7EFFH
5,7000
22,8100
32511
7EFFH
:
:
:
:
5,0002
20,0005
27649
6C01H
5,0000
20,0000
27648
6C00H
Units
:
:
:
:
1,0000
4,0000
0
0H
0,9998
3,9995
-1
FFFFH
:
:
:
:
0
0
-6912
E500H
0
0
< -6913
< E4FFH
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange Underflow
Fundamentals of analog value processing
Connecting measuring sensors
Introduction You can connect different measuring sensors to the analog input modules, depending on the type of module involved: • Voltage sensor • Current sensors as: – 2-wire measuring transducer – 4-wire measuring transducer • Resistance-type sensor In this chapter you will find out how to connect the measuring sensors and what to watch for when doing so.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-13
Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing
Lines for analog signals You should use shielded and twisted-pair lines for the analog signals. This reduces the effect of interference. You should ground the shield of the analog lines at both ends of the line. If there are differences in potential between the ends of the line, a compensating current flows via the shield that can interfere with the analog signals. If this is the case, you should only ground the shield at one end of the line.
Analog input modules In the case of the analog input modules there is electrical isolation: • Between the logic circuitry and backplane bus • Between the load voltage and the channels. The following differences exist: – No isolation: Link between MANA and central grounding point – Isolation: No link between MANA and the central grounding point (UISO)
Analog output modules In the case of the analog output modules there is generally electrical isolation: • Between the logic circuitry and backplane bus • Between the load voltage and MANA.
Note Ensure that this potential difference UISO does not exceed the permitted value. If there is a possibility of exceeding the permitted value, make a connection between terminal MANA and the central grounding point.
Connecting measuring sensors to analog inputs Between the measuring lines M- of the input channels and the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA there can be only a limited potential difference UCM (common-mode voltage). To ensure that the permitted value is not exceeded, you must take different steps depending on the whether the sensors are isolated or non-isolated. The steps you have to take are described in this chapter. Generally speaking, however, when connecting two-wire measuring transducers for current measurement and when connecting resistance-type sensors, you should not make a connection from M- to MANA. This also applies to inputs that have been assigned parameters correspondingly but unused.
Note For the analog input modules 2AI U, 2AI RTD, and 2AI TC, you must short-circuit unused analog inputs.
12-14
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing
Abbreviations used The meanings of the abbreviations in the figures below are as follows: M+
Measuring line (positive)
M-
Measuring line (negative)
MANA
Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M
Frame connection
L+
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
UCM
Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of the measuring circuit MANA
UISO
Potential difference between MANA and central grounding point
Isolated measuring sensors The isolated measuring sensors are not connected to the local ground potential. They can be floating. Depending on local conditions or interference, potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) can occur between the measuring lines M- of the input channels and the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA. To ensure that the permitted value for UCM is not exceeded in environments with strong EMC interference, the following applies: • In the case of the analog input modules 2AI U, 2AI I 4WIRE, and 2AI TC: Connect Mwith MANA! • When connecting two-wire measuring transducers for current measurement and when connecting resistance-type sensors, you must not connect M- to MANA.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-15
Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing The following figure illustrates the connection of isolated measuring sensors to the floating analog input modules. Connection of isolated measuring sensors to a floating analog input module: / 0 0 0 0 0
6
8&0
1 $'8
2
0$1$
5 8,62
3
4
①
Logic
②
Backplane bus
③
Ground bus
④
Central grounding point
⑤
Recommended connection
⑥
Isolated measuring sensors
Non-isolated measuring sensors The non-isolated measuring sensors are connected to the local ground potential. You must connect MANA to the ground potential. Depending on local conditions or interference, potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed measuring points. If the permitted value for UCM is exceeded, there must be equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points. The following figure illustrates the connection of non-isolated measuring sensors to a floating analog input module.
12-16
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing Connection of non-isolated measuring sensors to a floating analog input module: / 0 0 0
5
0 0 8&0
1 $'8
2
0$1$
4 8,62
3
①
Logic
②
Backplane bus
③
Ground bus
④
Equipotential bonding conductor
⑤
Non-isolated measuring sensors
Operating four-wire measuring transducers on an external voltage supply If there is isolation between the output and the supply of the measuring transducer, you can connect it to the 2AI I 4WIRE without additional connections. If there is no isolation between the output and the supply of the measuring transducer, you can connect it to the 2AI I 4WIRE only if the reference potential of the power supply voltages (24 VDC) is the same. If there is an increase in interference radiation, a connection between M- and MANA on the terminal module of the 2AI I 4WIRE is recommended.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-17
Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing
12.3.2
Connecting thermocouples
Introduction This section contains additional information on connecting thermocouples.
Compensation of the reference junction temperature There are various ways of obtaining the reference junction temperature in order to get an absolute temperature value from the temperature difference between the reference junction and the measuring point. Table 12-25 Compensation of the reference junction temperature Option
Explanation
Reference junction parameters
No compensation
You record not only the temperature of the measurement point. The temperature of the reference junction (transition from Cu line to thermocouple line) also affects the thermo-electromotive force. The measured value is thus errored.
None
Use of a compensating box on the incoming lines of a single thermocouple
You compensate using a compensating box. The compensating box is the transition point from the Cu line to the thermocouple line. No further processing is necessary through the 2AI TC Standard.
None
Use of a Pt100 Climatic Range resistance thermometer to record the reference junction temperature (best method)
You can record the reference junction temperature using a resistance thermometer (Pt100 Climatic Range). Given appropriate parameter assignment, this temperature value in the ET 200S is distributed to the 2AI TC Standard modules and calculated in the modules together with the temperature value obtained for the measurement point.
The parameter assignment of the IM151-1 and the 2AI TC must be coordinated: • AI RTD Standard assigned parameters to the Pt100 climatic range at the correct slot; • AI TC ST: Reference junction : RTD; select reference junction number 1 • IM : Assignment of the reference junction to a slot with the 2AI RTD Standard; selection of a channel;
Number of reference junctions: 1 1 Internal compensation in the case of the 2AI TC High Feature
There is a temperature sensor in the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules. The temperature sensor reports the temperature of the terminals to the 2AI TC High Feature. This value is then calculated together with the measured value from the channel of the electronic module.
•
AI TC High Feature: Reference junction: yes
Extension to a reference junction The thermocouples can be extended from their connection point by means of equalizing lines to the reference junction (transition to Cu line) or the compensating box. The reference junction can also be an ET 200S terminal module. The equalization lines are made of the same material as the wires of the thermocouple. The incoming lines are made of copper. Ensure correct polarity when connecting.
12-18
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing
Use of a compensating box The influence of the temperature on the reference junction of a thermocouple (for example, terminal boxes) can be adjusted with a compensating box. The compensating box contains a bridge circuit that is adjusted for a certain reference junction temperature (compensating temperature). You connect the thermocouples or their adjustment lines to the compensating box. The compensating box then forms the reference junction. If the actual reference temperature differs from the compensating temperature, the temperature-dependent bridge resistance changes. A positive or negative compensation voltage occurs that is added to the thermo-electromotive force. Compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0° C must be used for the compensation of the analog input modules. Please note: • The compensating box must be supplied on an isolated basis. • The power supply unit must have adequate interference filtering (by means of a grounded shielding winding, for example).
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-19
Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing
Compensation by means of a resistance thermometer at the 2AI RTD If thermocouples that are connected to the inputs of the 2AI TC have the same reference junction, compensate by means of a 2AI RTD. For both channels of the 2AI TC module, you can select "RTD" or "None" as the reference junction. If you select "RTD," the same reference junction (RTD channel) is always used for both channels. $,57'
$,7&
$EEUHYLDWLRQVXVHG 00HDVXULQJFDEOHSRVLWLYH 00HDVXULQJFDEOHQHJDWLYH ,&&RQVWDQWFXUUHQWFDEOHSRVLWLYH ,&&RQVWDQWFXUUHQWFDEOHQHJDWLYH
$,57'FRQILJXUHGIRU PHDVXULQJUDQJH3WFOLPDWH UDQJH
0 ,QVXODWHG WKHUPRFRXSOHVZLWK H[WHUQDOFRPSHQVDWLRQ E\PHDQVRIUHVLVWLYH WKHUPRPHWHU FRQQHFWHGWR$,57' FKDQQHO
Figure 12-1
12-20
0
0 0
,& ,&
Compensation by means of the 2AI RTD
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing
Parameter assignment of the reference junction for the 2AI TC and the interface module You set the reference junctions for the 2AI TC electronic modules by means of the following parameters: Table 12-26 Reference junction parameters Parameters
Module
Reference junction slot
Value range
IM 151
Explanation This parameter allows you to assign a slot (none, 2 to 12 or 2 to 63) where the channel for measuring the reference temperature is located (calculation of the compensation value).
None, 2 to 12 (IM151-1 BASIC) None, 2 to 63 (IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE IM 151-1 STANDARD IM 151-1FO STANDARD)
Reference junction input
IM 151
RTD at channel 0
This parameter allows you to set the channel (0/1) for measuring the reference temperature (calculation of the compensation value) for the assigned slot.
RTD at channel 1
Reference junction E0 and reference junction E1
AI TC
None, RTD
This parameter allows you to enable the use of the reference junction.
Reference junction number
AI TC
1
This parameter allows you to assign the reference junction (1) that contains the reference temperature (compensation value).
Example of assigning parameters of reference junctions Setup: For simplification, only RTD and TC modules are shown in the following figure: 5HIHUHQFH MXQFWLRQ 6ORW
$,7&
(
(
$,7&
(
(
(
(
(
(
$,7&
$,57'
&RPSHQVDWLRQYLD$,57'PRGXOHV
Figure 12-2
Example of assigning parameters of reference junctions
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-21
Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing Relevant parameters to be set for the interface module: Parameters
Value
Reference junction slot
3
Reference junction input
RTD at channel 0
(Relevant) parameters for 2AI RTD and 2AI TC: Slot
Parameters
Value
3 (2AI RTD)
Type/range of measurement E0
RTD-4L Pt100 Climatic
5 (2AI TC)
Reference junction E0
RTD
Reference junction E1
None
Reference junction number
1
Type/range of measurement E0
TC-EL Type...
Type/range of measurement E1
(any)
Reference junction E0
RTD
Reference junction E1
RTD
Reference junction number
1
Type/range of measurement E0
TC-EL Type...
8 (2AI TC)
11 (2AI TC)
Type/range of measurement E1
TC-EL Type...
Reference junction E0
None
Reference junction E1
RTD
Reference junction number
1
Type/range of measurement E0
(any)
Type/range of measurement E1
TC-EL Type...
Non-isolated thermocouples When you use non-isolated thermocouples, you must comply with the permitted common-mode voltage.
12-22
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing
12.3.3
Connecting unused channels of analog input modules
Rules Note the following when connecting unused channels: • Deactivate unused input channels during parameter assignment. • A deactivated channel always returns a value of 7FFFH. • In the case of the standard modules 2AI U, 2AI I 2WIRE, 2AI I 4WIRE, 2AI RTD Standard, 2AI RTD High Feature, 2AI TC Standard, and 2AI TC High Feature, the cycle time of the module is halved. • The cycle time remains unchanged for the 4AI I 2WIRE standard module. • In the case of the HIGH SPEED modules 2AI U, 2AI I 2WIRE, and 2AI I 4WIRE, the cycle time remains unchanged at 1 ms. • To adhere to the permissible potential differences (UCM), you must wire jumpers on the terminal module for the unused channels. This is necessary in the case of the following modules: Analog input module
TM terminal Channel 0 1
2
3
Channel 1 4
5
6
7
8
2AI U Standard
2AI RTD Standard, 2AI RTD High Feature, 2AI TC High Feature 2AI TC Standard
2AI U High Speed
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-23
Analog electronic modules 12.4 Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems
12.4
12.4.1
Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems
12.4
Influence of supply voltage and operating state on analog input and output values
Principle The input and output values of the analog modules are dependent on the supply voltage for electronic components/sensors and on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master). Table 12-27 How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) and the supply voltage L + Operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) Power on
Power on
Power off
12-24
RUN
STOP
-
Input value of the electronic module with analog inputs (evaluation possible in the CPU of the DP master)
Supply voltage L + to ET 200S (power module) L + applied
Output value of the electronic module with analog outputs
Process values
PLC values
7FFFH until the first conversion after switching on or after assigning parameters to the module
Until the first value output: • After switching on, a signal of 0 mA or 0 V is output • Dependent on the "Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP" parameter
L + not applied
7FFFH
-
L + applied
Process value
Dependent on the "Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP" parameter
L + not applied
7FFFH
-
L + applied
-
Dependent on the "Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP" parameter
L + not applied
-
-
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.4 Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems
12.4.2
Effect of the value range for the analog input
Principle The behavior of the electronic modules with analog inputs depends on where the input values are in the value range. Table 12-28 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog input value in the value range Measured value in
Input value in SIMATIC S7 format
Input value in SIMATIC S5 format
Rated range
Measured value
Measured value
Overrange/underrange
Measured value
Measured value
Overflow
7FFFH
End of the overrange +1 plus overflow bit
Underflow
8000H
End of the underrange -1 plus overflow bit
Before assigning parameters or in the case of incorrect parameter assignment1
7FFFH
7FFFH
1 The following applies to 2AI U Standard, 2AI I 2WIRE Standard, 2AI I 4WIRE Standard, 2AI RTD Standard, and 2AI TC Standard with product version 1: If you assign a parameter incorrectly and trigger the diagnostic message for a parameter assignment error (for example, wire break for measuring range ± 20 mA), the SF LED lights up on the module and you can evaluate the diagnostics. In this state, correct input values are delivered to the DP master.
12.4.3
Effect of the value range for the analog output
Principle The behavior of the electronic modules with analog outputs depends on where the output values are in the value range. The following table indicates this: Table 12-29 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog output value in the value range Output value in
Output value in SIMATIC S5/S7 format
Rated range
Value from DP master
Overrange/underrange
Value from DP master
Overflow
0 signal
Underflow
0 signal
Before assigning parameters or in the case of incorrect parameter assignment1
0 signal
The following applies to 2AO U Standard, 2AO I Standard with product version 1: If the assigned substitute value is outside the nominal range, a diagnostic message for parameter error is entered and the SF LED lights up. In this state, the output values transmitted by the DP master are output at the analog output modules. 1
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-25
Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules
12.4.4
Use of the shield connection
Rules
12.5 12.5.1
To avoid interference with analog electronic modules, we recommend the following: • Use shielded cables for the sensors/actuators. • Apply the cable shields on the shield connection element. • Connect the shield connection to the ground bus.
12.5
Parameters for analog electronic modules
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U ST, 2AI I 2WIRE ST, 4AI I 2WIRE ST, and 2AI I 4WIRE ST
Overview Table 12-30 Parameters for analog input modules U, I Standard 2AI U Standard
2AI I 2WIRE 2AI I 4WIRE Standard Standard 4AI I 2WIRE Standard Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error, internal error) Diagnostics: Diagnostics/ underflow Diagnostics: wire break2 Smoothing
Diagnostics: wire break
Type/range of measurement
---
---
---
Type/range of measurement ---
---
---
1 2
Diagnostics: wire break1
Type/range of measurement
Value range
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable None Weak Medium Strong Deactivated ± 5V Up to 5 V ± 10V Deactivated 2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA Deactivated 4 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA 4 WIRE: ±20 mA
Default setting
Applicability
Disable
Module
Disable
Module
Disable
Channel
None
Channel
± 10V
Channel
2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA
Channel
2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA
Channel
Only in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA Only in the measuring range 1 to 5 V
See also Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)
12-26
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules
12.5.2
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U HF and 2AI I 2/4WIRE HF
Overview Table 12-31 Parameters for analog electronic modules U, I High Feature 2AI U High Feature
2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error, internal error)
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
Diagnostics: Diagnostics/ underflow
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
---
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Channel
• • • •
None Weak Medium Strong
None
Channel
Diagnostics: Wire break1
Smoothing
Type/range of measurement
---
• • • •
Deactivated ± 5V 1 to 5 V ± 10V
± 10V
Channel
---
Type/range of measurement
• • •
Deactivated 4 to 20 mA ± 20mA
4 to 20 mA
Channel
Interference frequency suppression
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
Run-time calibration
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
1
Only in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA
See also Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-27
Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules
12.5.3
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, and 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed
Parameters Table 12-32 Parameters for analog input modules U, I High Speed 2AI U High Speed
2AI I 2WIRE High Speed
2AI I 4WIRE High Speed
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error, internal error)
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
Diagnostics: Diagnostics/ underflow
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Channel
• • • •
None Weak Medium Strong
None
Channel
---
Diagnostics: Wire break
Diagnostics: Wire break
Smoothing
Type/range of measurement
---
---
• • • • •
Deactivated ±10 V ±5 V ±2,5 V Up to 5 V
± 10V
Channel
---
Type/range of measurement
---
• • •
Deactivated 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Channel
---
---
Type/range of measurement
• • • •
Deactivated 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA ± 20mA
4 to 20 mA
Channel
Note If you deactivate a channel of the HIGH SPEED module, you do not achieve any speed advantage on account of the measuring procedure used.
See also Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)
12-28
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules
12.5.4
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI RTD ST, 2AI TC ST, and 2AI TC HF
Parameters Table 12-33 Parameters for analog input modules RTD, TC 2AI RTD Standard
2AI TC Standard
2AI TC High Feature
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error, internal error)
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
Diagnostics: Diagnostics/ underflow
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
Diagnostics: Wire break2
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Channel
• • • •
None Weak Medium Strong
None
Channel
• •
Celsius Fahrenheit
Celsius
Module
• •
None RTD
None
Channel
• •
None Yes (i.e. internal)
None
Channel
• •
None 1 to 8 (in the case of the IM151-1 STANDARD and IM151-1 FO STANDARD) 1 (in the case of the IM151-1 BASIC and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE)
None
Module
Deactivated 150 ohms 300 ohms 600 ohms Pt100 Climatic Ni100 Climatic Range Pt100 Standard Ni100 Standard
Pt100 Standard
Channel
Diagnostics: Wire break check1
Smoothing
Temperature unit ---
Reference junction ---
-----
Reference junction Reference junction --number
•
Type/range of measurement
---
• • • • • • • •
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-29
Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules
---
2AI RTD Standard
2AI TC Standard Type/range of measurement
2AI TC High Feature
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
---
• • • • • • • • • • •
Deactivated Voltage ± 80 mV TC-EL type T (Cu-CuNi) TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni) TC-EL type B (PtRh-PtRh) TC-EL type N (NiCrSi-NiSi) TC-EL type E (NiCr-CuNi) TC-EL type R (PtRh-Pt) TC-EL type S (PtRh-Pt) TC-EL type J (Fe-Cu-Ni) TC-EL type L (Fe-Cu-Ni)
TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni)
Channel
Type/range of measuremen t
• • • • • • • • • • • •
Deactivated Voltage ± 80 mV TC-EL type T (Cu-CuNi) TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni) TC-EL type B (PtRh-PtRh) TC-EL type C (WRe-WRe) TC-EL type N (NiCrSi-NiSi) TC-EL type E (NiCr-CuNi) TC-EL type R (PtRh-Pt) TC-EL type S (PtRh-Pt) TC-EL type J (Fe-Cu-Ni) TC-EL type L (Fe-Cu-Ni)
TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni)
Channel
Only with thermocouples. A parameter assignment error occurs when the wire break diagnosis is enabled in the voltage measuring range. The module does not start up.
1
2
The wire break is only detected with constant-current lines.
See also Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)
12-30
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules
12.5.5
Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module
Parameters Table 12-34 Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module Parameters
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
Group diagnosis
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
Diagnostics: Diagnostics/ underflow
• •
Disable Enable
Disable
Module
Diagnostics: Wire break
• •
Disable1 Enable
Disable
Channel
Smoothing
• • • •
None Weak Medium Strong
None
Channel
Temperature unit
• •
Celsius Fahrenheit
Celsius
Module
Type of measurement
• • • • •
Deactivated Four-conductor resistor Three-conductor resistor Two-conductor resistor Four-conductor thermal resistor Three-conductor thermal resistor Two-conductor thermal resistor
Four-conductor thermal resistor
Channel
Pt 0,003850 Pt 0,003916 Pt 0,003902 Pt 0,003920 Pt 0.003851 Ni 0,006180 Ni 0,006720 Ni 0.005000 Cu 0,00427)
Pt 0.003851
Channel
• • Temperature coefficient
• • • • • • • • •
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-31
Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules Parameters Measuring range
1
Value range • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 3000 Ω PTC Pt100 Climatic Ni100 Climatic Range Pt100 Standard Ni100 Standard Pt500 standard range Pt1000 standard range Ni1000 standard range Pt200 climatic range Pt500 climatic range Pt1000 climatic range Ni1000 climatic range Pt200 standard range Ni120 standard range Ni120 climatic range Cu10 climatic range Cu10 standard range Ni200 standard range Ni200 climatic range Ni500 standard range Ni500 climatic range
Default setting Pt100 Standard
Applicability Channel
Wire break diagnostic is disabled if - Type of measurement = "deactivated" or Measuring Range = "PTC" was assigned.
12-32
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules
Type of measurement - temperature coefficient - measuring range The following table lists the temperature coefficients and measuring ranges you can set for each measurement type: Type of measurement Deactivated Four-conductor resistor Three-conductor resistor Two-conductor resistor Three-conductor thermal resistor
Temperature coefficient – –
– 150 Ω / 300 Ω / 600 Ω / 3000 Ω
– Pt 0.003850/ Pt 0.003916 / Pt 0.003902 / Pt 0.003920 / Pt 0.0038511
150 Ω / 300 Ω / 600 Ω / 3000 Ω / PTC
Ni 0.0061801 / Ni 0.006720
Ni100 climatic range / NI100 standard range / Ni120 climatic range / Ni120 standard range / Ni200 climatic range / Ni200 standard range / Ni500 climatic range / Ni500 standard range / Ni1000 climatic range / Ni1000 standard range
Ni 0.005000
Ni 1000 climatic range2 Ni 1000 standard range2 Cu10 climatic range / Cu10 standard range
Cu 0.004271 Two-conductor thermal resistor Four-conductor thermal resistor
Measuring range
Pt100 climatic range / Pt100 standard range / Pt200 climatic range / Pt200 standard range / Pt500 climatic range / Pt500 standard range / Pt1000 climatic range / Pt1000 standard range
Pt 0.003850 / Pt 0.003916 / Pt 0.003902 / Pt 0.003920 / Pt 0.003851
Pt100 climatic range / Pt100 standard range / Pt200 climatic range / Pt200 standard range / Pt500 climatic range / Pt500 standard range / Pt1000 climatic range / Pt1000 standard range
Ni 0.006180) / Ni 0.006720
Ni100 climatic range / Ni100 standard range / Ni120 climatic range / Ni120 standard range / Ni200 climatic range / Ni200 standard range / Ni500 climatic range / Ni500 standard range / Ni1000 climatic range / Ni1000 standard range
Ni 0.005000
Ni 1000 climatic range2 Ni 1000 standard range2 1 The default settings for the temperature coefficients are valid for Europe. 2 For LG-Ni 1000 sensors from Siemens Building Ltd (Landis & Stäfa)
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-33
Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules
Temperature coefficient
The correction factor for the temperature coefficient (α-value) specifies how much the resistance of a certain material changes when the temperature is raised by 1° C. The temperature coefficient depends on the chemical composition of the material. Only one value is used in Europe for each type of sensor (default value). Additional values enable you to make a sensor-specific setting for the temperature coefficient, therefore ensuring more accuracy.
See also
12.5.6
Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AO U ST, 2AO U HF and 2AO I ST, 2AO I HF
Overview Table 12-35 Parameters for analog output modules U, I 2AO U Standard, 2AO I Standard, 2AO U High 2AO I High Feature Feature Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error, internal error) Diagnostics: --Short-circuit to M --Diagnostics: Wire break Reaction to CPU-/master-STOP Type/range of output
---
---
Type/range of output
Substitute value 1
Value range
Default setting
• Disable • Enable • Disable • Enable • Disable • Enable • Output de-energized • Substitute a value • Keep last value • Deactivated • 1 to 5 V • ± 10V • Deactivated • 4 to 20 mA • ± 20mA To 65535 (value range must be within the nominal range)
Applicability
Disable
Module
Disable
Channel
Disable
Channel
Output de-energized
Module
± 10V
Channel
4 to 20mA
Channel
±10V/ ±20V: 0 V Channel 4 to 20mA: 4 mA 1 to 5V: 1V 1 If there is no voltage going to the IM but the supply to the analog output modules continues, the substitute values that have been assigned parameters are output. Substitute values must be within the nominal range. You can assign as parameters values from -27648 to +27648 (in the case of parameter assignment by means of the device database file).
See also Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)
12-34
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules
12.5.7
Parameter description for the analog electronic modules
Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed by means of digital filtering. The smoothing can be adjusted in 4 steps, where the smoothing factor k multiplied by the cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the smoothing filter. The greater the smoothing, the greater the time constant of the filter. The figures below show the step response for the different smoothing factors depending on the number of module cycles. ZHDNN
1RQHN
PHGLXPN
VWURQJN
6WHSUHVSRQVH
[ [
[
[
0RGXOHF\FOHV
Figure 12-3
Smoothing in the case of the 2AI U Standard, 2AI U High Feature, 2AI I 2WIRE Standard, 2AI I 4WIRE Standard, 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature, 2AI RTD Standard, 2AI RTD High Feature, 2AI TC Standard, 2AI TC High Feature
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-35
Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules ZHDNN
1RQHN
PHGLXPN
VWURQJN
6WHSUHVSRQVH
[ [
[
[
0RGXOHF\FOHV
Figure 12-4
Smoothing with 4AI I 2WIRE ST
ZHDNN
1RQHN
PHGLXPN
VWURQJN
6WHSUHVSRQVH
[
[
[
[
0RGXOHF\FOHV
Figure 12-5
Smoothing in the case of the 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed
Interference frequency suppression The 2AI U High Feature and 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog input modules support the interference frequency suppression setting (50 Hz or 60 Hz) for the interface module. These HIGH FEATURE analog input modules also allow you to disable interference frequency suppression, thus enabling you to forego the setting on the interface module. If you disable interference frequency suppression, the conversion and cycle times become faster for these modules.
12-36
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)
Run-time calibration • 2AI U High Feature Run-time calibration can be enabled at module parameter assignment for the 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module to adjust for component drift due to changes in ambient temperature. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is delayed by 250 ms. Calibration takes place each time the ambient temperature changes by 5 °C. • 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature Run-time calibration can be enabled at module parameter assignment for the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module to periodically adjust for the offset voltage drift of the A/D converter. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is delayed by 200 ms. The accuracy limits of the module will be met without run-time calibration.
Reference junction, reference junction number See "Connecting thermocouples."
See also Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)
12.6
12.6
2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)
Order number 6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0
Features • 2 inputs for measuring voltage • Input ranges: ± 10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign ± 10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign 1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bits • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VSS AC
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-37
Analog electronic modules 12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 12-36 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
70(6$DQG'$86WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 M+: Input signal "+"
&+
M-: Input signal "-"
&+
0
0
0
0
Mana: Ground of the module 9
0 DQD
0 DQD
$8;HJ3(
$
$
$8;HJ3(
9
$8;PXVWEH DVVLJQHGWR3(
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG$,86WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Input signal "+"
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
M-: Input signal "-" Mana: Ground of the module 9
QF
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
QF
70(6DQG$,86WDQGDUG
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 M+: Input signal "+" M-: Input signal "-"
&+
Mana: Ground of the module
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
9
12-38
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6$DQG$,86WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+: Input signal "+"
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
$
$
QF $8; $8;
$
$
M-: Input signal "-" Mana: Ground of the module Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
9
$8; $8;
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
Figure 12-6
/ 3 3
$'8
9
0 $1$
0
Block diagram of the 2AI U Standard
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight
15 x 81 x 52 Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
No
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Shielded
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Max. 200 m
12-39
Analog electronic modules 12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) Voltages, currents, potentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
P1
24 VDC Yes
Isolation •
Between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between the channels and load voltage L+
Yes
•
Between the channels
No
Permissible potential difference •
Between the inputs and MANA (UCM)
2 VACSS
•
Between MANA and the central grounding point (UISO)
75 VDC/60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From load voltage L+
Max. 30 mA
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 0.6 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Diagnostic functions •
Group error
Red "SF" LED
•
Diagnostic functions readable
Yes Analog value generation
Measuring principle
Integrative
Integration and cycle time/resolution per channel: •
Integration time can be assigned parameters
Yes
•
Interference frequency suppression in Hz
60
50
•
Integration time in milliseconds
16,7
20
•
Conversion time in ms
55
65
•
Cycle time in ms
Number of active channels per module x conversion time
•
Resolution (including overrange)
± 10 V/13 bits + sign ± 5 V/13 bits + sign 1 to 5 V/13 bits
Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 ± 1%), (f1 = interference frequency)
12-40
• •
Common-mode interference (USS) Series-mode interference
min. 90 dB min. 70 dB
•
(peak interference value < nominal value of input range) Crosstalk between the inputs
min. -50dB
Operational limit (over the entire temperature range, relative to the input range)
± 0,6%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C relative to input range)
±0,4%
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0) Temperature error (with reference to the input range)
± 0.01%/K
Linearity error (with reference to the input range)
±0,01%
Repeatability (in steady state at 25° C with reference to input range)
±0,05 %
Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance •
Voltage
±5V/min. 100 kΩ 1 to 5 V/min.100 kΩ ±10V/min. 100 kΩ
Permitted input voltage (destruction limit)
35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 ms (pulse duty factor 1:20)
Smoothing of the measured values
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time Medium 32 x cycle time Strong 64 x cycle time
12.7
12.7
2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0)
Order number 6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0
Features • 2 inputs for measuring voltage • Input ranges: – ± 10 V, resolution 15 bits + sign – ± 10 V, resolution 15 bits + sign – 1 to 5 V, resolution 15 bits • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Permitted common-mode voltage between the channels 100 VAC
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-41
Analog electronic modules 12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0)
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 12-37 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
70(6$DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 M+: Input signal "+"
&+
M-: Input signal "-"
&+
0
0
0
0
QF
QF
$
$
$8;HJ3(
9
$8;HJ3(
9
$8;PXVWEHDVVLJQHG WR3(
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Input signal "+"
&+
M-: Input signal "-"
&+
0
0
0
0
QF
QF
QF
QF
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC. 9
70(6DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 M+: Input signal "+" M-: Input signal "-"
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
QF
QF
9
12-42
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+: Input signal "+" M-: Input signal "-"
70(6$DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC. &+ 0
&+ 0
0
0
QF
QF
QF
$
$
QF $8; $8;
$
$
9
$8; $8;
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
3 3
$'8
/
9
0 $1$
0
Figure 12-7
Block diagram of the 2AI U High Feature
Technical specifications Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight Supports isochronous operation Number of inputs Length of cable •
Shielded
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Dimensions and weight 15 x 81 x 52 Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules No 2 Max. 200 m
12-43
Analog electronic modules 12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0) Voltages, currents, potentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
VDC
P1
Yes
Isolation •
Between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between the channels and load voltage L+
Yes
•
Between the channels and PE
Yes
•
Between the channels
No
Permissible potential difference •
Between the channels
140 VDC/100 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From load voltage L+
Max. 53 mA
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 0.85 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Diagnostic functions •
Group error
Red "SF" LED
•
Diagnostic functions readable (wire break diagnosis is not supported on the module.)
Yes
Analog value generation Measuring principle
Integrative
Integration and cycle time/resolution per channel •
Integration time can be assigned parameters
Yes
•
Interference frequency suppression in Hz
60
50
No
•
Integration time in milliseconds
16,67
20
7,5
•
Conversion time in ms – 1 channel active per module – 2 channels active per module
25 58,3
30 70
10 26
•
Cycle time in ms – 1 channel active per module – 2 channels active per module
75 175
90 210
30 78
•
Resolution (including overrange)
± 10 V/15 bits + sign ± 5 V/15 bits + sign 1 to 5 V/15 bits
12-44
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0) Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 ± 0.5%), (f1 = interference frequency) • •
Common-mode interference (USS) Series-mode interference
Min. 100dB min. 90dB
•
peak interference value < rated value of input range) Crosstalk between the inputs
min. -100dB
Operational limit (entire temperature range with reference to input range; calibration enabled1)
±0,1%
Operational limit (entire temperature range with reference to input range; calibration disabled)
±0,5%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range; calibration enabled1)
±0,05%
Temperature error (with reference to input range; calibration enabled1)
± 0.003%/K
Temperature error (with reference to input range; calibration disabled)
± 0.015%/K
Linearity error (with reference to the input range)
±0,03%
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range)
±0,01%
Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance •
Voltage
± 10 V/min. 1 MΩ ± 5 V/min. 1 MΩ 1 to 5 V/min.1 MΩ
Permitted input voltage (destruction limit)
35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 ms
Smoothing of the measured values
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time Medium 32 x cycle time Strong 64 x cycle time
1Run-time
calibration can be enabled during module parameter assignment to adjust for component drift due to changes in ambient temperature. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is delayed by 250 ms. Calibration takes place each time the ambient temperature changes by 5° C.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-45
Analog electronic modules 12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)
12.8
12.8
2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)
Order number 6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0
Features • 2 inputs for measuring voltage • Input ranges: ± 10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign ± 5 V, resolution 13 bits + sign ± 2,5 V, resolution 13 bits + sign 1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bits • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Permitted common-mode voltage 100 VSS AC • Supports isochronous operation – Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 2.5 ms – Minimum conversion time of the input modules (TWEmin): 1.1 ms
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed for the different terminal modules: Table 12-38 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
70(6$DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 M+: Input signal "+"
&+
M-: Input signal "-"
&+
0
0
0
0
QF
QF
$
$
$8;HJ3(
Mana: Ground of the module 9
$8;HJ3(
9
$8;PXVWEHDVVLJQHG WR3(
12-46
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0) View
Pin assignment 70(6DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Input signal "+"
&+
M-: Input signal "-"
&+
0
Mana: Ground of the module
0
9 0
0
QF
QF
QF
QF
70(6DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 M+: Input signal "+" M-: Input signal "-"
&+
Mana: Ground of the module
&+
0
0
0
0
QF
QF
9
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+: Input signal "+" 70(6$DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH
M-: Input signal "-" Mana: Ground of the module
&+ 0
&+ 0
0
0
QF
QF
QF
$
$
QF $8; $8;
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
$
$
9
$8; $8;
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-47
Analog electronic modules 12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
3 3
$'8
/
0 $1$
9
0
Figure 12-8
Block diagram of the 2AI U High Speed
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
Yes
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Shielded
Max. 200 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Isolation •
Between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between the channels and load voltage L+
Yes
•
Between the channels
No
Permissible potential difference •
Between the inputs and MANA (UCM)
100 VSS AC
•
Between MANA and the central grounding point (UISO)
75 VDC/60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption •
Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module
12-48
Max. 35 mA Typ. 0.8 W
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts • Process interrupt Can be assigned parameters1 Diagnostic functions • Group error display Red "SF" LED • Diagnostic information can be displayed Possible2 Analog value generation Measuring principle Instantaneous value encoding Cycle time/resolution: • Conversion time in ms (per channel) 0,1 • Cycle time in ms (per module) 1 • Resolution (including overrange) ± 10 V/13 bits + sign ± 5 V/13 bits + sign ± 2,5 V/13 bits + sign 1 to 5 V/13 bits Suppression of interference, limits of error • Common mode interference (Ucm) < 100 > 70 dB VSS) Crosstalk between the inputs > 50 dB Operational limit ± 0,3% (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range) Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C ±0,2% with reference to input range) Temperature error (with reference to the ± 0.01%/K input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input ±0,01% range) Repeatability ±0,05% (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range) Data for selecting a sensor Input ranges (rated value)/input resistance • Voltage ± 10 V/min. 100kΩ ±5 V/min. 100 kΩ ±2.5 V/min. 100 kΩ 1 - 5 V/min. 100 kΩ Maximum input voltage for voltage input 50 V continuous, 100 V for max. 1 ms (pulse duty (destruction limit) factor 1:20) Connection of the sensors • For measuring voltage Possible Smoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 64 x cycle time Medium 128 x cycle time Strong 512 x cycle time 1 DPV1 only 2 Parameter assignment error Violation of lower limit value Violation of upper limit value Open circuit (only with 1 to 5 V) Process interrupt lost
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-49
Analog electronic modules 12.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)
12.9
2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)
12.9
Order number 6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0
Features • 2 inputs for measuring current • Input range: 4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 12-39 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
70(6$DQG$,,6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 M+: Input signal "+"
&+ 0
M-: Input signal "-"
&+
Mana: Ground (of power module)
0 P$
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
$8;HJ3(
$
$
$8;HJ3(
P$
2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits.
$8;PXVWEH DVVLJQHGWR3(
12-50
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0) View
Pin assignment 70(6DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Input signal "+"
&+
&+
0
0
M-: Input signal "-" Mana: Ground (of power module) P$
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF
2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits. Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
70(6DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 M+: Input signal "+"
&+ 0
M-: Input signal "-"
&+
Mana: Ground (of power module)
0 P$
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits.
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG$,,6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+: Input signal "+"
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD QF
QF $8; $8;
$
$
$
$
M-: Input signal "-" Mana: Ground (of power module) P$
2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits. Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
$8; $8;
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-51
Analog electronic modules 12.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
3 3
/
$'&
9
0 $1$
0 &XUUHQW OLPLWLQJ
Figure 12-9
Block diagram of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
No
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Shielded
Max. 200 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Power supply of the transmitters •
Yes
Short-circuit protection
Yes, (destruction limit 35 mA per channel)
Isolation •
Between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between the channels and load voltage L+
No
•
Between the channels
Insulation tested
No 500 VDC
Current consumption •
From load voltage L+
Power dissipation of the module
12-52
Max. 80 mA Typ. 0.6 W
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions •
Group error
Red "SF" LED
•
Diagnostic functions readable
Yes Analog value generation
Measuring principle
Integrative
Integration and cycle time/resolution per channel: •
Integration time can be assigned parameters
Yes
•
Interference frequency suppression in Hz
60
50
•
Integration time in milliseconds
16,7
20
•
Conversion time in ms
55
65
•
Cycle time in ms
Number of active channels per module x conversion time
•
Resolution (including overrange)
4 to 20 mA/13 bits
Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) •
Series-mode interference (peak interference value < rated value of input range)
Min. 70 dB
Crosstalk between the inputs
Min. -50 dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)
±0,6%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range)
±0,4%
Temperature error (with reference to the input ± 0,005%/K range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range)
±0,01%
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range)
±0,05%
Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance •
Current
4 to 20 mA/50 Ω
Permitted input current (destruction limit)
40 mA
Load of the two-wire measuring transducer
Max. 750 Ω
Smoothing of the measured values
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time Medium 32 x cycle time Strong 64 x cycle time
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-53
Analog electronic modules 12.10 Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0)
12.10
12.10
Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0)
Order number 6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0
Features • 4 inputs for measuring current • Input range: 4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST for the different terminal modules: Table 12-40 Terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST View
Pin assignment 70(6DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 2 Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 6 Channel 2: Terminals 3 and 4 Channel 3: Terminals 7 and 8 M+: Input signal "+"
0 &+
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0
0
M-: Input signal "–"
0
2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits.
P$
&+
70(6$DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 2 Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 6 Channel 2: Terminals 3 and 4 Channel 3: Terminals 7 and 8 M+: Input signal "+"
0
&+
&+
&+ 0
0
0
0
P$
2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits.
&+
0
0
$8;
$
$
$8;
$
$
$8;
12-54
M-: Input signal "–"
0
$8;
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.10 Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0)
%DFNSODQHEXV
Block diagram
(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
(OHFWULFDO LVRODWLRQ $'&
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
, , , , 3 3
/
'&'&FRQYHUWHU 0 $1$
0
,QSXWFXUUHQW OLPLW
6KRUWFLUFXLW SURWHFWLRQ
Figure 12-10 Block diagram of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)
15 × 81 × 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
No
Number of inputs
4
Length of cable •
Shielded
Max. 200 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
P1
Power supply of the transmitters •
Short-circuit protection
24 VDC Yes Yes Yes (approx. 200 mA for module)
Isolation •
Between the channels and backplane bus
•
Between the channels and load voltage L+ No
•
Between the channels
Insulation tested
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Yes No 500 VDC
12-55
Analog electronic modules 12.10 Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0) Current consumption of the module • From the load voltage L+ (with sensor Max. 125 mA supply) Power dissipation of the module Typ. 0.6 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions • Group error Red "SF" LED • Diagnostic functions readable Yes Analog value generation Measuring principle Integrative Integration and cycle time/resolution per channel: • Integration time can be assigned Yes parameters • Interference frequency suppression in Hz 60 50 • Integration time in milliseconds 16,7 20 • Cycle time per module in ms 33 40 • Resolution (including overrange) 4 to 20 mA/13 bits Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) • Series-mode interference Min. 70 dB (peak interference value < rated value of input range) Crosstalk between the inputs Min. -50 dB Operational limit ±0,4 % (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range) Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with ±0,3 % reference to input range) Temperature error (with reference to the input ± 0,003 %/K range) Linearity error (with reference to the input ±0,01 % range) Repeatability ±0,05 % (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range) Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance • Current 4 to 20 mA/25 Ω Permitted input current (destruction limit) Approx. 30 mA (limited electronically) Load of the two-wire measuring transducer Max. 750 Ω Smoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time Medium 16 x cycle time Strong 32 x cycle time
12-56
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)
12.11
2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)
12.11
Order number 6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0
Features • 2 inputs for measuring current • Current-limited sensor supply (90 mA) • Input ranges: 4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits 0 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits • Supports isochronous operation – Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 2.5 ms – Minimum conversion time of the input modules (TWEmin): 1.1 ms
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed for the different terminal modules: Table 12-41 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
70(6$DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 M+: Input signal "+"
&+
M-: Input signal "-"
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
$8;HJ3(
$
$
$8;HJ3(
Mana: Ground (of power module) P$
P$
2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits.
$8;PXVWEH DVVLJQHGWR3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-57
Analog electronic modules 12.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0) View
Pin assignment 70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Input signal "+"
&+
M-: Input signal "-"
&+
0
Mana: Ground (of power module) 2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits.
0 P$
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 M+: Input signal "+" M-: Input signal "-"
&+
&+
Mana: Ground (of power module) 2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits.
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
P$
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+: Input signal "+"
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF
$
$
$8; $8;
12-58
$
$
M-: Input signal "-" Mana: Ground (of power module) P$
2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits. Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
$8; $8;
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
08; (76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
3 3
/
$'&
9
0 $1$
0 &XUUHQWOLPLW
Figure 12-11 Block diagram of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
Yes
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Shielded
Max. 200 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module)
24 VDC
•
P1
Yes
•
Short-circuit protection
Yes, (destruction limit 35 mA per channel)
Isolation •
Between channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between channels and load voltage L+
No
•
Between the channels
No
Permissible potential difference •
Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)
Insulation tested with
75 VDC, 60 VAC 500 VDC
Current consumption •
Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Max. 35 mA1 Typ. 0.8 W
12-59
Analog electronic modules 12.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts •
Process interrupt
Parmeterizable2
Diagnostic functions •
Group error display
Red "SF" LED
•
Diagnostic functions readable
Possible3 Analog value generation
Measuring principle
Instantaneous value encoding
Cycle time/resolution: •
Conversion time in ms (per channel)
0,1
•
Cycle time in ms (per module)
1
•
Resolution (including overrange)
4 to 20 mA/13 bits 0 to 20 mA/13 bits
Suppression of interference, limits of error Crosstalk between the inputs
> 50 dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)
±0,3%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range)
±0,2%
Temperature error (with reference to the input range)
± 0,01%/K
Linearity error (with reference to the input range)
±0,01%
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range)
±0,05%
Sensor power supply outputs Number of outputs
2
Output voltage • With load
L+ (-2.5 V)
Output current • Rated value • Permitted range
90 mA (both channels) 0 mA to 90 mA
Short-circuit protection
Yes, electronic Data for selecting a sensor
Input range (rated value/input resistance) •
Current
To 20 mA/50 Ω To 20 mA/50 Ω
Connection of the sensors •
12-60
For current measurement as two-wire transmitter
Possible
Load of the two-wire measuring transducer
Max. 670 Ω
Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit)
60 mA
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.12 2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0) Smoothing of the measured values
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 64 x cycle time Medium 128 x cycle time Strong 512 x cycle time
1
Without sensor supply voltage
2
DPV only
Parameter assignment error Violation of lower limit value Violation of upper limit value Open circuit (only with 4 to 20 mA) Process interrupt lost
3
12.12
2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)
12.12
Order number 6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0
Features • 2 inputs for measuring current • Input ranges: – ± 20 mA, resolution 13 bits + sign – to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits • Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VACSS
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-61
Analog electronic modules 12.12 2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 12-42 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Input signal "+" M-: Input signal "-"
&+ 0
&+
0 0
0
9'&
0 DQD
ZLUH
DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring transducer Mana: Ground (of power module)
P$
4-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the module.
9'& 0 DQD
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+: Input signal "+"
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
9'&
9'&
0 DQD
0 DQD
$
$
ZLUH
P$
$8; $8;
12-62
$
$
M-: Input signal "-" DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring transducer Mana: Ground (of power module) 4-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the module.
$8; $8;
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.12 2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
3 3
/
$'&
9
0 $1$
0 &XUUHQW OLPLWLQJ
Figure 12-12 Block diagram of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
No
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Shielded
Max. 200 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
P1
Power supply of the transmitters •
Short-circuit protection
24 VDC Yes Yes Yes, 60 mA (for both channels)
Isolation •
Between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between the channels and load voltage L+
No
•
Between the channels
No
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From load voltage L+
Power dissipation of the module
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Max. 30 mA Typ. 0.6 W
12-63
Analog electronic modules 12.12 2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions •
Group error
Red "SF" LED
•
Diagnostic functions readable
Yes Analog value generation
Measuring principle
Integrative
Integration and cycle time/resolution per channel: •
Integration time can be assigned parameters
•
Interference frequency suppression in Hz 60
50
•
Integration time in milliseconds
16,7
20
•
Conversion time in ms
55
65
•
Cycle time in ms
Number of active channels per module x conversion time
•
Resolution (including overrange)
± 20 mA/13 bits + sign
Yes
4 to 20 mA/13 bits Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) •
Series-mode interference (peak interference value < rated value of input range)
Min. 70 dB
Crosstalk between the inputs
Min. -50 dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)
±0,6%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range)
±0,4%
Temperature error (with reference to the input range)
± 0.005%/K
Linearity error (with reference to the input range)
±0,01%
Repeatability ±0,05% (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range) Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance • Current ± 20 mA/50 Ω 4 to 20 mA/50 Ω Permitted input current (destruction limit) 40 mA Smoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time Medium 32 x cycle time Strong 64 x cycle time
12-64
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)
12.13
2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)
12.13
Order number 6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0
Features • 2 inputs for measuring current • Input ranges: – ± 20 mA, resolution 15 bits + sign – 4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Permitted common-mode voltage between the channels 100 VAC • Supports two-wire or four-wire measuring transducers
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 12-43 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature View
Pin assignment 70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK)HDWXUH
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+ : Input signal "+" M-: Input signal "-"
ZLUH &+ 0
&+
ZLUHPHDVXULQJWUDQVGXFHU
0 P$
DC+ 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring transducer DC -24V: Return circuit for measuring transducer supply
0
0
It is possible to supply four-wire measuring transducers by means of the module.
9'&
9'&
9'&
9'&
To support isolation between the channels, use an external supply to feed one of the measuring transducers.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-65
Analog electronic modules 12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK)HDWXUH $OWHUQDWLYHWHUPLQDODVVLJQPHQWIRU:,5(
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+ : Input signal "-" M- : Connect to 24 VDC
ZLUH &+
&+
DC+ 24V: Input signal "+"
ZLUHPHDVXULQJWUDQVGXFHU
0
0
0
0
9'&
9'&
9'&
9'&
2-wire measuring transducers are supplied by means of the measuring circuits. Mixing two-wire and four-wire measuring transducers is permitted.
P$
To support isolation between the channels, use an external supply to feed one of the measuring transducers. Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+ : Input signal "+"
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
$
$
$
$
9'& 9'& $8; $8;
ZLUH
M- : Input signal "-"
ZLUHPHDVXULQJWUDQVGXFHU
DC+ 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring transducer DC -24V: Return circuit for measuring transducer supply
P$
It is possible to supply four-wire measuring transducers by means of the module.
9'&
To support isolation between the channels, use an external supply to feed one of the measuring transducers.
9'& $8; $8;
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK)HDWXUH $OWHUQDWLYHWHUPLQDODVVLJQPHQWIRU:,5(
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
9'&
9'& 9'&
9'& $8; $8;
12-66
$
$
$
$
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+ : Input signal "-"
ZLUH
M- : Connect to 24 VDC
ZLUHPHDVXULQJWUDQVGXFHU
DC+ 24V: Input signal "+"
P$
2-wire measuring transducers are supplied by means of the measuring circuits. Mixing two-wire and four-wire measuring transducers is permitted. To support isolation between the channels, use an external supply to feed one of the measuring transducers.
$8; $8;
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
3 3
/
$'&
0 $1$
9
0 &XUUHQW OLPLWLQJ
Figure 12-13 Block diagram of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
No
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Shielded
Max. 200 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
P1
Power supply of the transmitters •
Short-circuit protection
24 VDC Yes Yes Yes, 60 mA (for both channels)
Isolation •
Between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between the channels and load voltage L+
Yes
•
Between the channels and PE
Yes
•
Between the channels
No
Permissible potential difference •
Between the channels
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
140 VDC/100 VAC (with isolated power supply of measuring transducers)
12-67
Analog electronic modules 12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0) Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From load voltage L+
Max. 53 mA
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 0.85 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Diagnostic functions •
Group error
Red "SF" LED
•
Diagnostic functions readable
Yes Analog value generation
Measuring principle
Integrative
Integration and cycle time/resolution per channel: •
Integration time can be assigned parameters
Yes
•
Interference frequency suppression in Hz
60
50
No
•
Integration time in milliseconds
16,67
20
7,5
•
Conversion time in ms – 1 channel active per module – 2 channels active per module
25 58,3
30 70
10 26
•
Cycle time in ms – 1 channel active per module – 2 channels active per module
75 175
90 210
30 78
•
Resolution (including overrange)
± 20 mA/15 bits + sign 4 to 20 mA/15 bits
Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±0.5%), (f1 = interference frequency) • •
Common-mode interference (USS) Series-mode interference
Min. 100dB
peak interference value < rated value of input range) Crosstalk between the inputs limit1
12-68
min. 90dB Min. -100 dB
Operational (over the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)
±0,1%
Basic error limit1 operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range
±0,05%
Temperature error (with reference to the input range)
± 0,003%/K
Linearity error (with reference to the input range)
±0,03%
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range)
±0,01%
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.14 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0) Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance •
Current
± 20 mA/50 Ω 4 to 20 mA/50 Ω
Permitted input current (destruction limit)
40 mA (on a single channel)
Load of the two-wire measuring transducer
Max. 750 Ω
Smoothing of the measured values
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time Medium 32 x cycle time Strong 64 x cycle time
Run-time calibration can be enabled during module parameter assignment to periodically adjust for the offset voltage drift of the A/D converter. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is delayed by 200 ms. The accuracy limits of the module will be met without run-time calibration. 1
12.14
2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0)
12.14
Order number 6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0
Features • 2 inputs for measuring current • Current-limited sensor supply (90 mA) • Input ranges: – 4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits – 0 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits – ± 20 mA, resolution 13 bits + sign • Supports isochronous operation – Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 2.5 ms – Minimum conversion time of the input modules (TWEmin): 1.1 ms
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-69
Analog electronic modules 12.14 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0)
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed for the terminal module. Table 12-44 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Input signal "+"
&+ 0
&+
M- : Input signal "-"
ZLUH
DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring transducer
0
Mana: Ground (of power module)
P$ 0
0
9'&
9'&
0 DQD
0 DQD
4-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the module.
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+: Input signal "+"
&+ 0
&+
0 0
0
9'&
0 DQD $8; $8;
12-70
$
$
$
$
ZLUH
P$
9'&
M- : Input signal "-" DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring transducer Mana: Ground (of power module) 4-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the module.
0 DQD $8; $8;
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.14 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
08; (76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
3 3
/
$'&
9
0 $1$
0 &XUUHQWOLPLW
Figure 12-14 Block diagram of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
Yes
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Shielded
Max. 200 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
P1
24 VDC Yes
Isolation •
Between channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between channels and load voltage L+
No
•
Between the channels
No
Permissible potential difference •
Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)
Insulation tested with
75 VDC, 60 VAC 500 VDC
Current consumption •
Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Max. 35 mA1 Typ. 0.8 W
12-71
Analog electronic modules 12.14 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts •
Process interrupt
Can be assigned parameters2
Diagnostic functions •
Group error display
Red "SF" LED
•
Diagnostic information readable
Possible3 Analog value generation
Measuring principle
Instantaneous value encoding
Cycle time/resolution: •
Conversion time in ms (per channel)
0,1
•
Cycle time in ms (per module)
1
•
Resolution (including overrange)
4 to 20 mA/13 bit 0 to 20 mA/13 bit ± 20 mA/13 bits + sign
Suppression of interference, limits of error Crosstalk between the inputs
> 50 dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)
±0,3%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range)
±0,2%
Temperature error (with reference to the input range)
± 0,01%/K
Linearity error (with reference to the input range)
±0,01%
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range)
±0,05%
Sensor power supply outputs Number of outputs
2
Output voltage • With load
L+ (-2.5 V)
Output current • Rated value • Permitted range
90 mA (both channels) 0 mA to 90 mA
Short-circuit protection
Yes, electronic Data for selecting a sensor
Input range (rated value)/input resistance •
Current
4 to 20 mA/50 Ω 0 to 20 mA/50 Ω ±20 mA/50 Ω
Connection of the sensors •
For current measurement as two-wire transmitter
Possible
Load of the two-wire measuring transducer
12-72
Max. 670 Ω
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit)
60 mA
Smoothing of the measured values
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 64 x cycle time Medium 128 x cycle time Strong 512 x cycle time
1
Without encoder supply voltage
2
DPV1 only
Parameter assignment error Violation of lower limit value Violation of upper limit value Open circuit (only with 4 to 20 mA) Process interrupt lost
3
12.15
12.15
2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)
Order number 6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0
Features • 2 inputs for resistance thermometers or resistance measurement • Input ranges: – Resistance thermometers: Pt100, Ni100; resolution 15 bits + sign – Resistance measurement: 150 Ω; 300 Ω ; 600 Ω, resolution max. 15 bits + sign • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves
Pin assignment The resistance thermometers/resistors are measured in a four-conductor connection. Constant current is fed to the resistance thermometers/resistors by means of connections IC + and IC -. The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer/resistor is measured by means of the connections M + and M -. This ensures highly accurate measurement results with the four-conductor connection. With the two/three-conductor connection, you must apply corresponding jumpers to the module between M+ and Ic+ or M- and Ic- . However, you have to expect a loss of accuracy in the measurement results.
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-73
Analog electronic modules 12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0) The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard on the terminal module. Table 12-45 Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG$,57'6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Measuring line positive
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
, &
, &
, &
, &
IC-: Constant-current line negative ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
M- : Measuring line negative IC+: Constant-current line positive
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6$DQG$,57'6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+: Measuring line positive IC-: Constant-current line negative
&+
&+
0
0
0
, &
, &
, &
, &
$
$
$
$
$8; $8;
ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
M-: Measuring line negative IC+: Constant-current line positive
0
$8; $8;
Note A wire break in the measuring lines of the temperature sensors for three- or four-conductor connections (connections 1 and 2, or 5 and 6) is not detected. Undefined values can be reported.
12-74
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
08; (76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
3 3
/
$'&
0 $1$
9
08; 0
Figure 12-15 Block diagram of the 2AI RTD Standard
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
No
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Shielded
Max. 200 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
P1
Power supply of the transmitters
24 VDC Yes Yes
•
Constant-current supply for resistance-type sensors
Approx. 1.5 mA
•
Short-circuit protection
Yes
Isolation •
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between the channels and load voltage L+
Yes
• between the channels Permissible potential difference • Between MANA and the central grounding point (UISO) Insulation tested Current consumption • From load voltage L+ Power dissipation of the module
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
No 75 VDC/60 VAC 500 VDC max. 30mA Typ. 0.6 W
12-75
Analog electronic modules 12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions •
Group error
•
Diagnostic functions readable
Red "SF" LED Yes Analog value generation
Measuring principle
Integrative
Integration and cycle time/resolution per channel: •
Integration time can be assigned parameters
Yes
•
Interference frequency suppression in Hz
60
50
•
Integration time in milliseconds
16,7
20
•
Conversion time in ms
110
130
•
Cycle time in ms
Number of active channels per module x conversion time
•
Resolution (including overrange)
Pt100, Ni100/ 15 bits + sign 150 Ω/14 bits/ 300 Ω, 600 Ω/15 bits
Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) • •
Common-mode interference (USS) Series-mode interference
Min. 90dB min. 70dB
peak interference value < rated value of input range) Crosstalk between the inputs
Min. -50 dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature ±0,6% range, with reference to the input range) Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range)
±0,4%
Temperature error (with reference to the input range)
± 0.005%/K
Linearity error (with reference to the input range)
±0,01%
Repeatability (in steady state at 25° C with ±0,05% reference to input range) Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance •
Resistance-type sensor
150 Ω/min. 2 MΩ 300 Ω/min. 2 MΩ 600 Ω/min. 2 MΩ
•
Resistance thermometers
Pt100/min. 2 MΩ Ni100/min. 2 MΩ
Permitted input voltage (destruction limit)
12-76
Max. 9 V
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) Connection of the sensors •
For measuring resistance – Two and three-conductor connection –
Yes, line resistances are also measured, jumpers at TR Yes
Four-conductor connection
Characteristic curve linearization
Yes, parameters can be assigned for Pt100, Ni100
Smoothing of the measured values
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time
Medium 64 x cycle time Strong 128 x cycle time
12.16
2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)
12.16
Order number 6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0
Features • 2 inputs for resistance thermometers or resistance measurement • Input ranges – Resistance thermometers: Pt100; Ni100; Ni120; Pt200; Ni200; Pt500; Ni500; Pt1000; Ni1000; Cu10;resolution max. 15 bits + sign – Resistance measurement: 150 Ω; 300 Ω; 600 Ω; 3000 Ω; PTC; resolution max. 15 bits • Automatic compensation of line resistances in the case of a three-conductor connection • Temperature coefficient can be assigned parameters for resistance-type sensors • High degree of accuracy • Isolated from the load voltage • Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves • Parameter length 7 bytes • Permitted common-mode voltage 5 VACss • Recording of reference junction temperature (together with the 2AI TC Standard electronic module) • Compatible with the 2AI RTD Standard (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB50)
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-77
Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)
Note The EM 2AI RTD High Feature can replace a 2AI RTD Standard in an existing system. • The wiring does not have to be changed. The additional bridges on the terminal module of the 2AI RTD Standard do not have to be removed. • The configuration (in HW Config or the GSD file) does not have to be changed. Only the new functions of the 2AI RTD High Feature cannot be assigned parameters in this instance.
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature on the terminal modules. Table 12-46 Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 M+: Measuring line positive
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
, &
, &
M-: Measuring line negative ZLUH
IC+: Constant-current line positive
ZLUH
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4 70(6$DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 M+: Measuring line positive
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
, &
, &
$
$
$8;HJ3(
12-78
M-: Measuring line negative ZLUH
ZLUH
IC+: Constant-current line positive
$8;HJ3(
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Measuring line positive
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
, &
, &
, &
, &
IC-: Constant-current line negative ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
M-: Measuring line negative IC+: Constant-current line positive
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6$DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+: Measuring line positive
&+ 0 0 , & , & $8; $8;
IC-: Constant-current line negative
&+
$
$
$
$
ZLUH
ZLUH
M-: Measuring line negative
ZLUH
IC+: Constant-current line positive
0 0 , & , & $8; $8;
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
3 3
(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
/
$'&
9
0 $1$ 08;
0
Figure 12-16 Block diagram of the 2AI RTD High Feature
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-79
Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)
Technical specifications Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight Supports isochronous operation Number of inputs Length of cable • Shielded
Dimensions and weight 15 x 81 x 52 Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules No 2
Max. 200 m Voltages, currents, potentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power 24 VDC module) • P1 Yes Power supply of the transmitters Yes • Constant-current supply for Approx. 1.25 mA resistance-type sensors • Short-circuit protection Yes Isolation • between the channels and backplane Yes bus • Between the channels and load Yes voltage L+ • between the channels No Permissible potential difference • Between MANA and the central 75 VDC/60 VAC grounding point (UISO) Insulation tested 500 VDC Current consumption • From load voltage L+ max. 30mA Power dissipation of the module Typ. 0.6 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions • Group error Red "SF" LED • Diagnostic functions readable Yes Analog value generation Measuring principle Integrating (sigma-delta) Integration and cycle time/resolution per channel: • Integration time can be assigned Yes parameters • Interference frequency suppression in 60 50 Hz • Integration time in milliseconds 16,7 20 • Basic conversion time including 50 60 Integration time in milliseconds • Additional conversion time for wire 5 5 break check diagnosis in ms • Additional conversion time in ms for 50 60 line compensation in three-conductor connections • Cycle time in ms Number of active channels per module x conversion time • Resolution (including overrange) Pt 100; Ni 100; Ni120; Pt 200; Ni 200; Pt 500; Ni 500; Pt 1000; Ni 1000; Cu 10 / 15 bits + sign 150Ω; 300Ω; 600Ω; 3000Ω; / 15 bits PTC1 / 1 bit
12-80
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) • Common-mode interference (USS) Min. 90dB • Series-mode interference min. 70dB peak interference value < rated value of input range) Crosstalk between the inputs Min. -50 dB Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range) • Resistance-type sensor ±0,1% • Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Standard ± 1.0K • Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Climatic ± 0.25K • Ni100, Ni120, Ni200, Ni500, Ni 1000 ± 0.4K Standard and Climatic • Cu10 ± 1.5K Basic error limit for resistance-type sensors (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range) • Resistance-type sensor ±0,05% • Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Standard ± 0.6K • Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Climatic ± 0.13K • Ni100, Ni120, Ni200, Ni500, Ni 1000 ± 0.2K Standard and Climatic • Cu10 ± 1.0K Temperature error (with reference to the ± 0.0009%/K input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input ±0,01% range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25° C with ±0,05% reference to input range) Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance • Resistance-type sensor 150 Ω/min. 10 MΩ 300 Ω/min. 10 MΩ 600 Ω/min. 10 MΩ 3000 Ω/min. 10 MΩ PTC min 10 MΩ • Resistance thermometers Pt100/min. 10 MΩ Ni100/min. 10 MΩ Ni120/min. 10 MΩ Pt200/min. 10 MΩ Ni200/min. 10 MΩ Pt500/min. 10 MΩ Ni500/min. 10 MΩ Pt1000/min. 10 MΩ Ni1000/min. 10 MΩ Cu10/min. 10 MΩ Permitted input voltage (destruction limit) Max. 9 V
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-81
Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) Connection of the sensors • For measuring resistance – 2-conductor connection – 3-conductor connection – 4-conductor connection Characteristic curve linearization Smoothing of the measured values
Yes, Yes, internal compensation of line resistances Yes Yes, can be assigned parameters for Ptxxx, Nixxx Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time Medium 32 x cycle time Strong 64 x cycle time 1In accordance with VDE 0660 Part 302/303, Type A
Use of Cu10 sensors • Select "Three-conductor thermal resistor" and "Cu10" at parameter assignment. • Wire the Cu10 sensor in accordance with the three-conductor connection method. • Automatic, internal compensation of line resistance for the missing measuring line occurs during operation.
Note Please note the following to ensure optimum line compensation in the case of Cu10: • The sum of the cable resistance and measurement resistance must not exceed 31 Ω. • The cable must have a resistance of no more than 8 Ω if you want to use the temperature range up to and above 312° C. Example: A 200 m Cu cable with a 0.5 mm2 conductor cross-section has approximately 7 Ω. A smaller cross-section shortens the permissible cable length accordingly.
12-82
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)
Using PTC resistors PTCs are suitable for temperature monitoring and as thermal protective devices for complex drives and transformer windings. • Select "Two-conductor resistor" and "PTC" at parameter assignment: • Connect the PTC in accordance with the two-conductor connection method. • Apply PTC resistors of type A (PTC thermistors) in accordance with DIN / VDE 0660, Part 302. • Sensor data for the PTC resistor: Feature Switching points
Technical specifications
Remarks
Behavior with rising temperature < 550Ω
Normal range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) • SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)
550Ω to 1650Ω
Prewarning range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII) • SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "1" (in the PII)
> 1650Ω
Addressable range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) • SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "1", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)
Behavior with rising temperature > 750Ω
Addressable range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) • SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "1", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)
750Ω to 540Ω
Prewarning range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII) • SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "1" (in the PII)
< 540Ω
Normal range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) • SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)
(TNF-5) °C
Max. 550 Ω
TNF= rated operating temperature
(TNF+5) °C
Min. 1330 Ω
(TNF+15) °C
Min. 4000 Ω
Measuring voltage
Max. 7.5 V
Voltage on the PTC
• Assignment in the process input image (PII) in the case of SIMATIC S7
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-83
Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) 7 6 0
IB x
5 4 3
0 0 0
2 1
0
between prewarning threshold: 1 and response threshold
IB x + 1
7 6
5 4 3
2 1
0
0 0 0
0 0
0
0
0
0: Measured resistance < response threshold 1: Measured resistance > response threshold 0 0
• Assignment in the process input image (PII) in the case of SIMATIC S5
,%[
between prewarning threshold: 1 and response threshold
,%[
0HDVXUHGUHVLVWDQFHUHVSRQVHWKUHVKROG 0HDVXUHGUHVLVWDQFH!UHVSRQVHWKUHVKROG
• Notes on programming
Notice Only the bits 0+2 or 3+5 are relevant for the purposes of evaluation in the process input image. You can use bits 0+2 or 3+5 to monitor the temperature of a motor, for example. Bits 0+2 or 3+5 in the process input image does not have a retentive function. Make sure at parameter assignment that motor start-up is controlled (by means of an acknowledgment), for example. Bits 0+2 or 3+5 cannot be set at the same time, but set one after the other. For security reasons, always evaluate the diagnostic inputs of the 2AI RTD High Feature because measurement is not possible when the EM is removed, when the power supply to the EM has failed, or in the event of a wire break or short-circuit of the measuring lines.
12-84
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)
Example The diagram below shows the temperature pattern and the switching points belonging to it.
7>r&@
1RUPDO UDQJH
12.17
12.17
3UHZDUQLQJ UDQJH
$GGUHVVDEOHUDQJH
3UHZDUQLQJ UDQJH
1RUPDO UDQJH
2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)
Order number 6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0
Features • 2 inputs for thermocouple or voltage measurement • Input ranges: – Voltage measurement: ± 80 mV, resolution 15 bits + sign – Thermocouples: Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, resolution 15 bits + sign • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves • Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VACSS
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-85
Analog electronic modules 12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard for the different terminal modules: Voltage measurement as for 2AI U ST. Table 12-47 Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
70(6$DQG'$7&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 M+: Measuring line positive
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
$8;HJ3(
$
$
$8;HJ3(
M-: Measuring line negative Mana: Ground of the module
$8;PXVWEH DVVLJQHGWR3(
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG$,7&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Measuring line positive
&+
&+
Mana: Ground of the module Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF
M-: Measuring line negative
70(6DQG$,7&6WDQGDUG
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 M+: Measuring line positive M-: Measuring line negative
&+
12-86
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
Mana: Ground of the module
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0) View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6$DQG'$7&6WDQGDUG
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+: Measuring line positive
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
$
$
QF $8; $8;
$
$
M-: Measuring line negative Mana: Ground of the module Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
$8; $8;
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
3 3
/
$'&
9
0 $1$
0
Figure 12-17 Block diagram of the 2AI TC Standard
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
No
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Shielded
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Max. 50 m
12-87
Analog electronic modules 12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0) Voltages, currents, potentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Isolation •
Between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between the channels and load voltage L+
Yes
•
Between the channels
No
•
Between the channels and 24 V supply Yes voltage
Permissible potential difference •
Between MANA and the central grounding point (Uiso)
75 VDC/60 VAC
•
Between the inputs and MANA (UCM)
2 VACSS
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption •
From load voltage L+
max. 30mA
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 0.6 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Diagnostic functions •
Group error
Red "SF" LED
•
Diagnostic functions readable
Yes Analog value generation
Measuring principle
Integrative
Integration time/conversion time/resolution per channel:
12-88
•
Integration time can be assigned parameters
Yes
•
Interference frequency suppression in Hz
60
50
•
Integration time in milliseconds
16,7
20
•
Basic conversion time including Integration time in milliseconds
55
65
•
Additional conversion time for wire break check diagnosis in ms
20
20
•
Cycle time in ms
Number of active channels per module x conversion time
•
Resolution (including overrange)
15 bits plus sign
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0) Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) • •
Common-mode interference (USS) Series-mode interference (peak interference value < rated value of input range)
Min. 90 dB Min. 70 dB
Crosstalk between the inputs
Min. -50 dB
Operational limit (over the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)1
±0,6%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range)1
±0,4%
Temperature error (with reference to the input range)
± 0,005%/K
Linearity error (with reference to the input range)
±0,01%
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range)
±0,05%
Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance •
Voltage
± 80 mV/min. 1 MΩ
•
Thermocouple
Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T/min. 1 MΩ
Permitted input voltage (destruction limit)
±10 V, continuous
Connection of the sensors •
For measuring voltage
Possible
Characteristic curve linearization
Yes, can be assigned parameters for type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T to IEC 584
Temperature compensation •
Internal temperature compensation
•
External temperature compensation by Possible, one external compensating box per channel looping a compensating box into the measuring circuit
•
External compensation by means of temperature value obtained at an analog module of the same ET 200S station
Smoothing of the measured values
Not possible
Yes
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time
Medium 32 x cycle time Strong 64 x cycle time 1
for Type N: from -150°C, Typ B: from 200°C, Typ T: from -230°C
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-89
Analog electronic modules 12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)
Compensation of thermocouples with a compensating box As well as the error limits of the 2AI TC Standard electronic module (see Table "Technical specifications" in this chapter) you must also take the accuracy of the compensating box into account.
Compensation of thermocouples with a Pt100 on the 2AI RTD Standard Factors affecting the accuracy of the temperature measurement Wiring rules
Ensure there is good thermal contact between the reference junction and the Pt100 used for compensation. We recommend that you wire the Pt100 with a four-conductor connection.
Additional technical specifications The accuracy of the thermal resistor (Pt100) used for on the error limits of the 2AI TC compensation must be taken into account.* The error of the measurement input (2AI RTD Standard) used for compensation must be taken into account.* * In the case of thermocouples with a characteristic curve with a very shallow gradient, these errors can lead to a major measurement discrepancy. For the following thermocouples, this causes a limitation of the input range of the thermocouples in which the accuracy information in the manual applies: • Type N: -100°C • Type K: -230°C • Type E: -230°C
See also 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) (Page 12-37)
12-90
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)
12.18
2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)
12.18
Order number 6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0
Features • 2 inputs for thermocouple or voltage measurement • Input ranges: – Voltage measurement: ± 80 mV, resolution 15 bits + sign – Thermocouples: Types E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, C, resolution 15 bits + sign • 2AI TC High-Feature is inserted on the TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves • Permitted common-mode voltage 140 VDC/100 VAC • Internal reference junction in connection with TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT
Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature for the TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules Voltage measurement as for 2AI U ST. Table 12-48 Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature View
Pin assignment
Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 2
70(6$DQG$,7&+LJK)HDWXUH
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 6 M+: Measuring line positive M-: Measuring line negative
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-91
Analog electronic modules 12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ
3 3
/
$'&
9
0
0 $1$
,QWHUQDO UHIHU HQFH MXQFWLRQ
9
70(6$7
Figure 12-18 Block diagram of the 2AI TC High Feature
Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules
Supports isochronous operation
No
Number of inputs
2
Length of cable •
Shielded
Max. 50 m Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Isolation •
Between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
•
Between the channels and load voltage L+
Yes
•
Between the channels
No
•
Between the channels and 24 V supply voltage
Yes
Permissible potential difference •
Between MANA and the central grounding 75 VDC/60 VAC point (Uiso)
•
Between the inputs and MANA (UCM)
Insulation tested
12-92
140 VDC/100 VAC 500 VDC
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Analog electronic modules 12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) Current consumption •
From load voltage L+
Max. 30 mA
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 0.6 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Diagnostic functions •
Group error
•
Diagnostic functions readable
Red "SF" LED Yes Analog value generation
Measuring principle
Integrative
Integration time/conversion time/resolution per channel: •
Integration time can be assigned parameters
Yes
•
Interference frequency suppression in Hz
60
50
•
Integration time in milliseconds
16,7
20
•
Basic conversion time including Integration time in milliseconds
66
80
•
Additional conversion time for wire break 5 check diagnosis in ms
•
Cycle time in ms
•
Resolution (including overrange)
5
Number of active channels per module x conversion time 15 bits plus sign
Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) • •
Common-mode interference (USS) Series-mode interference
Min. 90dB min. 70dB
peak interference value < rated value of input range) Crosstalk between the inputs
Min. -50 dB
Operational limit for ±80 mV (over the entire temperature range with reference to the input range)
±0,1%
Operational limit for thermocouples (over the entire temperature range with reference to the input range)1
± 1.5 K
Operational limit for thermocouple type C (in ± 7 K the entire temperature range with reference to the input range)1 Basic error limit for ±80 mV (operational limit at 25° C with reference to the input range)
±0,05%
Basic error limit for thermocouples (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range)1
±1K
Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
12-93
Analog electronic modules 12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) Basic error limit for thermocouples of type C ± 5 K (operational limit at 25° C with reference to the input range)1 Temperature error (with reference to the ± 0,005%/K input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input ±0,01% range) Repeatability ±0,05% (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range) Overall error limits using internal compensation • Operational limit (in the entire ± 2.5 K temperature range with a static, thermal state, ambient temperature change 70 °C is reached in the cable or at the cable entry of this housing under operating conditions, or if a temperature of > 80 °C can be reached at the junction of the conductors under operating conditions, the temperature-related properties of the cables must correspond to the temperatures actually measured. 3. The cable entries used must comply with the required IP degree of protection and Section 7.2 (in accordance with EN 50021). 4. All devices (including switches, etc.) that are connected to the inputs and outputs of SIMATIC systems must be approved for EEx nA or EEx nC explosion protection. 5. Steps must be taken to ensure that the rated voltage through transients cannot be exceeded by more than 40 %. 6. Ambient temperature range: 0° C to 60° C 7. A sign containing the following warning must be put up inside the housing in an easily visible position when the housing is opened:
!
Warning The housing can only be opened for a short time (e.g. for visual diagnostics). If you do this, do not operate any switches, remove or install any modules or disconnect any electrical cables (plug-in connections). You can disregard this warning if you know that the atmosphere is not hazardous (i.e. there is no risk of explosion).
List of Approved Subassemblies/Modules You will find the list of approved subassemblies/modules under the ID 13702947 on the Internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/.
6
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Français
Utilisation des modules / coupleurs dans la zone à risque d'explosion 2 Zone 2 Les environnements à risque d'explosion sont répartis en zones. Les zones se distinguent par la probabilité de présence d'une atmosphère explosive. Zone
Risque d'explosion
Exemple
2
Formation rare et brève d'une atmosphère gazeuse explosive
Environnement de raccords à joints plats dans le cas de conduites dans des locaux fermés
Zone sûre
Non
x A l'extérieur de la zone 2 x Utilisation standard de périphérie décentralisée
Vous trouverez ci-après des remarques importantes pour l'installation de la station de périphérie décentralisée des modules / coupleurs dans la zone à risque d'explosion.
Informations complémentaires Des informations complémentaires sur les modules / cartouches se trouvent dans le manuel correspondant.
Lieu de fabrication / Homologation II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
Numéro de contrôle :
selon EN 50021 : 1999
voir tableau
Lieu de fabrication
Modules / coupleurs
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 Modules à sécurité intrinsèque 92224 Amberg ET 200S Germany S7-300 ET 200M Couplage de bus DP/PA Répéteur de diagnostic Modules à sécurité intrinsèque S7-300 Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
Numéro de contrôle KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
7
Français
Nota Les modules / coupleurs homologués II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 ne peuvent être utilisés que dans des systèmes SIMATIC de catégorie 3.
Entretien Si une réparation est nécessaire, le module / coupleur concerné doit être expédié au lieu de production. La réparation ne doit être effectuée qu'en ce lieu.
Conditions particulières 1. Les modules / coupleurs doivent être installés dans une armoire ou un boîtier métallique. Ceux-ci doivent assurer au moins l'indice de protection IP 54. Il faut alors tenir compte des conditions d'environnement dans lesquelles l'appareil est installé. Le boîtier doit faire l’objet d’une déclaration de conformité du fabricant pour la zone 2 (selon EN 50021). 2. Si dans les conditions d’exploitation, une température > 70 °C est atteinte au niveau du câble ou de l’entrée du câble dans ce boîtier, ou bien si la température au niveau de la dérivation des conducteurs peut être > 80 °C, les capacités de résistance thermique des câbles doivent corespondre aux températures effectivement mesurées. 3. Les entrées de câbles utilisées doivent avoir le niveau de protection IP exigé et être conformes au paragraphe 7.2 (selon EN 50021). 4. Tous les appareillages (y compris les interrupteurs, etc.) raccordés aux entrées et sorties de systèmes SIMATIC doivent être homologués pour la protection antidéflagrante type EEx nA ou EEx nC. 5. Il faut prendre des mesures pour que la tension nominale ne puisse pas être dépassée de plus de 40% sous l’influence de transitoires. 6. Plage de température ambiante : 0° C à 60° C 7. A l’intérieur du boîtier, il faut placer, à un endroit bien visible après ouverture, une plaquette comportant l’avertissement suivant :
!
Avertissement Ouvir le boîtier le moins longtemps possible, par exemple pour effectuer un diagnostic visuel. Ce faisant, n’actionnez aucun commutateur, ne déconnectez aucun module et ne débanchez pas de câbles électriques (connexions). Le respect de cet avertissement n’est pas impératif s’il est certain que l’environnement ne présente pas de risque d’explosion. Liste des modules / coupleurs homologués Vous trouverez sur Internet la liste des modules / coupleurs homologués : http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ référence ID 13702947.
8
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Español
Aplicación de los módulos / tarjetas en áreas con peligro de explosión, zona 2 Zona 2 Las áreas con peligro de explosión se clasifican en zonas. Las zonas se diferencian según la probabilidad de la existencia de una atmósfera capaz de sufrir una explosión. Zona 2
Peligro de explosión
Ejemplo
La atmósfera explosiva de gas Áreas alrededor de uniones abridadas con juntas sólo se presenta rara vez y muy planas en tuberías en locales cerrados brevemente x fuera de la zona 2
Área segura no
x Aplicaciones estándar de la periferia descentralizada
A continuación encontrará importantes informaciones para la instalación de los módulos / tarjetas en áreas con peligro de explosión.
Otras informaciones Encontrará otras informaciones relativas a los módulos / tarjetas en el Manual correspondiente.
Lugar de fabricación / Homologación II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
Número de comprobación:
según norma EN 50021 : 1999
véase tabla
Lugar de fabricación
Módulos / tarjetas
Número de comprobación
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-SiemensStraße 50 92224 Amberg Germany
ET 200S Grupos ET 200S a prueba de fallos
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238 X
S7-300 ET 200M Acoplamiento de bus DP/PA Repetidor de diagnóstico Grupos S7-300 a prueba de fallos
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096 X
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125 X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228 X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226 X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
9
Español
Nota Los módulos / tarjetas con la homologación II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pueden utilizarse únicamente en los sistemas SIMATIC de la categoría de equipo 3.
Mantenimiento Para una reparación se ha de remitir el módulo / tarjeta afectado al lugar de fabricación. Sólo allí se puede realizar la reparación.
Condiciones especiales 1. Los módulos / tarjetas se han de montar en un armario eléctrico de distribución o en una carcasa metálica. Éstos deben garantizar como mínimo el grado de protección IP 54 (conforme a EN 60529). Para ello se han de tener en cuenta las condiciones ambientales, en las cuales se instala el equipo. La caja deberá contar con una declaración del fabricante para la zona 2 (conforme a EN 50021). 2. Si durante la operación se alcanzara una temperatura > 70° C en el cable o la entrada de cables de esta caja o bien una temperatura > 80° C en la bifurcación de hilos, deberán adaptarse las propiedades térmicas de los cables a las temperaturas medidas efectivamente. 3. Las entradas de cable utilizadas deben cumplir el grado de protección IP exigido y lo expuesto en el apartado 7.2 (conforme a EN 50021). 4. Todos los dispositivos –inclusive interruptores, etc.– conectados a las entradas y salidas de sistemas SIMATIC deben estar homologados para la protección contra explosiones del tipo EEx nA o EEx nC. 5. Es necesario adoptar las medidas necesarias para evitar que la tensión nominal pueda rebasar en más del 40 % debido a efectos transitorios. 6. Margen de temperatura ambiente: 0° C hasta 60° C 7. Dentro de la caja deberá colocarse en un lugar perfectamente visible tras su apertura un rótulo con la siguiente advertencia:
!
Precaución Abrir la caja sólo brevemente, p.ej. para el diagnóstico visual. Durante este tiempo Ud. no deberá activar ningún interruptor, desenchufar o enchufar módulos ni separar conductores eléctricos (conexiones enchufables). Esta advertencia puede ignorarse si Ud. sabe que en la atmósfera existente no hay peligro de explosión.
Lista de los módulos / tarjetas homologados En la internet hallará Ud. una lista con los módulos / tarjetas homologados: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ bajo el ID de asignación 13702947.
10
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
tIaliano
Impiego delle unità/moduli nell'area a pericolo di esplosione zona 2 Zona 2 Le aree a pericolo di esplosione vengono suddivise in zone. Le zone vengono distinte secondo la probabilità della presenza di un'atmosfera esplosiva. Zona
Pericolo di esplosione
Esempio
2
L'atmosfera esplosiva si presente solo raramente e brevemente
Aree intorno a collegamenti a flange con guarnizioni piatte nelle condotte in ambienti chiusi
Area sicura
No
x Al di fuori della zona 2 x Applicazioni standard di periferia decentrata
Qui di seguito sono riportate delle avvertenze importanti per l'installazione delle unità/moduli nell'area a pericolo di esplosione.
Ulteriori informazioni Ulteriori informazioni sulle unità/moduli si trovano nel corrispondente manuale.
Luogo di produzione / Omologazione II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
secondo EN 50021 : 1999
Numero di controllo: ve di tabella Luogo di produzione
Unità/moduli
Numero di controllo
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany
ET 200S Unità ad elevata sicurezza ET 200S
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200M Accoppiamento di bus DP/PA Repeater di diagnostica Unità ad elevata sicurezza S7-300
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
11
tIaliano
Avvertenza Le unità/moduli con l'omologazione II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 possono essere impiegati solo nei sistemi SIMATIC della categoria di apparecchiature 3.
Manutenzione Per una riparazione, le unità/i moduli interessati devono essere inviati al luogo di produzione. La riparazione può essere effettuata solo lì.
Condizioni particolari 1. Le unità/i moduli devono essere montati in un armadio elettrico o in un contenitore metallico. Questi devono assicurare almeno il tipo di protezione IP 54. In questo caso bisogna tenere conto delle condizioni ambientali nelle quali l'apparecchiatura viene installata. Per il contenitore deve essere presente una dichiarazione del costruttore per la zona 2 (secondo EN 50021). 2. Se nei cavi o nel loro punto di ingresso in questo contenitore viene raggiunta in condizioni di esercizio una temperatura > 70 °C o se in condizioni di esercizio la temperatura nella derivazione dei fili può essere > 80 °C, le caratteristiche di temperatura dei cavi devono essere conformi alla temperatura effettivamente misurata. 3. Gli ingressi dei cavi usati devono essere conformi al tipo di protezione richiesto e alla sezione 7.2 (secondo EN 50021). 4. Tutte le apparecchiature, inclusi interruttori, ecc. che vengono collegati agli ingressi/uscite di sistemi SIMATIC, devono essere stati omologati per la protezione da esplosione tipo EEx nA o EEx nC. 5. Devono essere prese delle misure per evitare che la tensione nominale possa essere superata per più del 40% da parte di transienti. 6. Campo termico ambientale: da 0° C a 60° C 7. All’interno del contenitore va apportata, in un luogo ben visibile dopo l’apertura, una targhetta con il seguente avvertimento:
!
Attenzione Il contenitore può rimanere aperto solo per breve tempo, ad esempio per una diagnostica a vista. In tal caso non azionare alcun interruttore, non disinnestare o innestare unità e non staccare connessioni elettriche (connettori). Non è necessario tenere conto di questo avvertimento se è noto che non c’è un’atmosfera a rischio di esplosione
Elenco delle unità/moduli omologati L'elenco con le unità/moduli omologati si trova in Internet al sito: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ all’ID di voce 13702947.
12
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Nederlands
Gebruik van de componenten/modulen in het explosief gebied zone 2 Zone 2 Explosieve gebieden worden ingedeeld in zones. Bij de zones wordt onderscheiden volgens de waarschijnlijkheid van de aanwezigheid van een explosieve atmosfeer. Zone
Explosiegevaar
Voorbeeld
2
Een explosieve gasatmosfeer treedt maar zelden op en voor korte duur
Gebieden rond flensverbindingen met pakkingen bij buisleidingen in gesloten vertrekken
Veilig gebied
neen
x Buiten de zone 2 x Standaardtoepassingen van decentrale periferie
Hierna vindt u belangrijke aanwijzingen voor de installatie van de componenten/modulen in het explosief gebied.
Verdere informatie In het bijhorende handboek vindt u verdere informatie over de componenten/modulen
Productieplaats / Vergunning II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
conform EN 50021 : 1999
Keuringsnummer: zie tabel
Productieplaats Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-SiemensStrasse 50 92224 Amberg Germany
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
Componenten/modulen
Keuringsnummer
ET 200S ET 200S tegen fouten beveiligde componenten
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200 M Buskoppeling DP/PA Diagnoserepeater S7-300 tegen fouten beveiligde componenten
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
13
Nederlands
Opmerking Componenten/modulen met de vergunning II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 mogen slechts worden gebruikt in SIMATIC-systemen van de apparaatcategorie 3.
Instandhouding Voor een reparatie moeten de betreffende componenten/modulen naar de plaats van vervaardiging worden gestuurd. Alleen daar mag de reparatie worden uitgevoerd.
Speciale voorwaarden 1. Componenten/modulen moeten worden ingebouwd in een schakelkast of in een behuizing van metaal. Deze moeten minstens de veiligheidsgraad IP 54 waarborgen. Hierbij dient rekening te worden gehouden met de omgevingsvoorwaarden waarin het apparaat wordt geïnstalleerd. Voor de behuizing dient een verklaring van de fabrikant voor zone 2 te worden ingediend (volgens EN 50021). 2. Als aan de kabel of aan de kabelinvoering van deze behuizing onder bedrijfsomstandigheden een temperatuur wordt bereikt > 70 °C of als onder bedrijfsomstandigheden de temperatuur aan de adervertakking > 80 °C kan zijn, moeten de temperatuureigenschappen van de kabel overeenstemmen met de werkelijk gemeten temperaturen. 3. De aangebrachte kabelinvoeringen moeten de vereiste IP-veiligheidsgraad hebben en in overeenstemming zijn met alinea 7.2 (volgens EN 50021). 4. Alle apparaten, schakelaars enz. inbegrepen, die worden aangesloten op de inen uitgangen van SIMATIC-systemen, moeten zijn goedgekeurd voor de explosiebeveiliging type EEx nA of EEx nC. 5. Er dienen maatregelen te worden getroffen, zodat de nominale spanning door transiënten met niet meer dan 40 % kan worden overschreden. 6. Omgevingstemperatuurbereik: 0° C tot 60° C 7. Binnen de behuizing dient op een na het openen goed zichtbare plaats een bord te worden aangebracht met de volgende waarschuwing:
!
Waarschuwing De behuizing mag slechts voor korte tijd worden geopend, bijv. voor een visuele diagnose. Bedien hierbij geen schakelaar, trek of steek geen modulen en ontkoppel geen elektrische leidingen (steekverbindingen). Deze waarschuwing kan buiten beschouwing blijven, indien bekend is dat er geen explosieve atmosfeer heerst.
Lijst van de toegelaten componenten/modulen De lijst met de toegelaten componenten/modulen vindt u in het internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ onder de bijdrage-ID 13702947.
14
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Dansk
Brug af komponenter/moduler i det eksplosionsfarlige område zone 2 Zone 2 Eksplosionsfarlige områder inddeles i zoner. Zonerne adskiller sig indbyrdes efter hvor sandsynligt det er, at der er en eksplosiv atmosfære. Zone
Eksplosionsfare
Eksempel
2
Eksplosiv gasatmosfære optræder kun sjældent og varer kort
Områder rundt om flangeforbindelser med flade pakninger ved rørledninger i lukkede rum
Sikkert område
Nej
x Uden for zone 2 x Standardanvendelser decentral periferi
I det følgende findes vigtige henvisninger vedr. installation af komponenter/moduler i det eksplosionsfarlige område.
Yderligere informationer Yderligere informationer om komponenterne/modulerne findes i den pågældende manual.
Produktionssted / Godkendelse II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
efter EN 50021 : 1999
Kontrolnummer: se tabel Produktionssted Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
Komponenter/moduler
Kontrolnummer
ET 200S ET 200S fejlsikre komponenter
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200M Buskobling DP/PA Diagnoserepeater S7-300 fejlsikre komponenter
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Bemærk Komponenter/moduler med godkendelsen II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 må kun monteres i SIMATIC-systemer for udstyrskategori 3.
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
15
Dansk
Vedligeholdelse Hvis de pågældende komponenter/moduler skal repareres, bedes De sende dem til produktionsstedet. Reparation må kun udføres der.
Særlige betingelser 1. Komponenterne/modulerne skal monteres i et kontrolskab eller et metalkabinet. Disse skal mindst kunne sikre beskyttelsesklasse IP 54. I denne forbindelse skal der tages højde for de omgivelsestemperaturer, i hvilke udstyret er installeret. Der skal være udarbejdet en erklæring fra fabrikanten for kabinettet for zone 2 (iht. EN 50021). 2. Hvis kablet eller kabelindføringen på dette hus når op på en temperatur på > 70 °C under driftsbetingelser eller hvis temperaturen på åreforegreningen kan være > 80 °C under driftsbetingelser, skal kablernes temperaturegenskaber stemme overens med de temperaturer, der rent faktisk måles. 3. De benyttede kabelindføringer skal være i overensstemmelse med den krævede IP-beskyttelsestype og afsnittet 7.2 (iht. EN 50021). 4. Alle apparater, inkl. kontakter osv., der forbindes med ind- og udgangene til SIMATIC-systemerne, skal være godkendt til eksplosionsbeskyttelse af type EEx nA eller EEx nC. 5. Der skal træffes foranstaltninger, der sørger for, at den nominelle spænding via transienter ikke kan overskrides mere end 40 %. 6. Omgivelsestemperaturområde: 0° C til 60° C 7. I kabinettet skal der anbringes et skilt, der skal kunne ses, når kabinettet åbnes. Dette skilt skal have følgende advarsel:
!
Advarsel Kabinettet må kun åbnes i kort tid, f.eks. til visuel diagnose. Tryk i denne forbindelse ikke på kontakter, træk eller isæt ikke komponenter og afbryd ikke elektriske ledninger (stikforbindelser). Der skal ikke tages højde for denne advarsel, hvis man ved, at der ikke er nogen eksplosionsfarlig atmosfære.
Liste over godkendte komponenter/moduler Listen med de godkendte komponenter/moduler findes på internettet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ under bidrags-ID 13702947.
16
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Suomi
Rakenneryhmien/moduulien käyttö räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyöhyke 2 Vyöhyke 2 Räjähdysvaarannetut alueet jaetaan vyöhykkeisiin. Vyöhykkeet erotellaan räjähdyskelpoisen ilmakehän olemassa olon todennäköisyyden mukaan. Vyöhyke
Räjähdysvaara
Esimerkki
2
Räjähtävä kaasuilmakehä ilmaantuu vain harvoin ja lyhytaikaisesti
Alueet putkistojen lattatiivisteillä varustuilla laippaliitoksilla suljetuissa tiloissa
turvallinen alue
ei
x vyöhykkeen 2 ulkopuolella x Hajautetun ulkopiirin vakiosovellukset
Seuraavasta löydätte tärkeitä ohjeita rakenneryhmien/moduulien asennukseen räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla.
Lisätietoja Lisätietoja rakenneryhmiin/moduuleihin löydätte niihin kuuluvista ohjekirjasta.
Valmistuspaikka / Hyväksyntä II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
EN 50021 mukaan: 1999
Tarkastusnumero: katso taulukko Valmistuspaikka
Rakenneryhmät/moduulit
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S läpi-iskuvarmat 92224 Amberg rakenneryhmät Germany S7-300 ET 200M Väyläkytkin DP/PA Dignoositoistin S7-300 läpi-iskuvarmat rakenneryhmät Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
Tarkastusnumero KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Ohje Rakenneryhmät/moduulit hyväksynnän II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 kanssa saadaan käyttää ainoastaan laitekategorian 3 SIMATIC-järjestelmissä. Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
17
Suomi
Kunnossapito Korjausta varten täytyy kyseinen rakenneryhmä/moduuli lähettää valmistuspaikkaan. Korjaus voidaan suorittaa ainoastaan siellä.
Erityiset vaatimukset 1. Rakenneryhmät/moduulit täytyy asentaa kytkentäkaappiin tai metalliseen koteloon. Näiden täytyy olla vähintään kotelointiluokan IP 54 mukaisia. Tällöin on huomioitava ympäristöolosuhteet, johon laite asennetaan. Kotelolle täytyy olla valmistajaselvitys vyöhykettä 2 varten (EN 50021 mukaan). 2. Kun johdolla tai tämän kotelon johdon sisäänviennillä saavutetaan > 70 °C lämpötila tai kun käyttöolosuhteissa lämpötila voi piuhajaotuksella olla > 80 °C, täytyy johdon lämpötilaominaisuuksien vastata todellisesti mitattuja lämpötiloja. 3. Käytettyjen johtojen sisäänohjauksien täytyy olla vaaditun IP-kotelointiluokan ja kohdan 7.2 (EN 50021 mukaan) mukaisia. 4. Kaikkien laitteiden, kytkimet jne. mukaan lukien, jotka liitetään SIMATICjärjestelmien tuloille ja lähdöille, täytyy olla hyväksyttyjä tyypin EEx nA tai EEx nC räjähdyssuojausta varten. 5. Toimenpiteet täytyy suorittaa, ettei nimellisjännite voi transienttien kautta ylittyä enemmän kuin 40 %. 6. Ympäristölämpötila-alue: 0° C ... 60° C 7. Kotelon sisälle, avauksen jälkeen näkyvälle paikalle, on kiinnitettävä kilpi, jossa on seuraava varoitus:
!
Varoitus Kotelo saadaan avata ainoastaan lyhyeksi ajaksi, esim. visuaalista diagnoosia varten. Älä tällöin käytä mitään kytkimiä, vedä tai liitä mitään rakenneryhmiä, äläkä erota mitään sähköjohtoja (pistoliittimiä). Tätä varoitusta ei tarvitse huomioida, kun on tiedossa, että minkäänlaista räjähdysvaarannettua ilmakehää ei ole olemassa.
Hyväksyttyjen rakenneryhmien/moduulien lista Lista hyväksytyistä rakennesarjoista/moduuleista löytyy internetistä osoitteesta: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ käyttäjätunnuksella 13702947.
18
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Svenska
Användning av komponentgrupperna/modulerna i explosionsriskområde zon 2 Zon 2 Explosionsriskområden delas in i zoner. Zonerna delas in enligt sannolikheten att en atmosfär med explosionsfara föreligger. Zon
Explosionsfara
Exempel
2
Explosiv gasatmosfär uppstår endast sällan eller kortvarigt
Områden kring flänsförbindelser med packningar vid rörledningar i slutna utrymmen
Säkert område
Nej
x Utanför zon 2 x Standardanvändning av decentral periferi
Nedan följer viktiga anvisningar om installationen av komponentgrupperna/modulerna i ett explosionsriskområde.
Ytterligare information Ytterligare information om komponentgrupperna/modulerna finner du i tillhörande handbok.
Tillverkningsort / Godkännande II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
enligt EN 50021 : 1999
Kontrollnummer: se tabell Tillverkningsort Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
Komponentgrupper/ moduler
Kontrollnummer
ET 200S ET 200S Felsäkra komponentgrupper
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200M Busskoppling DP/PA Diagnosrepeater S7-300 Felsäkra komponentgrupper
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
19
Svenska
Anvisning Komponentgrupper/moduler med godkännande II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 får endast användas i SIMATIC-system i apparatgrupp 3.
Underhåll Vid reparation måste den aktuella komponentgrupperna/modulerna insändas till tillverkaren. Reparationer får endast genomföras där.
Särskilda villkor 1. Komponentgrupperna/modulerna måste monteras i ett kopplingsskåp eller metallhus. Dessa måste minst vara av skyddsklass IP 54. Därvid ska omgivningsvillkoren där enheten installeras beaktas. För kåpan måste en tillverkardeklaration för zon 2 föreligga (enligt EN 50021). 2. Om en temperatur på > 70°C uppnås vid husets kabel resp kabelinföring under driftvillkor eller om temperaturen vid trådförgreningen kan vara > 80°C under driftvillkor, måste kabelns temperaturegenskaper överensstämma med den verkligen uppmätta temperaturen. 3. De använda kabelinföringarna måste uppfylla kraven i det krävda IPskyddsutförandet och i avsnitt 7.2 (enligt EN 50021). 4. Alla apparater, inklusive brytare osv, som ansluts till in- och utgångarna på SIMATIC-system, måste vara godkända för explosionsskydd av typ EEx nA eller EEx nC. 5. Åtgärder måste vidtas så, att märkspänningen ej kan överskridas med mer än 40 % genom transienter. 6. Omgivningstemperatur: 0° C till 60° C 7. När huset öppnats ska en skylt med följande varning monteras på ett tydligt synligt ställe huset:
!
Varning Huset får endast öppnas under kort tid, t ex för visuell diagnos. Använd därvid inga brytare, lossa eller anslut inga enheter och frånskilj inga elektriska ledningar (insticksanslutningar). Ingen hänsyn måste tas till denna varning om det är säkert att det inte råder någon explosionsfarlig atmosfär.
Lista över godkända komponentgrupper/moduler Lista över godkända komponentgrupper/moduler finns på Internetadressen: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ under bidrags-ID 13702947.
20
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Português
Uso de grupos construtivos/módulos em área exposta ao perigo de explosão 2 Zona 2 As áreas expostas ao perigo de explosão são divididas em zonas. As zonas são diferenciadas de acordo com a probabilidade da existência de uma atmosfera explosiva. Zona 2
Perigo de explosão Só raramente e por um breve período de tempo surgem atmosferas explosivas
Exemplo Áreas em torno de ligações flangeadas com vedações chatas em tubulações em recintos fechados x fora da zona 2
Área segura não
x Aplicações descentralizadas de periferia descentralizada
A seguir, o encontrará avisos importantes para a instalação de grupos construtivos/ módulos em área exposta ao perigo de explosão.
Mais informações Para obter mais informações sobre grupos construtivos/módulos, consulte o respectivo manual.
Local de produção / Licença II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
seg. EN 50021 : 1999
Número de ensaio: veja a tabela
Local de produção Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Alemanha
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Alemanha
Grupos construtivos/módulos
N° de ensaio
ET 200S ET 200S Grupos construtivos protegidos contra erro
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200M Acoplador bus DP/PA Repetidor de diagnóstico S7-300 Grupos construtivos protegidos contra erro
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
21
Português
Aviso Os grupos construtivos/módulos com a licença II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 só podem ser aplicados em sistemas SIMATIC da categoria de aparelho 3.
Reparo Os grupos construtivos/módulos em questão devem ser remetidos para o local de produção a fim de que seja realizado o reparo. Apenas lá deve ser efetuado o reparo.
Condições especiais 1. Os grupos construtivos/módulos devem ser montados em um armário de distribuição ou em uma caixa metálica. Estes devem garantir no mínimo o tipo de protecção IP 54. Durante este trabalho deverão ser levados em consideração as condições locais, nas quais o aparelho será instalado. Para a caixa deverá ser apresentada uma declaração do fabricante para a zona 2 (de acordo com EN 50021). 2. Caso no cabo ou na entrada do cabo desta carcaça sob as condições operacionais seja atingida uma temperatura de > 70 °C, ou caso sob condições operacionais a temperatura na ramificação do fio poderá atingir > 80 °C, as caraterísticas de temperatura deverão corresponder às temperaturas realmente medidas. 3. As entradas de cabo utilizadas devem corresponder ao tipo exigido de protecção IP e à seção 7.2 (de acordo com o EN 50021). 4. Todos os aparelhos, inclusive as chaves, etc., que estejam conectadas em entradas e saídas dos sistemas SIMATIC devem possuir a licença para a protecção de explosão do tipo EEx nA ou EEx nC. 5. Precisam ser tomadas medidas para que a tensão nominal através de transitórios não possa ser ultrapassada em mais que 40 %. 6. Área de temperatura ambiente: 0° C até 60° C 7. No âmbito da carcaça deve ser colocada, após a abertura, em um ponto bem visível uma placa com a seguinte advertência:
!
Advertência A carcaça deve ser aberta apenas por um breve período de tempo, por ex. para diagnóstico visual. Não acione nenhum interruptor, não retire ou conecte nenhum módulo e não separe nenhum fio elétrico (ligações de tomada). Esta advertência poderá ser ignorada caso se saiba que não há nenhuma atmosfera sujeita ao perigo de explosão.
Lista dos grupos construtivos/módulos autorizados A lista com os grupos construtivos/módulos autorizados encontram-se na Internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ sob o número de ID 13702947.
22
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
ȋȡȒıȘ IJȦȞ įȠµȚțȫȞ ıȣȖțȡȠIJȘµȐIJȦȞ/µȠȞȐįȦȞ ıİ İʌȚțȓȞįȣȞȘ ȖȚĮ ȑțȡȘȟȘ ʌİȡȚȠȤȒ, ȗȫȞȘ 2 ǽȫȞȘ 2 ȅȚ İʌȚțȓȞįȣȞİȢ ȖȚĮ ȑțȡȘȟȘ ʌİȡȚȠȤȑȢ ȤȦȡȓȗȠȞIJĮȚ ıİ ȗȫȞİȢ. ȅȚ ȗȫȞİȢ įȚĮijȑȡȠȣȞ ıȪµijȦȞĮ µİ IJȘȞ ʌȚșĮȞȩIJȘIJĮ ȪʌĮȡȟȘȢ İȞȩȢ ȚțĮȞȠȪ ȖȚĮ ȑțȡȘȟȘ ʌİȡȚȕȐȜȜȠȞIJȠȢ. ǽȫȞȘ
ȀȓȞįȣȞȠȢ ȑțȡȘȟȘȢ
ȆĮȡȐįİȚȖµĮ
2
ǼțȡȘțIJȚțȩ ʌİȡȚȕȐȜȜȠȞ ĮİȡȓȠȣ ʌĮȡȠȣıȚȐȗİIJĮȚ µȩȞȠ ıʌȐȞȚĮ țĮȚ ȖȚĮ ıȪȞIJȠµȠ ȤȡȠȞȚțȩ įȚȐıIJȘµĮ
ȆİȡȚȠȤȑȢ ȖȪȡȦ Įʌȩ ijȜĮȞIJȗȦIJȑȢ ıȣȞįȑıİȚȢ µİ IJıȚµȠȪȤİȢ ıİ ıȦȜȘȞȫıİȚȢ ıİ țȜİȚıIJȠȪȢ ȤȫȡȠȣȢ
ǹıijĮȜȒȢ ʌİȡȚȠȤȒ
ȩȤȚ
x ǼțIJȩȢ IJȘȢ ȗȫȞȘȢ 2 x ȉȣʌȚțȑȢ İijĮȡµȠȖȑȢ ĮʌȠțİȞIJȡȦµȑȞȘȢ ʌİȡȚijȑȡİȚĮȢ
ȈIJȘ ıȣȞȑȤİȚĮ șĮ ȕȡİȓIJİ ıȘµĮȞIJȚțȑȢ ȣʌȠįİȓȟİȚȢ ȖȚĮ IJȘȞ İȖțĮIJȐıIJĮıȘ IJȦȞ įȠµȚțȫȞ ıȣȖțȡȠIJȘµȐIJȦȞ/µȠȞȐįȦȞ ıİ İʌȚțȓȞįȣȞȘ ȖȚĮ ȑțȡȘȟȘ ʌİȡȚȠȤȒ.
ǼʌȚʌȜȑȠȞ ʌȜȘȡȠijȠȡȓİȢ ǼʌȚʌȜȑȠȞ ʌȜȘȡȠijȠȡȓİȢ ȖȚĮ IJĮ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠIJȒµĮIJĮ/µȠȞȐįİȢ șĮ ȕȡİȓIJİ ıIJȠ ĮȞIJȓıIJȠȚȤȠ İȖȤİȚȡȓįȚȠ.
ȉȩʌȠȢ țĮIJĮıțİȣȒȢ / DZįİȚĮ II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 EN 50021 : 1999
ıȪµijȦȞĮ µİ IJȠ ʌȡȩIJȣʌȠ
ǹȡȚșµȩȢ İȜȑȖȤȠȣ: ȕȜȑʌİ ʌȓȞĮțĮ
ȉȩʌȠȢ țĮIJĮıțİȣȒȢ
ǻȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠIJȒµĮIJĮ/µȠȞȐįİȢ
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S ǹıijĮȜȒ ıİ ʌİȡȓʌIJȦıȘ 92224 Amberg ȕȜȐȕȘȢ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠIJȒµĮIJĮ Germany
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
ǹȚșµ. İȜȑȖȤȠȣ KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200M ȈȪȗİȣȟȘ įȚĮȪȜȠȣ DP/PA ǼʌĮȞĮȜȒʌIJȘȢ įȚȐȖȞȦıȘȢ S7-300 ǹıijĮȜȒ ıİ ʌİȡȓʌIJȦıȘ ȕȜȐȕȘȢ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠIJȒµĮIJĮ
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
23
ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
ȊʌȩįİȚȟȘ ȉĮ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠIJȒµĮIJĮ/ȠȚ µȠȞȐįİȢ µİ IJȘȞ ȐįİȚĮ II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 İʌȚIJȡȑʌİIJĮȚ ȞĮ IJȠʌȠșİIJȘșȠȪȞ µȩȞȠ ıİ ıȣıIJȒµĮIJĮ ĮȣIJȠµĮIJȚıµȠȪ SIMATIC IJȘȢ țĮIJȘȖȠȡȓĮȢ ıȣıțİȣȒȢ 3.
ȈȣȞIJȒȡȘıȘ īȚĮ µȚĮ İʌȚıțİȣȒ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ ıIJĮȜșȠȪȞ IJĮ ĮȞIJȓıIJȠȚȤĮ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠIJȒµĮIJĮ/µȠȞȐįİȢ ıIJȠȞ IJȩʌȠ țĮIJĮıțİȣȒȢ. ȂȩȞȠ İțİȓ İʌȚIJȡȑʌİIJĮȚ ȞĮ ȖȓȞİȚ Ș İʌȚıțİȣȒ.
ǿįȚĮȓIJİȡİȢ ʌȡȠȨʌȠșȑıİȚȢ 1. ȉĮ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠIJȒµĮIJĮ/µȠȞȐįİȢ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ İȞıȦµĮIJȦșȠȪȞ ıİ ȑȞĮ İȡµȐȡȚȠ ȗİȪȟȘȢ Ȓ ıİ ȑȞĮ µİIJĮȜȜȚțȩ ʌİȡȓȕȜȘµĮ. ǹȣIJȐ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ İȟĮıijĮȜȓȗȠȣȞ IJȠ ȜȚȖȩIJİȡȠ IJȠ ȕĮșµȩ ʌȡȠıIJĮıȓĮȢ IP 54 (țĮIJȐ EN 60529). Ȉİ ĮȣIJȒȞ IJȘȞ ʌİȡȓʌIJȦıȘ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ ȜȘijșȠȪȞ ȣʌȩȥȘ ȠȚ ʌİȡȚȕĮȜȜȠȞIJȚțȑȢ ıȣȞșȒțİȢ, ıIJȚȢ ȠʌȠȓİȢ șĮ İȖțĮIJĮıIJĮșİȓ Ș ıȣıțİȣȒ. īȚĮ IJȠ ʌİȡȓȕȜȘµĮ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ ʌȡȠȕȜȑʌİIJĮȚ įȒȜȦıȘ IJȠȣ țĮIJĮıțİȣĮıIJȒ ȖȚĮ IJȘ ȗȫȞȘ 2 (ıȪµijȦȞĮ µİ IJȠ ʌȡȩIJȣʌȠ EN 50021). 2. ǼȐȞ ıIJȠ țĮȜȫįȚȠ Ȓ ıIJȘȞ İȓıȠįȠ IJȠȣ țĮȜȦįȓȠȣ ĮȣIJȠȪ IJȠȣ ʌİȡȚȕȜȒµĮIJȠȢ țȐIJȦ Įʌȩ ıȣȞșȒțİȢ ȜİȚIJȠȣȡȖȓĮȢ Ș șİȡµȠțȡĮıȓĮ ȟİʌİȡȐıİȚ IJȠȣȢ 70 °C Ȓ ȩIJĮȞ țȐIJȦ Įʌȩ ıȣȞșȒțİȢ ȜİȚIJȠȣȡȖȓĮȢ Ș șİȡµȠțȡĮıȓĮ ıIJȘ įȚĮțȜȐįȦıȘ IJȠȣ ıȪȡµĮIJȠȢ µʌȠȡİȓ ȞĮ İȓȞĮȚ µİȖĮȜȪIJİȡȘ Įʌȩ 80 °C, ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȠȚ șİȡµȠțȡĮıȚĮțȑȢ ȚįȚȩIJȘIJİȢ IJȦȞ țĮȜȦįȓȦȞ ȞĮ IJĮȣIJȓȗȠȞIJĮȚ µİ IJȚȢ ʌȡĮȖµĮIJȚțȐ µİIJȡȘµȑȞİȢ șİȡµȠțȡĮıȓİȢ. 3. ȅȚ ȤȡȘıȚµȠʌȠȚȠȪµİȞİȢ İȚıȩįȠȚ țĮȜȦįȓȦȞ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ ıȣµµȠȡijȫȞȠȞIJĮȚ µİ IJȠ ȕĮșµȩ ʌȡȠıIJĮıȓĮȢ IP 54 ıIJȘȞ İȞȩIJȘIJĮ 7.2 (ıȪµijȦȞĮ µİ IJȠ ʌȡȩIJȣʌȠ EN 50021). 4. ǵȜİȢ ȠȚ ıȣıțİȣȑȢ, ıȣµʌİȡȚȜĮµȕĮȞȠµȑȞȦȞ įȚĮțȠʌIJȫȞ ț.Į., ʌȠȣ ıȣȞįȑȠȞIJĮȚ ıIJȚȢ İȚıȩįȠȣȢ țĮȚ İȟȩįȠȣȢ IJȦȞ ıȣıIJȘµȐIJȦȞ SIMATIC, ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ ijȑȡȠȣȞ İȖțȡȚµȑȞȘ ʌȡȠıIJĮıȓĮ țĮIJȐ ȑțȡȘȟȘȢ IJȪʌȠȣ EEx nA Ȓ EEx nC. 5. ȆȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ ȜȘijșȠȪȞ µȑIJȡĮ, ȞĮ µȘȞ µʌȠȡİȓ ȞĮ ȖȓȞİȚ ȣʌȑȡȕĮıȘ IJȘȢ ȠȞȠµĮıIJȚțȒȢ IJȐıȘȢ µȑıȦ ĮȚijȞȓįȚĮȢ µİIJĮȕȠȜȒȢ IJȘȢ IJȐıȘȢ ʌȐȞȦ Įʌȩ 40 %. 6. ȆİȡȚȠȤȒ șİȡµȠțȡĮıȓĮȢ ʌİȡȚȕȐȜȜȠȞIJȠȢ: 0° C ȑȦȢ 60° C 7. ȆȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ IJȠʌȠșİIJȘșİȓ µȑıĮ ıIJȠ ʌİȡȓȕȜȘµĮ ıİ İȣįȚȐțȡȚIJȠ ıȘµİȓȠ µİIJȐ IJȠ ȐȞȠȚȖµĮ µȓĮ ʌȚȞĮțȓįĮ µİ IJȘȞ ĮțȩȜȠȣșȘ ʌȡȠİȚįȠʌȠȓȘıȘ:
!
ȆȡȠİȚįȠʌȠȓȘıȘ ȉȠ ʌİȡȓȕȜȘµĮ İʌȚIJȡȑʌİIJĮȚ ȞĮ ĮȞȠȓȖİȚ µȩȞȠ ȖȚĮ µȚțȡȩ ȤȡȠȞȚțȩ įȚȐıIJȘµĮ, ʌ.Ȥ. ȖȚĮ IJȘ įȚİȞȑȡȖİȚĮ ȠʌIJȚțȒȢ įȚȐȖȞȦıȘȢ. ȂȘȞ țȐȞİIJİ ȤȡȒıȘ įȚĮțȠʌIJȫȞ, µȘȞ IJȡĮȕȐIJİ Ȓ ݵȕȣıµĮIJȫȞİIJİ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠIJȒµĮIJĮ țĮȚ µȘ įȚĮȤȦȡȓȗİIJİ ȘȜİțIJȡȠijȩȡȠȣȢ ĮȖȦȖȠȪȢ (ݵȕıȣµĮIJȫıȚµİȢ ıȣȞįȑıİȚȢ). Ǿ ʌȡȠİȚįȠʌȠȓȘıȘ ĮȣIJȒ įİ ȤȡİȚȐȗİIJĮȚ ȞĮ ȜȘijșİȓ ȣʌ’ ȩȥȚȞ, İȐȞ İȓȞĮȚ ȖȞȦıIJȩ ȩIJȚ įİȞ ȣijȓıIJĮIJĮȚ ĮIJµȩıijĮȚȡĮ ʌĮȡȠȣıȚȐȗȠȣıĮ țȓȞįȣȞȠ ȑțȡȘȟȘȢ.
ȀĮIJȐȜȠȖȠȢ IJȦȞ İȖțİțȡȚµȑȞȦȞ įȠµȚțȫȞ ıȣȖțȡȠIJȘµȐIJȦȞ/µȠȞȐįȦȞ Ǿ ȜȓıIJĮ µİ IJĮ İȖțȡȚµȑȞĮ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠIJȒµĮIJĮ/µȠȞȐįİȢ ȣʌȐȡȤİȚ ıIJȠ įȚĮįȓțIJȣȠ: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ µİ IJȠȞ țȦįȚțȩ ıȣȞįȡȠµȒȢ 13702947. 24
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
ýesky
Použití konstrukþních skupin / modulĤ v prostĜedí s nebezpeþím výbuchu Zóna 2 Zóna 2 Oblasti s nebezpeþím výbuchu jsou rozdČleny do zón. Zóny jsou rozlišeny podle pravdČpodobnosti výskytu explosivní atmosféry. Zóna
Nebezpeþí exploze
PĜíklad
2
Explosivní plynová atmosféra se vyskytuje pouze zĜídka a krátkodobČ
Oblasti kolem pĜírubových spojĤ s plochým tČsnČním u potrubí v uzavĜených prostorech
Bezpeþná oblast
není
x Mimo zónu 2 x Standardní aplikace necentrálních periferií
Dále naleznete dĤležité pokyny pro instalaci konstrukþních skupin/modulĤ v oblastech s nebezpeþím výbuchu.
Další informace Další informace ke konstrukþním skupinám/modulĤm naleznete v pĜíslušné pĜíruþce.
Místo výroby / Registrace II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
dle EN 50021 : 1999
Zkušební þíslo: viz tabulka
Místo výroby Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
Konstrukþní skupiny/Moduly ET 200S ET 200S Konstrukþní skupiny odolné proti chybám
Kontrolní þíslo KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 KEMA 02 ET 200M ATEX 1096X Spojka sbČrnice DP/PA Diagnostické translaþní relé S7-300 Konstrukþní skupiny odolné proti chybám S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
25
ýesky
UpozornČní Konstrukþní skupiny/Moduly s osvČdþením II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 smČjí být použity pouze v systémech SIMATIC, pĜístrojové kategorie 3.
Údržba K opravČ musí být pĜíslušné konstrukþní skupiny/moduly zaslány do výrobního místa. Oprava smí být provedena pouze zde.
Zvláštní podmínky 1. Konstrukþní skupiny/moduly musí být zabudovány v rozvadČþi nebo kovovém krytu. Ty musí minimálnČ zajišĢovat druh ochrany IP 54 (dle EN 60529). PĜitom je nutno respektovat okolní podmínky, v nichž je pĜístroj instalován. Pro kryt musí být k dispozici prohlášení výrobce pro zónu 2 (dle EN 50021). 2. Pokud je na kabelu popĜ. kabelovém vedení tohoto krytu dosaženo za provozních podmínek teploty > 70 °C, nebo když za provozních podmínek mĤže být na kabelových vČtvích teplota > 80 °C, musí teplotní vlastnosti kabelu souhlasit se skuteþnČ namČĜenými teplotami. 3. Použité kabelové pĜívody musí odpovídat požadovanému druhu ochrany IP a odstavci 7.2 (dle EN 50021). 4. Všechny pĜístroje, vþetnČ spínaþĤ atd. napojených na vstupy a výstupy systémĤ SIMATIC, musí mít osvČdþení vĤþi výbuchu typu EEx nA nebo EEx nC. 5. Musí být provedena opatĜení k zamezení pĜechodného pĜekroþení jmenovitého napČtí, nepĜesahující více než 40 %. 6. Rozsah teploty okolí: 0° C do 60° C 7. UvnitĜ krytu je nutno na dobĜe viditelném místČ po otevĜení pĜipevnit štítek s následujícím varováním:
!
Varování Kryt smí být otevĜen pouze krátce, napĜ. pro vizuální diagnostiku. Nepoužívejte pĜitom žádný spínaþ, nevytahujte ani nezasunujte žádné konstrukþní skupiny a neoddČlujte žádná elektrická vedení (konektorové spoje). Toto varování nemusíte respektovat, pokud je známo, že se na místČ nevyskytuje explozivní atmosféra.
Seznam konstrukþních skupin/modulĤ s osvČdþením Seznam konstrukþních skupin/modulĤ s osvČdþením naleznete na Internetu: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
pod identifikací pĜíspČvku ID 13702947.
26
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Estnisch
Sõlmede/moodulite kasutamine plahvatusohtliku piirkonna tsoonis 2 Tsoon 2 Plahvatusohtlikud piirkonnad jagatakse tsoonideks. Tsoone eristatakse vastavalt plahvatusohtliku keskkonna esinemise tõenäosusele. Tsoon
Plahvatusoht
Näide
2
üldine plahvatav keskkond esineb ainult harva ja lühiajaliselt
Piirkonnad lamedate rõngastihenditega torustike äärikliidete ümbruses suletud ruumides
ohutu piirkond
ei
x väljaspool tsooni 2 x Mittstsentraalse välisseadme standardsed rakendused
Järgnevalt leaite Te olulisi juhiseid sõlmede/moodulite paigaldamiseks plahvatusohtlikus piirkonnas.
Täiendav info Üksikasjalik info sõlmede/moodulite kohta on toodud seadme juurde kuuluvas käsiraamatus.
Valmistamiskoht / Kasutusluba II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
vastavalt standardile EN 50021 : 1999
Katsetusnumber: vaadake tabelit
Valmistamiskoht Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
Sõlmed/moodulid
Katsetusnumber
ET 200S ET 200S Rikkekindlad sõlmed
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200M Siinühendus DP/PA Diagnostikarepiiter S7-300 Rikkekindlad sõlmed
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Juhis Sõlmi/mooduleid kasutusloaga II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 tohib kasutada ainult SIMATIC-süsteemides, mille seadmeklass on 3. Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
27
Estnisch
Korrashoid Parandamiseks tuleb sõlmed/moodulid saata valmistamiskohta. Parandustöid tohib teha ainult seal.
Eritingimused 1. Sõlmed/moodulid tuleb monteerida jaotuskarpi või metallkorpusesse. Need peavad tagama kaitseastme vähemalt IP 54 (vastavalt standardile EN 60529). Seejuures peab arvesse võtma seadme paigaldamise keskkonna tingimusi. Korpuse jaoks peab tsooni 2 jaoks olema tootja juhis (vastavalt standardile EN 50021). 2. Kui selle korpuse kaabli juures või kaabelvaheliku (kaabelsisestuse) juures töötingimustes saavutatakse temperatuur > 70 °C või, kui töötingimustes temperatuur soone hargnemiskoha juures võib olla > 80 °C, peavad kaabli termilised omadusd olema vastavuses tegelikult mõõdetud temperatuuridega. 3. Kasutatavad kaabelvahelikud (kaabelsisestused) peavad vastama nõutud IPkaitseastmele ja osas 7.2 toodud nõuetele (vastavalt standardile EN 50021). 4. Kõik seadmed, kaasa arvatud lülitid, jt., mis SIMATIC-süsteemide sisendite ja väljundite külge ühendatakse, peavad võimaldama plahvatuskaitse tüüpi EEx nA või EEx nC. 5. Peab rakendama abinõusid, et nimipinget üleminekute tõttu ei saaks ületatada üle 40 %. 6. Ümbritseva keskkona temperatuurivahemik: 0° C kuni 60° C 7. Korpuse sisse tuleb sellisesse kohta, mis pärast avamist on hästi nähtav, panna silt järgmise hoiatusega:
!
Ettevaatust Korpust tohib avada ainult lühikeseks ajals, näiteks visuaalse diagnostika jaoks. Seejuures ärge kasutage ühtegi lülitit ega võtke välja ega pange sisse ühtegi sõlme ega lahutage ühtegi elektrijuhet (pistikühendused). Seda hoiatust võib mitte arvesse võtta, kui on teada, et ei esine mingit plahvatusohtlikku keskkonda.
Lubatud sõlmede/moodulite loetelu Lubatud sõlmede/modulite loetelu leiate Te internetist: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ lisas-ID 13702947.
28
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Latviski
IerƯþu/moduƺu pielietojums sprƗdzienbƯstamas teritorijas zonƗ 2 Zona 2 SprƗdzienbƯstamƗs teritorijas ir sadalƯtas zonƗs. ŠƯs zonas atšƷir pƝc sprƗdzienbƯstamas atmosfƝras pastƗvƝšanas iespƝjamƯbas. Zona
SprƗdzienbƯstamƯba
PiemƝrs
2
eksplozƯva gƗzes atmosfƝra izveidojas reti un uz Ưsu laiku
Teritorijas ap atloku savienojumiem ar plakaniem blƯvƝjumiem uz cauruƺvadiem slƝgtƗs telpƗs
droša teritorija
nƝ
x Ɩrpus zonas 2 x DecentralizƝtas perifƝrijas ierƯces standartlietojumi
TurpmƗk atrodamas svarƯgas norƗdes par ierƯþu/moduƺu uzstƗdƯšanu sprƗdzienbƯstamajƗ zonƗ.
TurpmƗka informƗcija TurpmƗka informƗcija par ierƯcƝm/moduƺiem ir atrodama attiecƯgajƗ rokasgrƗmatƗ.
Izgatavošanas vieta / Atƺauja II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
saskaƼƗ ar EN 50021 : 1999
PƗrbaudes numurs: skatƯt tabulu
Izgatavošanas vieta Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
IerƯces/moduƺi
PƗrbaudes numurs
ET 200S
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200M Kopnes savienotƗjs DP/PA Diagnostikas atkƗrtotƗjs S7-300 Pret kƺnjdƗm aizsargƗtas ierƯces
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
29
Latviski
NorƗde IerƯces/moduƺi ar atƺauju II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 var tikt pielietotas tikai 3.kategorijas SIMATIC sistƝmƗs.
TehniskƗ apkope AttiecƯgu ierƯþu/moduƺu remontam tie ir jƗnosnjta ražotƗjam. Remontu drƯkst veikt tikai tur.
Ʈpaši apstƗkƺi 1. IerƯces/moduƺi jƗiebnjvƝ sadales skapƯ vai metƗla korpusƗ. Tiem jƗnodrošina aizsardzƯbas lƯmenis ne mazƗks kƗ IP 54 (saskaƼƗ ar EN 60529). TurklƗt, ierƯces uzstƗdƯšanƗ jƗievƝro apkƗrtƝjas vides apstƗkƺi. Korpusam ir nepieciešams izgatavotƗja apliecinƗjums zonai 2 (saskaƼƗ ar EN 50021). 2. Ja uz kabeƺa vai šƯ korpusa kabeƺu ievades ekspluatƗcijas apstƗkƺos tiek sasniegta temperatnjra > 70 °C vai ja ekspluatƗcijas apstƗkƺos uz kabeƺa atzariem var bnjt temperatnjra > 80 °C, kabeƺu temperatnjras ƯpašƯbƗm jƗatbilst faktiski nomƝrƯtƗm temperatnjrƗm. 3. PielietojamƗm kabeƺu ievadƝm jƗatbilst nepieciešamajam aizsardzƯbas veidam IP un sadaƺai 7.2 (saskaƼƗ ar EN 50021). 4. VisƗm ierƯcƝm, ieskaitot pƗrslƝgus utt., kas tiek pieslƝgti pie SIMATIC sistƝmu ievadƝm un izvadƝm, jƗbnjt atƺaujƗm EEx nA vai EEx nC tipa sprƗdzienaizsardzƯbai. 5. Nepieciešams veikt pasƗkumus, lai pƗrejas spriegums nepƗrsniegtu nominƗlo spriegumu vairƗk kƗ par 40 %. 6. ApkƗrtƝjas temperatnjras diapazons: 0° C lƯdz 60° C 7. Korpusa iekšpusƝ, vietƗ, kas ir labi redzama, atverot to, ir jƗizvieto plƗksne ar sekojošo brƯdinƗjumu:
!
BrƯdinƗjums Korpusu var atvƝrt tikai ƯslaicƯgi, piemƝram, vizuƗlai diagnostikai. Pie tam nenospiediet nekƗdus slƝdžus, neievietojiet un neizƼemiet nekƗdas ierƯces un nepƗrtrauciet elektriskƗs lƯnijas (spraudsavienojumus). Šis brƯdinƗjums var tikt neƼemts vƝrƗ, ja ir zinƗms, ka nepastƗv sprƗdzienbƯstama atmosfƝra.
Pieƺaujamo ierƯþu/moduƺu saraksts Pieƺaujamo ierƯþu/moduƺu saraksts ir atrodams InternetƗ: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ zem datu ID 13702947.
30
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Lietuviška
Konstrukciniǐ grupiǐ/moduliǐ panaudojimas sprogioje 2 zonos aplinkoje Zona 2 Sprogi aplinka yra apibnjdinama keliomis zonomis. Zonos skirstomos pagal galimos sprogios terpơs atsiradimo tikimybĊ. Zona
Sprogimo pavojus
Pavyzdys
2
sprogi atmosfera bnjna retai ir trumpai
Uždarǐ patalpǐ vamzdynuose - flanšo su tarpikliais sujungimǐ vietose
saugioji sritis
nơra
x ne zonoje 2 x Standartinơ periferinơ sistema
Toliau pateikiamas informacija apie konstrukciniǐ grupiǐ ir moduliǐ montavimą sprogioje aplinkoje.
Papildoma informacija Papildomos informacijos apie konstrukcines grupes/modulius rasite eksploatacijos vadove.
Pagaminimo vieta / Saugos reikalavimai II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
pagal EN 50021 : 1999
Patikros numeris: žinjr. lentelơje
Pagaminimo vieta
Konstrukcinơs grupơs/moduliai
Patikros numeris
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Ambergas Vokietija
ET 200S ET 200S nuo trukdžiǐ apsaugotos konstrukcinơs grupơs
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200M Magistralinơ jungtis DP/PA Diagnozơs retransliatorius S7-300 nuo trukdžiǐ apsaugotos konstrukcinơs grupơs
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Vokietija
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
31
Lietuviška
Nuoroda Konstrukcines grupes/modulius, kuriǐ leidimas eksploatuoti yra II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 galima naudoti tik 3 kategorijos sistemose "SIMATIC".
Priežinjra Esant gedimams, konstrukcinĊ grupĊ/modulƳ išsiǐskite gamintojui. Tik jis gali kvalifikuotai suremontuoti Ƴtaisą.
Specialiosios sąlygos 1. Konstrukcines grupes/modulius montuokite jungimo spintoje arba metaliniame korpuse. Korpuso ar jungimo spintos saugos klasơ turi bnjti mažiausiai "IP 54" (pagal EN 60529). Bnjtina atsižvelgti Ƴ kitas aplinkos sąlygas. Norint korpusą eksploatuoti zonoje 2, bnjtinas gamintojo pažymơjimas (pagal EN 50021). 2. Jei korpuso kabelio arba kabelio prijungimo temperatnjra pakyla daugiau nei 70 °C arba laidǐ atšakoje temperatnjra padidơja daugiau nei 80 °C, reikia naudoti kabelius, kuriǐ terminơs savybơs atitinka išmatuotas temperatnjros vertes. 3. Kabeliǐ sujungimai turi bnjti saugos klasơs IP ir atitikti 7.2 skyriaus (pagal EN 50021) reikalavimus. 4. Visi prietaisai, Ƴskaitant ir jungiklius, jungiami sistemǐ "SIMATIC" Ƴeigose ir išeigose, turi bnjti tipo "EEx nA" arba "EEx nC" - apsaugoti nuo sprogimo. 5. Bnjtina imtis priemoniǐ, kad pereinamǐjǐ grandžiǐ vardinơ Ƴtampa neviršytǐ 40 %. 6. Leistina aplinkos temperatnjra: 0° C iki 60° C 7. AtidarĊ korpusą, jo viduje gerai matomoje vietoje, Ƴtaisykite lentelĊ su Ƴspơjimu:
!
Ʋspơjimas Korpusą` atidaryti tik trumpam laikui, pvz., patikrai. Neliesti jungikliǐ, konstrukciniǐ grupiǐ neištraukti ir nekišti, neatjungti elektriniǐ sujungimǐ (kištukiniǐ sujungimǐ). Šio Ƴspơjimo galima nepaisyti, kai yra žinoma, jog darbinơ aplinka yra nesprogi.
Leistinǐ konstrukciniǐ grupiǐ/moduliǐ sąrašas Leistinǐ konstrukciniǐ grupiǐ/moduliǐ sąrašą rasite interneto puslapyje: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
ƳvedĊ kodą 13702947.
32
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Magya
A fĘegységek/modulok alkalmazása a 2. zóna robbanásveszélyes környezetben 2. zóna A robbanásveszélyes környezeteket zónákba sorolják be. A robbanásveszélyes légkör elĘfordulásának valószínĦsége alapján különböztetik meg a zónákat. Zóna
Robbanásveszély
2
Példa
robbanásveszélyes gázat zárt helységekben elhelyezett tartalmazó légkör csak ritkán és csĘvezetékeknél a lapos tömítéssel rövid ideig lép fel rendelkezĘ karimás kötések környezetében x a 2. zónán kívül
biztonságos nem környezet
x a decentrális periféria készülékek standard alkalmazásai
A következĘkben fontos utasításokat talál a fĘegységek/modulok telepítéséhez a robbanásveszélyes környezetbe.
További információk A további információkat a fĘegységekhez/modulokhoz megtalálja a hozzátartozó kézikönyvben.
Gyártási hely / Engedélyezés II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
az EN 50021 : 1999 szerint
EllenĘrzĘ szám: lásd a táblázatot
Gyártási hely Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
FĘegységek/modulok
EllenĘrzĘ szám
ET 200S ET 200S hibabiztos fĘegységek
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200M DP/PA buszcsatoló Diagnózisrepeater S7-300 hibabiztos fĘegységek
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
33
Magya
Utasítás Az II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 engedélyezéssel rendelkezĘ fĘegységeket/modulokat alkalmazhatja csak a 3. felszerelés-kategóriába tartozó SIMATIC rendszerekbe.
Karbantartás Javítás esetén küldje az érintett fĘegységeket/modulokat a gyártási helyre. Csak itt hajthatják végre a javítást.
Különleges feltételek 1. A fĘegységeket/modulokat egy kapcsolószekrénybe vagy egy fém házba kell beszerelni. Ezeknek kell biztosítaniuk legalább az IP 54 védettségi fokozatot (EN 60529 szerint). Itt figyelembe kell venni azokat a környezeti feltételeket, amelyek fellépnek a készülék telepítésekor. A házhoz meg kell legyen a gyártói nyilatkozat a 2. zónához (az EN 50021 szerint). 2. Ha a jelen ház kábelén ill. kábelvezetésen üzemi feltételek mellett a hĘmérséklet > 70 °C, vagy ha az üzemi feltételek mellett a hĘmérséklet > 80 °C az érelágazásokon, akkor meg kell egyezzenek a kábel hĘmérsékleti tulajdonságai a ténylegesen mért hĘmérsékletekkel. 3. Az alkalmazott kábelvezetések meg kell feleljenek a követelt IP védettségi fokozatnak és a 7.2. bekezdésnek (EN 50021 szerint). 4. Minden készülék, kapcsolót stb. beleértve, amelyeket a SIMATIC rendszerek be- és kimeneteire csatlakoztattak, engedélyezve kell legyen az EEx nA vagy EEx nC típusú robbanásvédelemhez. 5. Intézkedéseket kell hozni, hogy a tranziensek ne lépjék túl a névleges feszültséget több mint 40 %-al. 6. Környezeti hĘmérséklet tartomány: 0° C ... 60° C 7. A házon belül -a nyitáskor jól látható helyen- helyezzen el egy táblát a következĘ figyelmeztetéssel:
!
Figyelmeztetés A házat csak rövid ideig szabad nyitani, pl. optikai diagnózishoz. Eközben ne mĦködtessen egy kapcsolót sem, ne húzzon ki vagy dugjon be egy fĘegységet sem és ne válasszon le villamos vezetékeket (dugós csatlakozók). Ez a figyelmeztetés mellĘzhetĘ, ha tudott, hogy nem áll fenn robbanásveszélyes légkör.
A megengedett fĘegységek/modulok listája A megengedett fĘegységek/modulok listáját megtalálja az interneten: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
a 13702947 cikk azonosító szám alatt.
34
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Malti
Tqegƫid tal-Komponenti / Modules fiĪ-ĩona 2, fejn hemm Riskju ta' SpluĪjoni ĩona 2 Sezzjonijiet fejn hemm riskju ta' spluĪjoni jitqassmu f'Īoni. Tagƫmel distinzjoni bejn Īona u oƫra skond il-probabbiltà li jkun hemm ambjent li jista' jwassal gƫal spluĪjoni. ĩona
Periklu ta' SpluĪjoni
EĪempju
2
ambjent gassuĪ li jista' jisplodi jfeƥƥ rarament u gƫal Īmien qasir
ĩoni madwar flanƥ ƥojnts b'gaskits ƛatti f'kanni ƥewwa spazji magƫluqin
Īona ĪĪgura
le
x barra miĪ-Īona 2 x uĪu normali ta' devices periferali deƛentralizzati
Issib hawn taƫt indikazzjonijiet importanti gƫall-installazzjoni ta' komponenti / modules fiĪ-Īona fejn hemm riskju ta' spluĪjoni.
Aktar Tagƫrif Aktar tagƫrif fuq il-komponenti / modules jinstab fil-manwal ikkonƛernat.
Post ta' Manifattura / Approvazzjoni II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
skond EN 50021 : 1999
Numru taƛ-ƚertifikat: ara t-tabella
Post ta' Manifattura Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
Komponenti / Modules
Numru taƛƚertifikat
ET 200S KEMA 01 ET 200S modules ma jistgƫux ifallu ATEX 1238X S7-300 ET 200M bus coupling DP/PA Ripetitur ta' dijanjosi S7-300 modules ma jistgƫux ifallu
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Nota Komponenti / modules bl-approvazzjoni II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 jistgƫu jintuĪaw biss ƥewwa sistemi SIMATIC tal-kategorija 3. Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
35
Malti
Manutenzjoni Fil-kaĪ li jkun hemm bĪonn ta' tiswija, il-komponenti / modules ikkonƛernati gƫandhom jintbagƫtu fil-post ta' manifattura. It-tiswijiet jistgƫu jsiru biss f'dan il-post.
Kundizzjonijiet Speƛjali 1. Komponenti / modules gƫandhom jiƥu mmontati ƥewwa swiƛƛ kabinett jew kaxxa tal-metall. Dawn iridu jiggarantixxu protezzjoni mill-inqas tat-tip IP 54 (skond EN 60529). Inti u tagƫmel hekk, trid taƫseb gƫall-kundizzjonijiet ambjentali ta' waqt l-installazzjoni tad-device. Irid ikun hemm dikjarazzjoni talmanifatturier gƫall-kaxxa gƫaĪ-Īona 2 (skond EN 50021). 2. Jekk fil-kejbil, jew fil-kaxxa mad-daƫla gƫall-kejbil, tintlaƫaq temperatura ta' aktar minn 70 °C taƫt kundizzjonijiet ta' ƫidma, jew jekk fil-post fejn jinfirdu lwajers jista' jkun li hemm temperatura ta' aktar minn 80 °C, il-kejbil irid ikollu proprjetajiet ta' temperatura xierqa gƫat-temperaturi tabilƫaqq imkejlin. 3. Id-daƫliet gƫall-kejbil li jintuĪaw iridu jikkonformaw mat-tip ta' protezzjoni IP mitlub u t-taqsima 7.2 (skond EN 50021). 4. Id-devices kollha, swiƛƛijiet etc. inkluĪi, li jitqabbdu ma' l-inputs u l-outputs ta' sistemi SIMATIC, iridu jkunu approvati gƫal protezzjoni kontra spluĪjoni tat-tip EEx nA jew EEx nC. 5. Iridu jittieƫdu miĪuri biex il-vultaƥƥ nominali ma jitqabbiĪx b'aktar minn 40% minƫabba transitorji. 6. Varjazzjoni tat-temperatura ambjentali: 0° C sa 60° C 7. Gƫandha titqiegƫed tabella bit-twissija li ƥejja ƥewwa l-kaxxa, f'post li jidher sew wara li tinfetaƫ il-kaxxa:
!
Twissija Il-kaxxa tista' tinfetaƫ biss gƫal Īmien qasir, per eĪempju gƫal dijanjosi viĪwali. Inti u tagƫmel hekk, ma tista' tmiss l-ebda swiƛƛ, ddaƫƫal jew tneƫƫi l-ebda module u tneƫƫi l-ebda kejbil elettriku (konnessjonijiet li tipplaggjahom). Tista' ma tagƫtix kaĪ ta' din it-twissija meta taf li m'hemmx riskju ta' spluĪjoni flambjent.
Lista ta' Komponenti / Modules Approvati Issib il-lista ta' komponenti / modules approvati fl-internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
bin-numru ta' identifikazzjoni 13702947.
36
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Polski
Zastosowanie grup konstrukcyjnych / moduáów w 2 strefie zagroĪenia wybuchem Strefa 2 Otoczenie zagroĪone wybuchem dzielone jest na strefy. Strefy dzielą siĊ ze wzglĊdu na stopieĔ prawdopodobieĔstwa powstania atmosfery stwarzającej moĪliwoĞü powstania wybuchu. Strefa
NiebezpieczeĔstwo eksplozji
Przykáad
2
atmosfera gazowa z zagroĪeniem wybuchem wystĊpuje rzadko i na krótki okres czasu
miejsca wokóá áącz w kanaáach technicznych z opaskami przy przewodach instalacyjnych w pomieszczeniach zamkniĊtych
obszar bezpieczny
nie
x poza 2 strefą x standardowe zastosowanie decentralnych urządzeĔ peryferyjnych
Dalej znajdą PaĔstwo informacje dotyczące instalacji grup konstrukcyjnych / moduáów w otoczeniu zagroĪonym wybuchem.
Pozostaáe informacje Dalsze informacje dotyczące grup konstrukcyjnych / moduáów znajdą paĔstwo w odpowiedniej instrukcji.
Miejsce produkcji / Rejestracja II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
stosownie do EN 50021 : 1999
Nr testu: zobacz tabela
Miejsce produkcji Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Niemcy
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Niemcy
Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduáy
Nr testu
ET 200S ET 200S grupy konstrukcyjne odporne na uszkodzenia
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200M Zbierające áącze sprzĊĪające DP/PA powtarzacz diagnozy S7-300 grupy konstrukcyjne odporne na uszkodzenia
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
37
Polski
Uwaga Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduáy zarejestrowane jako II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 wolno stosowaü jedynie w systemach SIMATIC o 3 kategorii urządzenia.
Konserwacja W celu naprawy naleĪy odpowiednie grupy konstrukcyjne / moduáy przesáaü do miejsca produkcji. Jedynie serwis producenta jest upowaĪniony do dokonywania napraw.
Warunki szczególne 1. Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduáy muszą zostaü zamontowane do skrzynki ochronnej lub metalowej puszki ochronnej. Muszą one speániaü wymagania co najmniej stopnia IP 54 (stosownie do EN 60529). NaleĪy braü pod uwagĊ warunki otoczenia, w którym urządzenie bĊdzie instalowane. NaleĪy posiadaü oĞwiadczenie producenta dopuszczające puszkĊ do uĪytku w strefie 2 (stosownie do EN 50021). 2. W przypadku, gdyby na przewodzie tej puszki podczas pracy temperatura mogáa przekroczyü > 70 °C, lub Īyáa przewodu mogáaby osiągnąü temperaturĊ > 80 °C, wáaĞciwoĞci cieplne przewodu muszą zostaü dobrane do takich wartoĞci. 3. Wszystkie stosowane przewody muszą odpowiadaü wáaĞciwemu stopniowi ochrony IP oraz warunkom okreĞlonym w punkcie 7.2 (stosownie do EN 50021). 4. Wszystkie urządzenia wáączając w to przeáączniki itp., które podáączane są do wejĞü lub wyjĞü systemów SIMATIC muszą byü dopuszczone do ochrony przeciw wybuchom typu EEx nA lub EEx nC. 5. Muszą zostaü speánione takie warunki, aby napiĊcie miana w przejĞciach nie mogáo przekroczyü wiĊcej niĪ 40 %. 6. Temperatura otoczenia: od 0° C do 60° C 7. W puszce w dobrze widocznym po otwarciu miejscu naleĪy umieĞciü ostrzeĪenie nastĊpującej treĞci:
!
Uwaga PuszkĊ wolno otworzyü jedynie na krótki okres czasu na przykáad w celu kontroli optycznej. Nie wolno przy tym naciskaü na Īaden z przeáączników, nie wolno wyciągaü ani montowaü Īadnej grupy konstrukcyjnej ani teĪ odáączaü Īadnych przewodów elektrycznych (áącza wsuwkowe). PowyĪszego ostrzeĪenia nie trzeba przestrzegaü jeĞli wiadomo jest, iĪ na miejscu nie ma zagroĪenia wybuchem.
Lista dopuszczonych grup konstrukcyjnych / moduáów Wykaz dopuszczonych grup konstrukcyjnych / moduáów znajduje siĊ na stronie internetowej: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
w czĊĞci ID 13702947. 38
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Slovensky
Použitie konštrukþných skupín / modulov v prostredí s nebezpeþenstvom výbuchu zóny 2 Zóna 2 Prostredia s nebezpeþenstvom výbuchu sa rozdeĐujú do zón. Zóny sa rozlišujú podĐa pravdepodobnosti prítomnosti atmosféry so schopnosĢou výbuchu. Zóna
Nebezpeþenstvo explózie
Príklad
2
plynová atmosféra s nebezpeþenstvom výbuchu sa vyskytuje len zriedka a krátkodobo
priestory okolo prírubových spojov s plochými tesneniami pri potrubných vedeniach v uzavretých priestoroch
bezpeþná oblasĢ
nie
x mino zóny 2 x štandardné použitia decentrálnej periférie
Ćalej nájdete dôležité pokyny pre inštaláciu konštrukþných skupín / modulov v prostredí s nebezpeþenstvom výbuchu.
Ćalšie informácie Ćalšie informácie ku konštrukþným skupinám / modulom nájdete v príslušnej príruþke.
Miesto vyhotovenia / Osvedþenie II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
podĐa EN 50021 : 1999
ýíslo skúšky : pozri tabuĐka Miesto vyhotovenia Siemens AG, divízia A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Nemecko
Siemens AG, divízia A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Nemecko
Konštrukþné skupiny / moduly
ýíslo skúšky
ET 200S ET 200S konštrukþné skupiny odolné voþi poruchám
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200M Zbernicový väzbový þlen DP/PA opakovaþ diagnózy S7-300 konštrukþné skupiny odolné voþi poruchám
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
39
Slovensky
Upozornenie Konštrukþné skupiny / moduly s osvedþením II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 sa smú používaĢ len v systémoch SIMATIC kategórie zariadenia 3.
Údržba Za úþelom opravy sa musia príslušné konštrukþné skupiny / moduly zaslaĢ na miesto vyhotovenia. Oprava sa smie vykonávaĢ len na tomto mieste !
Špeciálne podmienky 1. Konštrukþné skupiny / moduly sa musia vmontovaĢ do spínacej skrine alebo do kovového puzdra schránky. Tie musia zabezpeþovaĢ druh ochrany minimálne IP 54 (podĐa EN 60529). Pritom je potrebné zohĐadniĢ podmienky prostredia, do ktorého sa bude zariadenie inštalovaĢ. V prípade puzdra musí existovaĢ vyhlásenie výrobcu pre zónu 2 (podĐa EN 50021). 2. V prípade, že na kábli, prípadne na káblovom prívode tohto puzdra presiahne teplota pri prevádzkových podmienkach hodnotu > 70 °C, alebo ak na vetve žily môže byĢ pri prevádzkových podmienkach teplota > 80 °C, musia tepelné vlastnosti kábla vyhovovaĢ skutoþne nameraným hodnotám. 3. Všetky použité káblové prívody musia zodpovedaĢ požadovanému druhu ochrany IP a odseku 7.2 (podĐa EN 50021). 4. Všetky zariadenia, vrátane prepínaþa, atć., ktoré sa pripoja na vstupy a výstupy systémov SIMATIC, musia byĢ schválené pre ochranu voþi výbuchu typu EEx nA alebo EEx nC. 5. Musia sa splniĢ také opatrenia, aby sa menovité napätie cez prechody nemohlo prekroþiĢ o viac ako 40 %. 6. Rozsah okolitých teplôt: 0° C až 60° C 7. V puzdre je na dobre viditeĐné miesto po otvorení potrebné umiestniĢ štítok s nasledovnou výstrahou:
!
Výstraha Puzdro sa môže otvoriĢ len poþas krátkej doby, napríklad pre vizuálnu diagnózu. Nestlaþte pritom žiadny prepínaþ, nevytiahnite alebo nezasuĖte žiadnu konštrukþnú skupinu a neoddeĐte žiadne elektrické vedenia (zástrþkové spojenia). Túto výstrahu si nemusíte všímaĢ v takom prípade, ak je známe, že sa na mieste nevyskytuje atmosféra s nebezpeþenstvom výbuchu.
Zoznam dovolených konštrukþných skupín / modulov Zoznam dovolených konštrukþných skupín / modulov sa nachádza na internete : http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
v þlánku ID 13702947.
40
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Slovensko
Uporaba sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroženem obmoþju cone 2 Cona 2 Eksplozivno ogrožena obmoþja se delijo na cone. Cone se loþijo po verjetnosti prisotnosti eksplozivne atmosfere. Cona
Nevarnost eksplozije
Primer
2
eksplozivna zmes plinov v atmosferi je redka in traja le kratko.
Obmoþja okoli prirobnih spojev z ploskimi tesnili pri cevnih napeljavah v zaprtih prostorih.
sigurno obmoþje
ne
x izven cone 2 x Standardna uporaba decentralne periferije.
Sledijo pomembni napotki o inštalaciji sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroženem obmoþju.
Nadaljnje informacije Nadaljnje informacije o sklopih/modulih najdete v priloženem priroþniku.
Mesto izdelave / Dovoljenje - Atest II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
po EN 50021 : 1999
kontrolna številka: glej tabelo
Mesto izdelave Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
Sklopi/moduli
kontrolna številka:
ET 200S ET 200S Sklopi varovani proti okvari
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200M bus vezava DP/PA Diagnozni repeater S7-300 Sklopi varovani proti okvari
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Opozorilo Sklopi/moduli z dovoljenjem II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 se lahko uporabijo samo v SIMATIC-Sistemih kategorije 3 . Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
41
Slovensko
Vzdrževanje V primeru popravila pošljete sklope/module na kraj izdelave. Popravila lahko izvajajo samo na tem naslovu!
Posebni pogoji 1. Sklopi/moduli se morajo vgraditi v elektro omaro ali metalno ohišje. Omara/ohišje mora zadostiti varovanju IP 54 (po EN 60529). Pri tem je potrebno upoštevati tudi pogoje okolice, v kateri se naprava nahaja. Ohišje mora imeti izjavo (atest) proizvajalca za uporabo v coni 2 (po EN 50021). 2. ýe na kablu oz. uvodnici tega ohišja v režimu obratovanja temperatura doseže vrednost > 70 °C ali þe doseže na razcepih vodnikov v obratovanju temperatura vrednost > 80 °C, se morajo temperaturne lastnosti kablov skladati z dejansko namerjenimi. 3. Uporabljene uvodnice morajo ustrezati predpisani IP zašþiti in poglavju 7.2 (po EN 50021). 4. Vse naprave, vkljuþno s stikali itd., ki so priklopljene na vhodih oz. izhodih sistemov SIMATIC, morajo biti odobrene za zašþito proti eksplozijam tipa EEx nA ali EEx nC. 5. Zagotoviti se mora, da nazivna napetost ne prekoraþi veþ kot 40% pri tranzienci (preklopih, vklopih,...). 6. Temperaturno obmoþje okolice: 0° C do 60° C 7. V notranjosti ohišja, na odprtem dobro vidljivem mestu, se pritrdi napis z naslednjim opozorilom:
!
Opozorilo Ohišje se lahko odpre samo za kratek þas, npr. za vizualno diagnozo. Pri tem ne vklapljajte/izklaplajte stikal, sklopov ali elektriþnih vodnikov (vtiþnih spojev). Opozorilo ne velja, kadar je znano, da ni eksplozivne atmosfere.
Seznam dovoljenih sklopov/modulov Seznam dovoljenih sklopov/modulov najdete na internetu na spletni strani: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
pod ID prispevka 13702947.
42
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
Türkçe
Patlama tehlikesi olan Alan 2 bölgesinde ünite gruplarının/modüllerin kullanılması Alan 2 Patlama tehlikesi olan bölgeler alanlara ayrılır. Alanlar, patlayabilecek atmosfere sahip ortam ihtimaline göre farklı derecelere ayrılır. Alan
Patlama tehlikesi
Örnek
2
Patlayıcı gaz atmosferi sadece nadir ve kısa bir süre için söz konusu
Kapalı alanlardaki boru ba÷lantılarında yassı contalı flanú ba÷lantıları civarındaki bölgeler
Güvenli bölge
hayır
x Alan 2 haricinde x Merkezi olmayan periferi standart uygulamaları
Aúa÷ıda, ünite gruplarının/modüllerin patlama tehlikesi olan bölgelerde kurulması için önemli bilgiler bulacaksınız.
Daha baúka bilgiler Ünite grupları/modüller hakkında daha fazla bilgi için ilgili kılavuza bakınız.
ømalat yeri / Lisans II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
EN 50021 standartına göre: 1999
Test numarası: bkz. Tablo
ømalat yeri Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
Ünite grupları/Modüller
Kontrol numarası
ET 200S ET 200S Hataya karúı emniyetli ünite grupları
KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X
S7-300 ET 200M Bus kuplajı DP/PA Diyagnoz repeater ünitesi S7-300 Hataya karúı emniyetli ünite grupları
KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP TS Adapter II
KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
43
Türkçe
Bilgi II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 lisanslı ünite grupları/modüller sadece 3 numaralı cihaz kategorisine ait SIMATIC sistemlerine kullanılabilir.
Bakım ve koruma Bir onarım gerekli olması halinde, ilgili ünite grupları/modüller imalat yerine gönderilmelidir. Onarım sadece orada yapılabilir ve yapılmalıdır.
Özel koúullar 1. Ünite grupları/modüller bir úalter dolabı içine veya metal kasa içine monte edilmelidir. Bu kasalar en az IP 54 (EN 60529 standartına göre) koruma türüne ait olmalıdır. Burada, cihazın kuruldu÷u çevre koúulları dikkate alınmalıdır. Kullanılacak kasa için, alan 2 için geçerli bir üretici beyanı mevcut olmalıdır (EN 50021 standartına istinaden). 2. Kabloda ya da bu kasanın kablo giriúindeki iúletme koúullarında sıcaklık > 70 °C oluyorsa veya iúletme koúullarında kablo telleri (damarları) ayrılma noktasında sıcaklık > 80 °C olma ihtimali varsa, kablonun sıcaklık ile ilgili özellikleri, gerçekten ölçülmüú sıcaklıklara uygun olmalıdır. 3. Kullanılmıú olan kablo giriúleri, talep edilen IP koruma türüne ve bölüm 7.2 (EN 50021 standartına göre) dahilindeki taleplere uygun olmalıdır. 4. SIMATIC sistemlerinin giriú ve çıkıúlarına ba÷lanan tüm cihazlar (úalterler vs. dahil) için, EEx nA veya EEx nC patlamaya karúı koruma tipine istinaden izin alınmıú olmalıdır. 5. Nominal gerilimin transiyentlerden (hatlardaki dalgalanmalardan dolayı ani gerilim ve akım de÷iúiklikleri) dolayı azami %40 aúılması için gerekli önlemler alınmalıdır. 6. Çevre sıcaklı÷ı aralı÷ı: 0° C ile 60° C arasında 7. Kasa dahilinde, açıldıktan sonra iyi görülebilen bir yere aúa÷ıdaki uyarı takılmalıdır:
!
økaz Kasa sadece kısa bir süre açılmalıdır, örn. görsel diyagnoz için. Herhangi bir úaltere basmayınız, herhangi bir ünite grubunu çekip çıkarmayınız veya takmayınız, elektrik hatlarını (soket ba÷lantıları) ayırmayınız. E÷er patlama tehlikesi söz konusu olan bir atmosfer olmadı÷ı biliniyorsa, iúbu ikaz göz ardı edilebilir.
øzin verilmiú olan ünite gruplarının/modüllerin listesi øzin verilmiú olan ünite gruplarının/modüllerin listesi için internete bakınız: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
Doküman ID 13702947.
44
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02
SIMATIC Product information to the ET 200S manual
1 Introduction ______________ 2 Product information ______________
SIMATIC Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information
Edition 07/2005 A5E00583609-01
Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. Danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Notice indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.
Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage Note the following: Warning This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG Automation and Drives Postfach 48 48 90437 NÜRNBERG GERMANY
Order No.: A5E00583609-01 07/2005
Copyright © Siemens AG 2005. Technical data subject to change
Table of contents 1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1
2
Contents..................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Product information................................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1
Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO .......................................................................... 2-1
2.2
Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) ......................................................... 2-10
2.3
Digital Electronic Modules........................................................................................................ 2-11
2.4
Power modules ........................................................................................................................ 2-11
Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1 Tables Table 2-1
Status and error displays of the IM151-3 PN............................................................................. 2-2
Table 2-2
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module ...................................................... 2-11
Table 2-3
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module................................................. 2-13
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
iii
Table of contents
iv
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
Introduction 1.1
1.1
1
Contents
Introduction This product information describes corrections and additions to the manual Distributed Peripheral Device ET 200S (EWA-4NEB 780602401-13), release 07/2005.
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
1-1
Introduction 1.1 Contents
1-2
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
2
Product information 2.1
2.1
Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO
6.3.1.3 Integrating modules for the configuration Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DO modules %\WH[ 0RGXOH0RGXOH0RGXOH ZLWKRXWಯ ರZLWKಯ ರZLWKಯ ರ
:KHQSXOOHGRQO\WKHSXOOHG'2LVRPLWWHG DUHPRYHPRGXOHLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHG :KHQSXOOHGWKHQDOO'2PRGXOHVWKDWDUH FRPSULVHGLQWKLVE\WHRXWSXWUHSODFHPHQWYDOXHV
Figure 2-1
Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DO modules
Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DI modules %\WH[ 0RGXOH0RGXOH0RGXOH ZLWKRXWಯ ರZLWKಯ ರZLWKಯ ರ
:KHQSXOOHGRQO\WKHSXOOHG',LVRPLWWHG DUHPRYHPRGXOHLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHG :KHQSXOOHGWKHUHIHUHQFHGDWDPDUNHUIRUWKHLQSXWE\WHLVVHWWRಯ%$'ರ 7KH,2FRQWUROOHUWKHQVHWVWKHLQSXWE\WHWR
Figure 2-2
Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DI modules
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
2-1
Product information 2.1 Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO
6.3.3 LED display diagnostics Status and error displays through LEDs on IM151-3 PN Table 2-1
Status and error displays of the IM151-3 PN Meaning
LEDs SF
BF
ON
*
Flashing 2 Hz
on
Incorrect or no connect telegram – no data exchange between the IO controller and the interface module (IO device) takes place but the IO device is physically linked to the switch. Causes: • Device name is incorrect • Configuration error • Parameter assignment error • The IO controller is switched off, defective or the bus cable to the IO controller is missing.
Remedy • • • • •
Check the interface module. Check the configuration and parameter assignment. Check the device name. Assign a valid device name to the interface module. Check the IO controller
on
on
on
•
A factory new SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is being formatted.
•
Wait until the formatting procedure is completed. This can take a number of minutes to complete. When the SF LED goes out, the formatting procedure is complete.
on
off
on
•
There is no S7 program located on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card No SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is inserted. The inserted SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is full or does not have enough storage space for the device name. No suitable SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is inserted (i.e. no SIMATIC Micro Memory Card from Siemens).
• •
Format the die SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. Before switching on the power supply voltage, insert an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 PN.
• •
•
The IO device cannot be reached in this state.
2-2
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
Product information 2.1 Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO
6.3.5 Evaluate interrupts from ET 200S Diagnostic "Process interrupt lost" For the components • 2DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0), • 4DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) and • 4DI UC24..48V HF (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) the diagnostic "Process interrupt lost" is not available at present.
Note Process interrupts should not be used for technological purposes (e.g. cyclical creation of process interrupts). If more than 90 process interrupts are generated per second, process interrupts can be lost.
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
2-3
Product information 2.1 Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO
6.3.7.2 Channel diagnostics Definition The channel diagnostics provide information on channel faults of modules. Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics in IO diagnostic data records. A data record contains 10 Bytes in each case. Diagnostics can be read for a submodule slot, for a slot, for the IO controller assigned slot in an IO device or for an IO device. The determination is reached via the data record number: 800AH
Channel diagnostics for a submodule slot
800BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming)
800CH
Manufacturer-specific diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming and going)
C00AH
Channel diagnostics for a slot
C00BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming)
C00CH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming and going)
E002H
Deviation of the set configuration by the actual configuration of an IO controller assigned IO device
E00AH
Channel diagnostics for the IO controller-assigned channel in an IO device
E00BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO controller assigned channel in an IO device (coming)
E00CH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for the IO controller assigned channels in an IO device (coming and going)
F00AH
Channel diagnostics for an IO device
F00BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming)
F00CH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming and going)
AFF0H to AFFFH
Manufacturer, order number, creation state, version, etc.
The data record is read with the SFB 52 RDREC (read data record).
Structure of diagnostic data records You can find the diagnostic data records structure and examples for programming in the programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO. The data record that the ET 200S supports, based on the PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.0 standard. You can download the standard at http://www.profibus.com at no cost.
2-4
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
Product information 2.1 Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO
Channel diagnostics The channel diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-3 PN interface module:
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+
%\WHDQG 'DWDUHFRUGOHQJWK
%\WHDQG 9HUVLRQ
%\WHDQG 6ORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW
%\WHDQG 6XEPRGXOHVORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
,GHQWLILFDWLRQRIWKHLQWHUUXSWVRXUFH+6XEPRGXOH
%\WH
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG (UURUW\SH %,QFRPLQJIDXOW
%\WH
%LWQR
%LWQR
%\WHDQG (UURUW\SH +WR)))+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV +'LDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHIRUVXEPRGXOHLVSHQGLQJ +0XOWLSOH +([W&KDQQHO'LDJQRVLV'DWD +ELV)))+5HVHUYHG +ELV))+5HVHUYHGIRUSURILOH $+WR))))+5HVHUYHG
Figure 2-3
Structure of the channel diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
2-5
Product information 2.1 Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO
%LWQR
%LWQR
%\WHDQG &KDQQHOQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW
%\WH
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG (UURUW\SH %,QFRPLQJIDXOW &KDQQHOW\SH 5HVHUYHG ,QSXWFKDQQHO 2XWSXWFKDQQHO ,QSXWRXWSXWFKDQQHO
%LWQR
%\WH &KDQQHOW\SH +IUHHGDWDW\SH +:RUG +%LW +'RXEOHZRUG +%LW +GRXEOHZRUGV +%LW +WR))+5HVHUYHG +%\WH
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
Figure 2-4
Structure of the channel diagnostic record for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN
The bytes 16 to 21 repeat themselves for every further error that is reported in this diagnostic message.
Error types of the other modules The error types of the power modules, digital electronic modules, analog electronic modules, and the technology modules are the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.
2-6
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
Product information 2.1 Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO
6.3.7.4 Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus Diagnostics for the bus interruption If the ET 200S does not startup, it can have the following causes: • one or multiple missing modules • Terminating module missing • Number of modules exceeds the maximum configuration • Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective terminal module) If the ET 200S does not startup, it can have the following causes: • At least two missing modules (that is in contrast to a missing module no more gap rather a separated backplane bus) • Terminating module missing • Faulty backplane bus (for example, terminal module is defective) An interrupt is not generated in the event of an interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus. The information must be read out explicitly by the user. The data record with index F00BH is available for this purpose. You can read out this data record with STEP 7 in SIMATIC Manager via reachable nodes in the component status window. The PG must be located in the PROFINET subnet.
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
2-7
Product information 2.1 Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO
Composition of the diagnostics for the bus interrupt Contents of the diagnostics for the bus interrupt:
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
'DWDUHFRUGOHQJWK+
%\WHDQG 9HUVLRQ
%\WHDQG
6ORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW+
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
6XEPRGXOHVORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW+
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
&KDQQHOQXPEHU+
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG (UURUW\SH %,QFRPLQJIDXOW
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
(UURUW\SH+ 0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%LWQR 5HVHUYHG %LWQR 5HVHUYHG %LWQR 5HVHUYHG %LWQR
%\WH 6ORWQXPEHUDIWHUZKLFKWKHEDFNSODQHEXVLVLQWHUUXSWHG
Figure 2-5
2-8
Structure of the diagnostics for the bus interrupt for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN on the PROFINET IO
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
Product information 2.1 Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO
6.3.7.5 Failure of the load voltage The electronic modules behave as follows for a failure of the load voltage (generally analog and technology modules): • If such a module is removed during the failure of the load voltage, a remove interrupt is generated. • If such a module is inserted during the failure of the load voltage, an insert interrupt is generated.
Note If an electronic module was unparametrized with an IO controller via the application program, then these unparametrized data are not available after restoration of the load voltage.
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
2-9
Product information 2.2 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
2.2
2.2
Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
8.7.1 Features of the interface module IM151-3 PN Compatibility of the interface module IM 151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) Note Firmware version of the controller used In order for you to be able to operate the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA100AB0) on a controller, this must be operated with one of the firmware versions listed in the tables below. You can utilize the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0) independently of the controller firmware version.
The following firmware versions are compatible to the interface module IM 151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0): CPU Controller
Firmware version
CP
SOFTNET PNIO
315-2 PN/DP 317-2 PN/DP
317F-2 PN/DP
443-1
343-1
SIMATIC NET-CD
≥ V2.3.2
≥ V2.3.3
≥ V2.2
≥2.0
V 6.3 Hotfix 1
8.7.2 SNMP The IM151-3 PN supports the Ethernet service SNMP. MIB-2 (RFC1213) is supported R/W objects are changeable using SNMP tools and are stored in the device. Remanent stored SNMP parameters are reset to default settings (STEP 7 V5.3 SP 3 and higher) in HW config dialog "Target system > Ethernet > Edit Ethernet nodes" "Reset" button under "Reset to default settings". Provided that the component has a station name (saved on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card), this is not deleted. The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is not a part of a factory-new component. Likewise, the IP address, that is only present when the component is in a switched on state, is not deleted. After an exchange with a factory-new component the R/W objects in the IM151-3 PN are set to default settings.
2-10
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
Product information 2.3 Digital Electronic Modules
2.3
2.3
Digital Electronic Modules
11.13 Digital Electronic module 4DO DC24V/0,5A ST (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) Features • Digital electronic module with four outputs • Output current 0.5 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoids, direct current switches and warning lights • Supports isochronous operation
2.4
2.4
Power modules
10.2 Power module PM-E DC24V (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0) Terminal assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module for the different terminal modules: Table 2-2
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module View
Terminal assignment
Remarks 24 VDC: Rated load voltage
7036$DQG30(9'&
M: Chassis ground AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage.
$8; $ $
9'&
9'&
0
0
$8;
$
$
$8;
9'&
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
2-11
Product information 2.4 Power modules View
Terminal assignment
Remarks 24 VDC: Rated load voltage
7036$DQG30(9'&
M: Chassis ground AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage. AUX1 is used as PE.
$8; $
9'&
$
9'&
0
$
$
$8;
9'& 0 $8;
7036DQG30(9'&
24 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground
$8;
9'&
9'&
0
0
9'&
2-12
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
Product information 2.4 Power modules
10.3 Power module PM-E DC24..48V (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0) Terminal assignment The following table shows you the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module for the different terminal modules: Table 2-3
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module View
Terminal assignment 7036$DQG30(9'&
Remarks 24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage.
$8; $
9'&
$
9'&
0
$
$
$8;
9'& 0 $8;
24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage 7036$DQG30(9'&
M: Chassis ground $8; $ $
9'&
9'&
0
0
$8;
$
$
$8;
9'&
7036DQG30(9'&
AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage. AUX1 is used as PE.
24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground
$8;
9'&
9'&
0
0
9'&
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
2-13
Product information 2.4 Power modules
2-14
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
Index B
I
Backplane bus Interruption, 2-7
IM151-3 PN HIGH FEATURE SNMP, 2-10
C
L
Channel diagnostics, 2-4
Load voltage Failure, 2-9
D Diagnostics Bus interruption, 2-7
P Power module PM-E 24..48 VDC Terminal assignment, 2-13
F Failure of the load voltage, 2-9
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
Index-1
Index
Index-2
Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01